JP2023177732A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine having characteristics in a movable body.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a movable body, an openable and closable door body, and detection means which can detect an opened or closed state of the door body. When an electric supply is started in a state (first state) in which the door body is opened, at least a first operation is started. When the door body transitions from the first state to a state in which the door body is closed, the movable body starts at least a second operation. The ON/OFF of the electric supply can be executed in the first state. When one operation related to the detection means is carried out, a state (second state) in which a detection state of the detection means detects that the door body is closed is realized even in the first state. Additionally, when the electric supply is started in the second state, the movable body does not start the first operation but the second operation. A direction of the movable body at an operation start in the first operation and a direction of the movable body at an operation start in the second operation are different.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 36

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of game machine such as a slot machine or a pachinko machine, there is a game machine equipped with various movable bodies (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2005-296354

However, in the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the movable body.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine whose movable body has characteristics.

A game machine according to the present invention is a game machine including a movable body, a door body that can be opened and closed, and a detection means that can detect the open/closed state of the door body, wherein the movable body is When the power is turned on in a state where the gate is open (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), at least the first operation is started, and the movable body changes from the first state to the door body. Upon changing to the closed state, at least a second operation is initiated, the turning on and off of the power source being executable in the case of the first state, and an operation regarding the detection means being performed. Even in the first state, the detection state of the detection means is configured to be a state in which closing of the door body is detected (hereinafter referred to as the "second state"), and When the power is turned on in the second state, the movable body starts the second operation without starting the first operation, and the movable body starts the operation in the first operation. The gaming machine is characterized in that the directions in which the movable body starts operating in the second action and the second action are different from each other.

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine whose movable body has characteristics.

1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. (a) is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a diagram showing a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including activation combinations), symbol combinations, payouts, and activations corresponding to each winning combination. 3 is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of a main control unit of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a flowchart showing the flow of a first sub-control unit main process, a first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and a first sub-control unit timer interrupt process of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. Flow of second sub-control unit main processing, second sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and second sub-control unit image control processing of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention It is a flowchart which shows. (a) A schematic diagram (front view) showing the main parts of the slot machine 100. (b) is a diagram showing a display example of the menu screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 in the setting change/setting confirmation mode and a display example of the LED board 101a disposed inside the main body 101. (c) A diagram showing a display example when the item of operation check MC is temporarily selected on the menu screen. (d) is a diagram showing an example of the display after the OK button 193a is pressed while the item of operation check MC is temporarily selected. (a) A diagram showing an example of the display after the OK button 193a is pressed with the LED check LC item provisionally selected on the operation check menu screen MCM. (b) is a diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed while an item in the upper area AE is temporarily selected on the LED check area menu screen LEM. (c) A diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed while an item in the center area CE is temporarily selected on the LED check area menu screen LEM. (d) It is a diagram showing an example of a display after the OK button 193a is pressed with an item in the lower area UE temporarily selected on the ED check area menu screen LEM. (a) A diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed with the speaker check item SC provisionally selected on the operation check menu screen MCM. (b), (c) In the setting change/setting confirmation mode, the flow is shown in chronological order until the LED check in the upper area is selected with the door open. (a) to (c) are diagrams chronologically showing the flow until the LED check in the upper area is selected with the door open in the setting change/setting confirmation mode. (c) In the LED check area menu screen LEM, the OK button 193a is pressed while the item in the upper area AE is temporarily selected. (d) It is a diagram showing in chronological order the flow from when the LED check of the upper region is selected with the door closed until the door is closed and the LED check of the upper region is executed. (a), (b) are diagrams chronologically showing the flow from when the LED check of the upper area is selected with the door closed until the door is closed and the LED check of the upper area is executed. . (c), (d) Diagram showing the flow in chronological order from when the LED check in the center area is selected during the LED check in the upper area to when the LED check in the center area is executed with the door closed. It is. (a), (b) Diagram showing the flow in chronological order from when the LED check in the center area is selected during the LED check in the upper area to when the LED check in the center area is executed with the door closed. It is. (c) is a diagram illustrating a state in which the door is opened when an LED check of the central region is executed with the door closed. (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the door is closed when an LED check of the central region is executed with the door in an open state; (a) to (c) are diagrams showing the flow from when the lower area LED check is selected during the execution of the central area LED check (door closing) until the lower area LED check is executed. (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the door is opened when an LED check of the lower area is executed with the door closed. (a) A diagram showing a state in which the item of speaker check SC is temporarily selected on the operation check menu screen MCM. (b) to (d) are diagrams showing display examples after the OK button 193a is pressed with the speaker check item SC provisionally selected on the operation check menu screen MCM. (a) A diagram showing a state in which the door is closed when a speaker check is executed with the door open. (b) to (d) show the flow from when the lever operation to confirm the setting is executed while the LED check (door opening) in the central area is being executed until the front door 102 is closed before the setting key is returned. It is a diagram. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing the flow from when the setting key is returned to when the front door 102 is closed during execution of the LED check (door opening) in the central region. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram (front view) showing the main parts of the slot machine 100 in a two-stake recommended game. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram (front view) showing the main parts of the slot machine 100 in a two-stake recommended game. (a) A schematic diagram (front view) showing the main parts of the slot machine 100 in a two-stakes bet game. (b) to (d) are schematic diagrams (front view) showing the main parts of the slot machine 100 in the 3-coin bet recommended game. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram (front view) showing the main parts of the slot machine 100 in a 3-coin bet recommended game. (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the front door 102 is opened and the power is turned on with a setting key provided inside the main body 101 turned on; b) A diagram showing a display example when the item of system volume setting SS is temporarily selected on the menu screen. (c) A diagram showing an example of a display after the OK button 193a is pressed while the item of system volume setting SS is temporarily selected. (a), (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display when the item of power saving mode setting EM is provisionally selected on the menu screen returned from system volume setting. (c) A diagram showing an example of a display after the OK button 193a is pressed while the item of power saving mode setting EM is temporarily selected. (d) A diagram showing a display example of a state where power saving mode setting ON is temporarily selected on the power saving mode setting screen EMM. (a) A diagram showing an example of a display in a state where the power saving mode setting is set to on. (b), (c) are diagrams showing display examples when the item of system volume setting SS is temporarily selected on the menu screen returned from the power saving mode setting. (d) A diagram showing an example of a display after the OK button 193a is pressed while the item of system volume setting SS is temporarily selected. (a) A diagram showing a display example after the administrator setting volume is changed to volume 1 on the system volume screen SSM and the OK button 193a is pressed. (b), (c) are diagrams showing display examples when the item of power saving mode setting EM is provisionally selected on the menu screen returned from system volume setting. (d) A diagram showing an example of a display after the OK button 193a is pressed with the item of power saving mode setting EM temporarily selected. (a) It is a figure showing the example of a display of the state where power saving mode setting OFF is tentatively selected on power saving mode setting screen EMM. (b) A diagram showing an example of a display in a state where the power saving mode setting is set to OFF. (c), (d) are diagrams showing display examples when the item of system volume setting SS is provisionally selected on the menu screen returned from the power saving mode setting. (a) A diagram showing an example of the display after the OK button 193a is pressed while the item of system volume setting SS is temporarily selected. (a) A schematic diagram (front view) of the main parts extracted and showing the notification means included in the slot machine 100. (b) to (f) are diagrams chronologically showing examples of various notifications after the operation check and setting change are executed in the setting change mode until transition to the normal game. It is a diagram showing an example of various notifications in chronological order until transition to the normal game after the operation check and setting change are executed in the setting change mode. (a) to (c) are diagrams chronologically illustrating examples of various notifications after execution of operation check and setting change in setting change mode until transition to normal game. (d) to (f) are diagrams chronologically illustrating examples of various notifications after the operation check and setting confirmation are executed in the setting confirmation mode until transition to the normal game. It is a diagram showing an example of various notifications in chronological order until the transition to the normal game after the operation check and setting confirmation are executed in the setting confirmation mode. It is a diagram showing an example of various notifications in chronological order until the transition to the normal game after the operation check and setting confirmation are executed in the setting confirmation mode. It is a diagram showing in chronological order Modification 1 of various notifications until the transition to the normal gaming state (demonstration screen) after the setting change is completed in the setting change mode. It is a diagram showing a modification example 2 of various notifications in chronological order until the transition to the normal gaming state (demonstration screen) after the setting change is completed in the setting change mode. It is a diagram showing in chronological order a modification example 3 of various notifications until the transition to the normal gaming state (demonstration screen) after the hopper error is resolved. (a) It is a front view showing a state in which the movable body KT has moved to the upper limit position (second position). (b) is a front view showing a state in which the movable body KT has moved to the lower limit position (first position). (c) to (f) An example of the first operation of the movable body KT in the case (first case) where the movable body KT is located at the lower limit position (first position) before power is turned on is shown in chronological order. It is a diagram. (g) to (h) are diagrams showing an example of the second operation of the movable body KT in chronological order. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing an example of a second operation of the movable body KT in chronological order. (e) to (h) When the front door 102 is in the closed state and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state (second state), the power is turned on with the movable body KT located at the lower limit position (first position). FIG. 4 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of the operation of the movable body KT when the movable body KT is moved. (a) to (c) When the front door 102 is in the closed state and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state (second state), the power is turned on with the movable body KT located at the lower limit position (first position). FIG. 4 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of the operation of the movable body KT when the movable body KT is moved. (d) to (g) An example of the first operation of the movable body KT in a case where the movable body KT is not located at the lower limit position (first position) before power is turned on (second case) is shown in chronological order. It is a diagram. (a) to (f) An example of the first operation of the movable body KT in a case where the movable body KT is not located at the lower limit position (first position) before power is turned on (second case) is shown in chronological order. It is a diagram. (a) to (f) When the front door 102 is in the closed state and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state (second state), the movable body KT is in a position other than the lower limit position (first position) and the upper limit position (second position). FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating, in chronological order, an example of the operation of the movable body KT when the power is turned on while the movable body KT is located at the position (third position). (a) to (e) When the front door 102 is in the closed state and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state (second state), the power is turned on with the movable body KT located at the upper limit position (second position). FIG. 3 is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of the operation of the movable body KT when (a) to (g) are diagrams showing an example of the operation of the movable body KT during a normal game in chronological order. (a) to (h) are diagrams showing, in chronological order, an example of the operation of the movable body KT when the door body is opened during the operation of the movable body KT. (a) It is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of the operation of the movable body KT when the door body is opened during the operation of the movable body KT. (b) to (f) are diagrams showing modified examples of the operation of the movable body KT in chronological order. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open. (a) A schematic diagram (front view) of the main parts extracted and showing the notification means included in the slot machine 100. (b) A diagram showing an example of a display by the main board display 190. (c) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of error notification when a door opening error occurs. (a) A diagram showing an example of error notification when a door opening error occurs. (b) to (f) are diagrams showing an example of error notification when a hopper error occurs. (a) to (f) are diagrams showing an example of error notification when a hopper error occurs. (a) to (f) are diagrams showing modification example 1 of error notification when a hopper error occurs. (g) to (i) are diagrams illustrating the continuation of Modified Example 1 of error notification when a hopper error occurs. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing a second modification of error notification when a hopper error occurs. (g) to (i) are diagrams showing the continuation of Modification 2 of error notification when a hopper error occurs. (a) to (f) are diagrams showing, in chronological order, an example of resolving a hopper error by resetting the door. (a) to (f) are diagrams showing, in chronological order, an example of error notification of a hopper error when transitioning to a setting change mode. (a) to (e) are diagrams illustrating in chronological order an example of error notification of a hopper error when transitioning to a setting change mode. (a) to (f) are diagrams chronologically showing modified examples of error notification of a hopper error when transitioning to a setting change mode. (a) to (e) are diagrams showing, in chronological order, modified examples of error notification of a hopper error when transitioning to a setting change mode. (a) to (f) are diagrams chronologically showing an example of error notification of a hopper error when transitioning to a setting confirmation mode. (a) It is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of error notification of a hopper error when transitioning to a setting confirmation mode. (a) to (f) are diagrams chronologically showing an example of a setting change operation in a normal setting change mode. (a) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of a setting change operation in a normal setting change mode in chronological order. (c) to (e) are diagrams chronologically showing an example of a setting confirmation operation in a normal setting confirmation mode. (a) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of a setting confirmation operation in a normal setting confirmation mode in chronological order. (c) to (e) are diagrams chronologically showing examples of setting change modes by operating setting keys after power is turned on; (a) to (f) are diagrams showing, in chronological order, an example of a setting change mode by operating a setting key after the power is turned on; (a) It is a diagram showing in chronological order the flow of various processes when the power is turned on while a certain error has occurred and the setting change mode is entered before the error notification. (b) is a diagram chronologically showing the flow of various processes when error notification is executed without transitioning to setting change mode after the power is turned on in a state where a certain error has occurred. (a) to (f) are diagrams chronologically showing setting changes (modification example 1) when a certain error remains; (g) to (j) are diagrams chronologically showing the continuation of the setting change (Modification 1) when a certain error remains. (a) to (f) are diagrams chronologically showing setting changes (modified example 2) when a certain error remains; (g) to (k) are diagrams chronologically showing the continuation of setting changes (modified example 2) when a certain error remains. (a) to (f) are diagrams chronologically showing setting changes (modified example 3) when a certain error remains; (g) to (i) are diagrams chronologically showing the continuation of setting changes (modified example 3) when a certain error remains. (a) to (f) are diagrams chronologically showing setting changes (modified example 4) when a certain error remains; (g) to (k) are diagrams chronologically showing the continuation of setting changes (modified example 4) when a certain error remains. (a) to (f) are diagrams chronologically showing setting changes (modified example 5) when a certain error remains; (g) to (j) are diagrams chronologically showing the continuation of setting changes (modified example 5) when a certain error remains. (a) to (f) are diagrams chronologically showing setting changes (modified example 6) when a certain error remains; (g) to (k) are diagrams chronologically showing the continuation of setting changes (modified example 6) when a certain error remains.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the slot machine of this embodiment, a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of internal winning of the plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop match the predetermined payout conditions, the game media will be paid out and the game will end; if not, the game media will be paid out. This is a game machine that plays a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 1. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . In this specification, the state in which the front door 102 is open to the main body 101 is sometimes referred to as "door open" or "open state", and the state in which the front door 102 is closed to the main body 101 is sometimes referred to as "door open" or "open state". The closed (closed) state is sometimes called "door closed" or "closed state."

In this example, by inserting a key owned by the manager of the game parlor into the door key hole 140, the front door 102, which is locked in the closed state, can be opened. Therefore, the administrator can unlock the front door 102 (change it from the closed state to the open state), but anyone other than the administrator (for example, a player) cannot unlock the front door 102. .

On the right side of the main body 101, an optical sensor (detection means; hereinafter also referred to as "opening/closing sensor"; not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the front door 102 is configured to pass through the space.

The main control unit 300 monitors the states of various sensors 318 including this opening/closing sensor in main control timer interrupt processing to be described later. When the front door 102 is in the closed state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where it blocks light from the light emitting part of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101, the opening/closing sensor outputs a signal ( For example, a low level signal) is output to the main control unit 300.

On the other hand, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where it does not block the light from the light emitting part of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101, the opening/closing sensor indicates that it is in the open detection state. A signal (for example, a high level signal) is output to the main control section 300.

That is, the opening/closing sensor is a detection means capable of detecting the opening/closing state of the front door (door body) 102, and when the front door 102 is in the closed state, the detection state becomes the closed detection state and the front door 102 is in the open state. In this case, the detection state becomes the open detection state.

Note that the "detection means" according to the present invention is not limited to an optical sensor, and may be, for example, a magnetic sensor, a proximity switch, a micro switch, a Hall element, or the like. Furthermore, the detection state is not limited to one in which the open detection state and the closed detection state always switch as the door body opens and closes, and the detection state can change to the closed detection state even if the door body is in the open state. Alternatively, even if the door body is in the closed state, the detection state may be in the open detection state.

Here, the opening/closing sensor according to the present example is configured such that when a certain operation is performed, the detection state changes to the closed detection state even if the front door (door body) 102 is in the open state. Specifically, when the front door 102 is in the open state, a light shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape etc. By blocking the light from the light emitting part of the opening/closing sensor 101, even if the front door 102 is in the open state, the detection state of the opening/closing sensor can be forced into the closed detection state.

Note that the "certain operation" according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and for example, a DIP switch that puts the open/close sensor in a closed detection state may be provided and the DIP switch may be operated as a predetermined operation. . Further, when the detection means is constituted by a magnetic sensor, the detection state of the opening/closing sensor may be changed to the closed detection state by bringing a magnet close to the opening/closing sensor.

Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface (not shown) are stored in the center of the main body 101, and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the reel window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible. By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Further, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A reel backlight 148 (see FIG. 28, etc.) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the reel window 113 is arranged on the back side of each reel 110 to 112. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. In addition, inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting part of this optical sensor A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the light-receiving section and the light-receiving section. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the winning line 114 that becomes valid. The valid winning line 114 is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. There are five winning lines 114. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line will be valid, and if two medals are being bet, three horizontal winning lines (the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line) will be valid, and the medal will be When 3 coins are bet, 5 lines including the downward right winning line and the upward right winning line may be made valid as the winning lines. Note that the number of winning lines 114 is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right horizontal winning line, The five winning lines, the downward winning line and the upward winning line to the right, may be set as valid winning lines, or the same number of winning lines may be uniformly set as valid winning lines, regardless of the number of bets.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery for winning combinations, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. be. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, up to a maximum of three coins, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as the MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up. Hereinafter, in this embodiment, a game in which three medals are inserted may be referred to as a "three-bet bet game," and a game in which two medals are inserted may be referred to as a "two-bet bet game."

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In this embodiment, the stored token number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout token number display 127 are composed of seven segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of this embodiment also functions as an effect device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, the order of operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with each reel 110 to 112. . More specifically, by operating the left stop button 137, the left reel 110 can be stopped, by operating the middle stop button 138, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the right stop button 139, the middle reel 111 can be stopped. By operating the right reel 112, it is possible to stop the right reel 112.

Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation will be referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as the second stop operation, the last stop operation will be referred to as the third stop operation, and the first stop operation will be referred to as the third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is sometimes referred to as the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is sometimes referred to as the third stop reel. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The order of operations in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 and the stop operation is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order", and the order of operations in which the first stop reel is the center reel 111 and the stop operation is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order". The operation sequence in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 as a stop operation is called the "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push." Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body may be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

A decorative title panel 162 for displaying the model name, etc. is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136. A medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided at the bottom of the title panel 162.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The upper lamp 142 provided on the upper part of the front door 102 and the side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game.

A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided at the top of the presentation device 160. This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed on the back side of the shutter 163. , effect image display device), and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (on the player's side). It has a structure that appears.

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of this embodiment also functions as a presentation device that executes a presentation to be described later.

The effect button 192 is a button that can be operated when executing a predetermined effect. In this embodiment, based on the operation of the performance button 192, a performance suggesting the provision of a benefit may be executed.

Note that it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device, as long as it is configured to be able to display various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, etc. , a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the entirety can be visually recognized by the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

<Circuit configuration of control section>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 2. Note that this figure is a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 is equipped with a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used for internal lottery of winning combinations, stop of reels, etc. ROM 306 for storing position etc., RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. Equipped with WDT (watch dog timer) 314. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz. =1.504ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a number in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. It is equipped with a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal), and when the start signal is input from this start signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (main processing of the main control section described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal input from the medal slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, a stop button 139 sensor, a payment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, an index sensor for the reel 110, The state of the reel 111 index sensor, reel 112 index sensor, performance button 192 sensor, etc.) is monitored.

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and insert medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect input operation in case. The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of reel 110, the index sensor of reel 111, and the index sensor of reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes, become the level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives a solenoid provided on the medal selector 170 that sorts the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided on the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored number of coins display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 is provided for driving the display 126 and the payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects a slot to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. Outputs gaming information (for example, gaming status) of the machine 100. The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply that is supplied to the main control unit 1300. 9V), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 is one-way communication, and the main control section 300 can send signals such as commands to the first sub-control section 400; Signals such as commands cannot be sent from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control commands. There is. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also has a ROM 406 that stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, backlight lighting patterns, data for controlling various indicators, etc. It is set up.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls audio output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123 etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at every interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
The symbol arrangement on each of the reels 110 to 112 described above will be explained using FIG. 3(a). Note that this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112).

On each reel 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (in this embodiment, 21 symbols with numbers 0 to 20) of a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Further, the numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on each reel 110 to 112. For example, in this embodiment, the number 1 piece on the left reel 110 has a “Replay” symbol, the number 0 piece on the middle reel 111 has a “Bell” symbol, and the number 2 piece on the right reel 112 has a “Bell” symbol. "Watermelon" designs are placed on each page.

<Type of winning role>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 3(b). The figure shows the types of winning combinations (including activation combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination. Among the winning combinations in this embodiment, the big bonus (BB1, BB2) and the regular bonus (RB) are used as bonus combinations that transfer to bonus games, and replays are played without inserting new medals. The winning roles that can be played are sometimes called "operating roles" to be distinguished from the winning roles, but the "winning roles" in this embodiment include the operating roles, such as the big bonus, regular bonus, and re-playing role. is included. In addition, "winning" in this embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an active role that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the active line, such as a big bonus, a regular Includes bonuses and replay wins.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include a big bonus (BB1, BB2), a regular bonus (RB), a small winning combination (cherry, watermelon, bell), and a replay. It goes without saying that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

"Big Bonus (BB1, BB2)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "BB") is a special winning combination (activation winning combination) that starts a big bonus game (BB game) upon winning. The corresponding symbol combinations are "BB1 symbol (also called white 7) - BB1 symbol - BB1 symbol" for BB1, and "BB2 symbol (also called blue 7) - BB2 symbol - BB2 symbol" for BB2. Furthermore, flag carryover is performed for BB1 and BB2. In other words, if BB1 or BB2 is internally won, a flag indicating this will be set (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300), but even if BB1 or BB2 is not won in that game, the winning will not be possible. The flag indicating internal winning will remain on until the next game, and even after the next game, BB1 and BB2 will be internally won, and the symbol combination "White 7-White 7-White 7" corresponding to BB1 and the symbol corresponding to BB2 will remain on. The combination "Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7" is in a state where they all win prizes.

"Regular Bonus (RB)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "RB") is a special combination (operating combination) that starts a regular bonus game (RB game) upon winning. The corresponding symbol combination is "RB symbol (also referred to as bonus) - RB symbol - RB symbol". Note that flag carryover is also carried out for RB in the same way as for BB described above. However, in the big bonus game (BB game), the start of the big bonus game is not subject to the internal winning of the regular bonus game (RB game) or the display of the symbol combination on the winning line. The regular bonus game may be started later, and when one regular bonus game ends, the next regular bonus game may be started immediately, so that the regular bonus game is automatically started.

``Small winning combinations (cherry, watermelon, bell) (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as ``cherry,'' ``watermelon,'' and ``bell'') are winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning, and the corresponding symbols The combinations are "cherry pattern - ANY pattern - ANY pattern" for cherry, "watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern" for watermelon, and "bell pattern - bell pattern - bell pattern" for bell. The corresponding payout numbers are as shown in the same figure, and are 4 for cherries, 12 for watermelons, and 8 for bells. In the case of "cherry symbol - ANY symbol - ANY symbol", the symbol on the left reel 110 only needs to be the "cherry" symbol, and the symbols on the middle reel 111 and right reel 112 may be any symbol.

"Replay" is a winning combination (activation combination) that allows you to play the next game without inserting medals (game media) by winning a prize, and no medals are paid out. Note that the corresponding symbol combination for replay is "replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol."

Here, we will outline the internal winning probability of winning combinations.

The internal winning probability for each role is calculated by converting numerical data corresponding to the range of lottery data associated with each role to numerical data within the range of random numbers obtained during the internal lottery (65536 in this embodiment), which will be described later. It is calculated by dividing the value by . The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each win or loss. In the winning combination internal lottery process to be described later, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is a value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to any combination, and the internal winning combination is determined. In reality, this lottery data has settings 1 to 6 with different winning probabilities for at least one role, and game parlor staff can arbitrarily select and set any of the settings. .

In this embodiment, watermelon and cherry are each won internally in the winning combination internal lottery process, and when the operation timing of the stop operation is suitable. Hereinafter, watermelon and cherry will also be referred to as chance roles. In addition, Bell wins when the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process and the stopping operations are performed in the correct stopping operation order. Hereinafter, Bell will also be referred to as Oshiunyaku.

The AT state is a gaming state in which information (details of a stop operation) that is advantageous to the player is notified when a chance winning combination or a pushing success winning combination is internally won. In the AT state, the effect image display device 157 and the payout number display device 127 are used to execute an operation navigation that notifies you of the details of the stop operation that will help you win a prize. Specifically, if the push winning combination is internally won in the AT state, the stop operation order is announced, and if the chance combination is internally won in the AT state, the stop operation timing (indication of the internally won combination) is notified. Since the operation navigation is executed, the player can easily win a predetermined small winning combination by following the stop operation details of the operation navigation. In other words, the AT state is a state in which a large profit is given to the player by the operation navigation.

On the other hand, the normal state is a state in which the operation navigation is not executed even if a chance winning combination or a pushing success winning combination is internally won.

In this embodiment, if the AT lottery is won in the normal state, the AT state is entered. In the AT lottery, for example, the propriety of winning may be determined based on the results of an internal lottery for winning combinations. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the number of games played in the normal state after the end of the AT state reaches a predetermined threshold (hereinafter referred to as the number of ceiling games), the AT state is entered. That is, if the player wins the AT lottery in the normal state or if the number of games played in the normal state reaches the ceiling number of games, the player shifts to the AT state and is given a predetermined number of AT games. In addition, in the AT state, an AT additional lottery for adding the number of AT games is performed, and if the AT additional lottery is won, a predetermined number of AT games is added. On the other hand, in the AT state, when the allotted number of AT games is played out, the AT state ends and the state shifts to the normal state.

<Operation of slot machine>
Next, the processing of the main control section 300, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500 will be explained using the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control section main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 will be explained using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on, first, in step S101, various initial setting processes are performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupts are disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables are initialized to be stored in the RAM 308, and the WDT 314 is enabled and initialized. Configure values, etc.

In step S102, a medal insertion/start operation reception process is executed. Here, it is determined by detection by the sensor circuit 320 whether there is an electronic medal insertion operation using the bet buttons 130 to 132 or a direct medal insertion operation from the medal insertion slot 141. turns on the winning line display lamp 120 according to the number of medals inserted. Also, preparations are made to transmit a medal insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that if the player wins a replay combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so there is no need for the player to insert medals.

Further, a check is made as to whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated based on the detection by the sensor circuit 320, and if it is determined that the start lever 135 has been operated, the number of medals that have been inserted is determined, and the first sub-control unit 400 In response, preparations are made to send a start lever acceptance command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated.

In step S103, valid winning lines are determined.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is obtained.

In step S105, an internal lottery process for winning combinations is performed. In the internal lottery process for winning combinations, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read out according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the random number value acquired in step S104. As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including an activation combination) is internally won, the condition device (flag) of the internally won combination is activated (the flag of that winning combination is turned ON). Further, in this step S105, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating the result of the winning internal lottery to the first sub-control unit 400. For example, if a watermelon is internally won, preparations are made to send an internal winning command indicating that a watermelon has been internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and the result of the internal lottery for the winning combination is a loss (the winning combination is not the winning combination). (non-winning), preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating a loss to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S106, reel stop data is selected based on the results of the winning combination internal lottery in step S105. Regarding the reel stop data of winning combinations in which the stop operation order is questioned, the operation conditions are also set, and when the reel stop data corresponding to these is selected, the operation conditions are also set.

In step S107, reel rotation start processing is executed to start rotation of all reels 110 to 112 based on the start operation.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any stop button is pressed, the stop data of the reel stop data is sent to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Referring to this, any one of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop data. If all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S109. In addition, in this step S108, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (in detail, for the first stop operation, a stop button reception 1 command, a second stop operation (for the stop button reception 2 command, for the third stop operation, the stop button reception 3 command) is prepared to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel Reel stop command regarding the stop position (in detail, for the first stop reel, reel stop 1 command, for the second stop operation, reel stop 2 command, for the third stop operation, reel stop command) 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S109, winning determination processing is performed. In the winning determination process, a winning determination is made for the symbols that stopped when the stop buttons 137 to 139 were pressed, and if a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, the winning combination is determined. It is determined that the role has been won. For example, if "watermelon symbol - watermelon symbol - watermelon symbol" are aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the watermelon prize has been won. Further, in this step S109, preparations are made to transmit a display determination command indicating the result of winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if a winning combination has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination will be paid out. Further, in step S110, preparations are made to transmit a medal payout command indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, a game state control process is performed. In this gaming state control process, control for shifting the gaming state is performed, and for example, in the case of a BB win, preparations are made so that the BB game can be started from the next time. Further, in this step S111, preparations are made to transmit a gaming status command indicating the gaming status to the first sub-control unit 400.

With the above, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 5) of the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Start processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing for temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed (once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each type of sensor 318. The signal state is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S205, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in respective time units.

In step S206, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S207, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Illustration omitted) Executes error handling. Furthermore, settings are made for the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators according to the current gaming state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt termination process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set to the original registers. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at power outage upon power restoration are saved to a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as recovery data, and power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 6. Note that FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 6(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 6(a).

When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed. Through this process, an area for storing internal winning information, which is information representing the result of internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state, are provided in the RAM 408, respectively.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S303. In step S303, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, effect control processing (details will be described later) is performed. Here, preparations for the performance are made in accordance with the performance reservation information in the performance reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing an update process of the effect data if it is necessary to update the effect data.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for the various lamps 420 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if the effect data read in step S305 includes a command for the shutter 163, this command is output to the drive circuit 424.

In step S309, information output processing is performed to perform settings for transmitting a command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S305, settings are made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 6(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 6(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S501, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6A, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S502, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, and the random value for effect is updated.

<Processing of second sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 7. Note that FIG. 7A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S3001 of FIG. 7(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first performed in step S601. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 508, initialization of the storage area in the VRAM 518, etc. are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S603.

In step S603, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines each command received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S605, production control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading out effect data for controlling an image related to a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. It also includes performing processes such as reading out performance data other than this from the ROM 506, and performing update processing of the performance data when it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S605, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding display images (notification images, background images) is performed. When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S602.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. 7(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 7(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S801, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 7A, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S802, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control process of step S4006 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 7(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S902, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the VDP 516. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process advances to step S903; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. wait until

In step S903, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S901, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (location coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S905, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S906; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal is input. Wait for input.

In step S906, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Operation check>
Next, operation checks that can be executed by the slot machine 100 will be explained.

Here, the operation check refers to operating a certain presentation means (one or more presentation means) among the plurality of presentation means provided in the slot machine 100 based on a certain predetermined operation pattern. This is the work of checking (inspecting) whether a certain presentation means is operating based on a certain operation pattern (whether there is any abnormality).

<Operation check/direction means (display means)>
First, prior to explaining the operation check, the presentation means provided in the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 8(a). FIG. 8(a) is a schematic diagram (front view) showing the main parts of the slot machine 100.

The slot machine 100 is equipped with display means capable of displaying information as one of the presentation means. Examples of the display means included in the slot machine 100 include the liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157, the payout number display 127, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, etc. described using FIG. In this example, it is composed of a liquid crystal display device and an LED.

When a display means is adopted as a presentation means, a certain operation pattern may be, for example, an operation pattern in which the entire display area of the display means is filled with one or more colors, or a pattern in which the display means is displayed and hidden at a certain time interval. An operation pattern that repeats, an operation pattern that lights up LED segments in a certain order, an operation pattern that makes the LED blink, an operation pattern that changes the color of a display means, an operation pattern that displays in a certain order when there are multiple display means. , an operation pattern for displaying only some of the display means when there are a plurality of display means, and the like.

<Operation check/direction means (sound output means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a sound output means capable of outputting sound as one of the performance means. Examples of sound output means included in the slot machine 100 include the speakers 272 and 277 described using FIG. 2.

When a sound output means is adopted as the production means, the certain operation pattern may be, for example, an operation pattern that causes the sound output means to output a certain sound, an operation pattern that changes the volume or frequency of the sound output from the sound output means, An operation pattern for stopping (silencing) the output of sound from a sound output means, an operation pattern for outputting sound in a certain order when there are multiple sound output means, and a partial sound output when there are multiple sound output means Examples include an operation pattern in which only the means outputs sound.

Note that in this specification, the sound output means such as the speakers 272, 277 may be collectively referred to as "speakers", and the operation check of these sound output means may be referred to as "speaker check".

<Operation check/direction means (light emitting means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a light emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light as one of the presentation means. Examples of the light emitting means provided in the slot machine 100 include the upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144 described using FIG. 148, a title panel 162, a production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, a start lever 135, etc., and in this example, all light emitting means are constituted by LEDs.

When a light emitting means is adopted as a presentation means, a certain operation pattern includes, for example, an operation pattern in which the LEDs constituting the light emitting means are lit in a certain order, an operation pattern in which the LEDs constituting the light emitting means are blinked, and an operation pattern in which the LEDs constituting the light emitting means are blinked. Examples include an operation pattern that changes color, an operation pattern that causes light emitting means to emit light in a certain order when there is a plurality of light emitting means, and an operation pattern that causes only some of the light emitting means to be displayed when there is a plurality of light emitting means.

Note that the present invention is also applicable to pachinko machines, and examples of light emitting means included in pachinko machines include frame lamps, performance buttons, accessories, and the like.

<Operation check/Direction means (light emitting means)/Top lamp, side lamp>
The upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 operate based on a certain operation pattern when the operation check start condition is satisfied (in this example, when the front door 102 is closed and is subject to the operation check). (In this example, light emission based on an operation pattern that repeats blue lighting → red lighting → green lighting → blue lighting → etc.) can be executed.

On the other hand, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 light up in white when the operation check start condition is not met (in this example, when the front door 102 is open), and the operation check start condition is not satisfied. (in this example, when the front door 102 is closed and is not subject to operation check), the light is turned off.

<Operation check/Production means (light emitting means)/Navi lamp>
The navigation lamps 149a to 149c perform an operation based on a certain operation pattern (in this example, when the front door 102 is closed and is subject to an operation check) when operation check start conditions are satisfied In this example, it is possible to emit light based on an operation pattern of repeating white lighting and extinguishing.

On the other hand, the navigation lamps 149a to 149c light up in white when the operation check start conditions are not met (in this example, when the front door 102 is open), and when the operation check start conditions are not met ( In this example, the light is turned off when the front door 102 is closed and is not subject to an operation check.

<Operation check/Direction means (light emitting means)/Reel backlight, title panel>
The reel backlight 148 and the title panel 162 perform an operation based on a certain operation pattern (in this example, a white light is displayed) when the operation check start condition is satisfied (in this example, when the operation check is targeted). If the operation check start conditions are not met (in this example, if the operation check is not performed), the light will turn off and the front door will open. Opening or closing of 102 is not an operation check condition.

<Operation check/Production means (light emitting means)/Production button, stop button>
The effect button 192 and stop buttons 137 to 139 are used to display an action based on a certain action pattern (in this example, a red color If it is possible to perform light emission based on an operation pattern that repeats lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → etc., but the operation check start conditions are not met (in this example, the operation check target ), the light goes out, and opening or closing of the front door 102 is not a condition for starting the operation check.

In the present specification, light emitting means composed of LEDs such as the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the reel backlight 148, the navigation lamps 149a to 149c, the production button 192, the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the title panel 162 are referred to as , may be collectively referred to as "LED", and the operation check of these light emitting means may be referred to as "LED check", but the "light emitting means" according to the present invention is not limited to LEDs.

Furthermore, since the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are light emitting means arranged in the upper region of the slot machine 100, these light emitting means or one or more LEDs constituting the light emitting means are collectively referred to as It may also be referred to as "upper area LED" or simply "upper area".

Furthermore, since the reel backlight 148, the navigation lamps 149a to 149c, the production button 192, and the stop buttons 137 to 139 are light emitting means arranged in the central area of the slot machine 100, these light emitting means or the corresponding One or more LEDs constituting the light emitting means may be collectively referred to as "LEDs in the central region" or simply "central region."

Furthermore, since the title panel 162 is a light-emitting means arranged in the lower area of the slot machine 100, these light-emitting means or one or more LEDs constituting the light-emitting means are collectively referred to as "lower area". "LED" or simply "lower area".

<Operation check/setting change/setting confirmation mode>
Next, prior to explaining the operation check, the setting change/setting confirmation mode will be explained.

The game machine according to this embodiment is operated when the front door 102 is opened and the power is turned on with the setting key provided inside the main body 101 turned on (or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the power was turned on). It is possible to shift to a setting change mode in which settings can be changed before (when the setting key is turned on before the control unit checks the on/off state of the setting key).

Here, setting change refers to changing the setting value of the gaming machine, and in this example, while displaying the setting value (any of settings 1 to 6) on the payout number display 127, the operation means ( Each time a press operation of the setting switch (setting switch) is detected, the currently set setting values 1 to 6 are incremented by 1 and updated, and when the setting value exceeds 6, the process returns to 1, which is repeated. It is possible to change the setting value.

In addition, in the setting change mode, when a push operation by the operating means (in this example, the start lever 135) is accepted, the setting value is determined and the setting change is completed, and the front door 102 is closed with the setting key turned off. When it is closed, the state shifts to a normal game state where normal games can be played.

Note that if the operation means (start lever 135) is operated without pressing the operation means (setting switch), or if the operation means (setting switch) is repeatedly pressed down, the set value may change one cycle (e.g. , setting 5→setting 6→setting 1→...→setting 5) and then operating the operating means (start lever 135), the setting is the same as the previous setting.

The game machine according to this embodiment can shift to a setting confirmation mode in which settings can be confirmed by opening the front door 102 and turning on the setting key provided inside the main body 101 after turning on the power. It is.

Here, setting confirmation refers to checking the setting values of the game machine, and in this example, the initial setting value (for example, setting 1) or By displaying the set value (any of settings 1 to 6) set by changing the settings on the payout number display 127, the set value can be confirmed.

In addition, in this specification, the setting change mode in which settings can be changed and the setting confirmation mode in which settings can be confirmed may be collectively referred to as setting change/setting confirmation mode. , a settings change mode in which only settings can be changed, a settings confirmation mode in which only settings can be confirmed, and a mode in which settings can be changed and settings confirmed.

<Operation check/Power on → Menu selection>
FIG. 8B is a diagram showing a display example of the menu screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 in the setting change/setting confirmation mode and a display example of the LED board 101a disposed inside the main body 101.

If a setting change operation is performed during the setting change/setting confirmation mode, the set value (any of settings 1 to 6) is displayed on the payout number display 127, and the value shown in FIG. 8(b) is displayed. As shown below, a numerical value (0 in this example) indicating that the set value is being changed (undefined) is displayed on the LED board 101a. On the other hand, if a setting confirmation operation is performed during the setting change/setting confirmation mode, a numerical value indicating the current setting value (in this example, 3 indicating setting 3) is displayed on the payout number display 127 and the LED board 101a. ) is displayed.

Further, in the setting change/setting confirmation mode of this example, a menu screen (setting screen) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. By operating the cross key 193b or the OK button 193a (operation means), a clerk at the game parlor can check the setting change history, error history, system volume setting, power saving mode setting, and operation check on the menu screen (setting screen). It is possible to arbitrarily select any of the items. Note that it goes without saying that the items that can be selected in the setting change/setting confirmation mode are not limited to this example.

For example, when the setting change history item is selected on the menu screen (setting screen), it is possible to display the history of past setting changes and setting confirmations, and when the error history item is selected, the relevant It is possible to display the history of errors that have occurred in the past in the game machine, the opening and closing of the front door 102, the power-on, power restoration, etc.

In addition, when the system volume setting item is selected on the menu screen (setting screen), the maximum volume that can only be set by an administrator such as a clerk at a game parlor, or the occurrence of an error (for example, opening the front door 102) It is possible to set the volume of the error sound (door open notification sound) that is output when (brightness, etc.). Note that details of the system volume setting and power saving mode setting will be described later using FIGS. 22 to 27.

Furthermore, when the operation check item is selected on the menu screen (setting screen), it is possible to check the operation of the LEDs and speakers 272 and 277 provided in the slot machine 100. This operation check will be explained in detail below.

According to this example, since the operation check can be performed while changing or confirming the settings, only the clerk at the game parlor can check the operation, and it also prevents unintentional changes to the settings. Sometimes the situation can be prevented.

<Operation check/Operation check selection>
FIG. 8(c) is a diagram showing a display example when the item of operation check MC is temporarily selected on the menu screen, and FIG. 8(d) is a diagram showing an example of the display when the item of operation check MC is temporarily selected. 193a is a diagram showing an example of the display after being pressed. FIG.

When the operation check MC item is tentatively selected on the menu screen and the OK button 193a is pressed, the operation check menu screen MCM is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, as shown in FIG. 8(d). A clerk at the game parlor or the like can arbitrarily select either the LED check LC or the speaker check SC on the operation check menu screen MCM by operating the cross key 193b or the OK button 193a.

According to this example, while checking the operation of the first certain presentation means (LED), it is impossible to check the operation of the second certain presentation means, and the operation of the second certain presentation means (speaker) cannot be checked. During the check, it is impossible to check the operation of a certain first performance means, so the operation of each performance means can be checked more reliably.

<Operation check/LED check>
FIG. 9(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display after the OK button 193a is pressed with the LED check LC item provisionally selected on the operation check menu screen MCM explained using FIG. 8(d). It is.

When the item LED check LC is temporarily selected on the operation menu screen MCM and the OK button 193a is pressed, the LED check area menu screen LEM is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, as shown in FIG. 9(a). . By operating the cross key 193b or the OK button 193a, a clerk at the game parlor or the like selects the target areas for LED operation check (in this example, the upper area AE, middle area CE, and lower area) on the LED check area menu screen LEM. It is possible to arbitrarily select any item of UE).

The upper area on the LED check area menu screen LEM indicates the operation check of the LEDs (in this example, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144) arranged in the upper area of the slot machine 100. If you wish to check the operation of the lamp 142 and side lamp 144), as shown in FIG. 9(b), after tentatively selecting an item in the upper area UE, press the OK button 193a.

FIG. 9(b) is a diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed with the item in the upper area AE temporarily selected on the LED check area menu screen LEM shown in FIG. 9(a). .

In this example, since the item in the upper area AE has been selected, the LEDs (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) arranged in the upper area are subject to operation check, and in the liquid crystal display device 157, the LEDs in the upper area are checked. A display notifying that the check is in progress is displayed (in this example, a character string "Upper/Side Lamps Checking" is displayed), and an LED check of the upper area is started.

The central area on the LED check area menu screen LEM refers to the LEDs placed in the central area of the slot machine 100 (in this example, the reel backlight 148, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, production button 192, and stop button 137). - 139), and if you want to check the operation of these LEDs (reel backlight 148, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, production button 192, and stop buttons 137 to 139), use the central area. After tentatively selecting the CE item, the OK button 193a is pressed.

FIG. 9(c) is a diagram showing an example of the display after the OK button 193a is pressed with the item in the center area CE temporarily selected on the LED check area menu screen LEM shown in FIG. 9(a). be.

In this example, since the item in the center area CE is selected, the LEDs (reel backlight 148, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, production button 192, and stop buttons 137 to 139) arranged in the center area operate. The LCD device 157 displays a message indicating that the LEDs in the center area are being checked (in this example, a character string "Checking backlight/reel lower lamp button") is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. At the same time, the LED check of the central area is started.

The lower area on the LED check area menu screen LEM indicates the operation check of the LEDs (in this example, the title panel 162) arranged in the lower area of the slot machine 100. If an operation check is desired, the user temporarily selects an item in the lower area UE and then presses the OK button 193a.

FIG. 9(d) is a diagram showing an example of the display after the OK button 193a is pressed with the item in the lower area UE temporarily selected on the LED check area menu screen LEM shown in FIG. 9(a). .

In this example, since the item in the lower area UE has been selected, the LEDs (title panel 162) placed in the lower area are subject to operation check, and the LEDs in the lower area are being checked on the liquid crystal display device 157. A display indicating this (in this example, a character string "Title Panel Checking" is displayed) is displayed, and an LED check of the lower area is started.

According to this example, since a certain performance means placed in an area where the movement check is not performed does not perform a movement based on a certain movement pattern, the movement check is performed on the performance means that is the target of the movement check. is easier to understand, and operation checks can be performed more reliably.

<Operation check/Speaker check>
FIG. 10A is a diagram showing a display example after the OK button 193a is pressed with the speaker check item SC being provisionally selected on the operation check menu screen MCM shown in FIG. 8D.

When the speaker check SC item is tentatively selected on the operation menu screen MCM and the OK button 193a is pressed, a display notifying that the speaker check is in progress is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, as shown in FIG. 10(a). (In this example, the character string "Checking the speaker" is displayed) and the speaker check is started. Note that details of the speaker check will be described later using FIG. 15 and the like.

<Operation check/LED check in upper area (door open)>
Figures 10(b), (c) and 11(a) to (c) show the flow in chronological order until the LED check in the upper area is selected in the setting change/setting confirmation mode with the door open. This is a diagram shown in .

The state shown in FIG. 10(b) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened and the power is turned on with the setting key provided inside the main body 101 turned on.

In this state, since the front door 102 has been opened, door open notification is started to notify that the door is open, and in this example, the LEDs in the upper area (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) are used as the door open notification. Some of the LEDs (navigation lamps 149a to 149c) in the central area are lit in white.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 10(c) is a state in which the operation check MC item is temporarily selected on the menu screen, and the state shown in FIG. 11(a) is a state in which the operation check MC item is temporarily selected. This is the state after the button 193a is pressed, and the state shown in FIG. 11(b) is the state after the OK button 193a is pressed with the LED check LC item provisionally selected.

In this example, since the door is open in both states, door open notification continues, and the LEDs in the upper area (upper lamp 142 and side lamps 144) and some of the LEDs in the center area (navigation lamps 149a to 149a) 149c) lights up in white.

The state shown in FIG. 11(c) is a state in which the OK button 193a is pressed while the item in the upper area AE is temporarily selected on the LED check area menu screen LEM shown in FIG. 11(b).

In this example, since the item in the upper area AE has been selected, the LEDs (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) arranged in the upper area are subject to operation check, and in the liquid crystal display device 157, the LEDs in the upper area are checked. A display is displayed to notify that the check is in progress (in this example, the text string "Top/Side Lamp Checking" is displayed), but since the door open notification has priority over the LED check, the LED in the upper area The door open notification continues without starting the check, and the LEDs in the upper area (upper lamp 142 and side lamps 144) and some of the LEDs in the central area (navigation lamps 149a to 149c) are lit in white.

According to this example, since it is impossible to check the operation of some of the production means (the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144) with the door open, it is not possible to check the operation of some of the production means (the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144). On the other hand, it is possible to urge the user to close the door and reliably check the operation of the presentation means, and it is possible to prevent malfunctions of the presentation means from occurring.

Furthermore, since the door open notification can be performed even while the LED is being checked, the operation of the presentation means can be checked while informing the outside that the door is open.

Further, since the door open notification and the LED check are different in form, the difference between the door open notification and the operation check can be clearly distinguished, and convenience can be improved.

<Operation check/LED check in upper area (door closed)>
11(d) and FIGS. 12(a) to 12(c) show the process from when the door is closed and the LED check for the upper area is selected until the door is closed and the LED check for the upper area is executed. It is a diagram showing the flow in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 11(d) is the door closed state described using FIG. 11(c), with the LED check in the upper area selected.

In this state, since the front door 102 is closed while the LED check in the upper area is selected, the door open notification ends.

In addition, since the LEDs in the upper area (upper lamp 142 and side lamps 144) met the operation check start condition (the front door 102 was closed and was subject to the operation check), the LEDs in the upper area were checked. However, some of the LEDs in the central area (navigation lamps 149a to 149c) do not satisfy the operation check start conditions (the front door 102 is closed and is not subject to the operation check). From there, the lights go out.

As mentioned above, when checking the LED in the upper area, an operation is performed based on a certain operation pattern (in this example, light is emitted based on an operation pattern that repeats blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → blue lighting →...) is possible.

Specifically, in the LED check of the upper area, as shown in FIG. After the elapse of time, the LEDs in the upper area (the upper lamp 142 and the side lamps 144) are turned on in red, as shown in FIG. 12(a), and after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds), As shown, the LEDs in the upper region (the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144) are lit in green, and thereafter, the LEDs are lit in green and repeatedly lit in this order.

<Operation check/LED check in central area (door closed)>
12(c), (d) and FIG. 13(a), (b) show that when the door is closed, the LED check in the center area is selected during the LED check in the upper area, and the LED check in the center area is FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating the flow in chronological order up to execution.

The state shown in FIG. 12(c) is when the LED check in the center area is temporarily selected during the LED check in the upper area, as explained using FIGS. 11(d), 12(a), and (b). FIG. 12D is a diagram showing an example of the display after the OK button 193a is pressed with the item in the central area CE temporarily selected.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(d), the LEDs in the central area (reel backlight 148, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, production button 192, and stop buttons 137 to 139) satisfy the operation check start condition (front door 102 has been closed and is subject to operation check), the LED check of the central area is started.

As mentioned above, when checking the LEDs of some of the LEDs in the central area (navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148), an operation based on a certain operation pattern (in this example, an operation pattern that blinks white) is performed. When checking the LEDs of some of the other LEDs in the central area (direction button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139), it is possible to perform an operation based on a certain operation pattern (in this example, red light is emitted). It is possible to perform light emission based on an operation pattern that repeats lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting →...

Specifically, when checking the LEDs of some of the LEDs in the central area (navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148), as shown in FIG. After the lamps 149a to 149c and the reel backlight 148) are turned on in white, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 149a to 149c and the reel backlight 148) are turned off, and thereafter, white lighting and turning off are repeated.

Furthermore, when checking the LEDs of some of the other LEDs in the center area (effect button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139), as shown in FIG. button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139) are turned on in red, and after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, some other LEDs in the central area (e.g. button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139) are turned on in blue, and after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, some other LEDs (production buttons 192, the stop buttons 137 to 139) are lit in green, and thereafter, the lighting is repeated in this order.

According to this example, since the operation can be checked even when the door is closed, convenience can be improved. In addition, since the LEDs other than the LEDs targeted for operation check are turned off, the area targeted for operation check can be easily understood, and the operation check can be performed quickly.

<Operation check/LED check in central area (door closed → door open)>
FIG. 13(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the door is opened while the LED check of the central region is being executed with the door closed.

In this state, since the front door 102 has been opened, door open notification is started to notify that the door is open, and in this example, the LEDs in the upper area (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) are used as the door open notification. Some of the LEDs (navigation lamps 149a to 149c) in the central area are lit in white.

While the door is closed, some LEDs in the central area (navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148) repeatedly turn on and off in white, but the door open notification takes priority over the LED check. Therefore, while the door is open, the LED check of the navigation lamps 149a to 149c (white lights on and off) is interrupted, and door open notification (white light on) is given priority.

According to this example, since it is impossible to check the operation of some of the performance means (navigation lamps 149a to 149c) with the door open, It is possible to prompt the user to close the door and reliably check the operation of the presentation means, and to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions of the presentation means.

Furthermore, since the door open notification can be performed even while the LED is being checked, the operation of the presentation means can be checked while informing the outside that the door is open.

Further, since the door open notification and the LED check are different in form, the difference between the door open notification and the operation check can be clearly distinguished, and convenience can be improved.

<Operation check/LED check in central area (door open → door closed)>
FIG. 13(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the door is closed while an LED check is being performed in the central area with the door open.

In this state, since the front door 102 is closed, the door open notification that notifies the door opening has ended, the door open notification of the navigation lamps 149a to 149c (lights up in white) has ended, and the LED check (white light) has ended. (lights on and off) have resumed.

Note that when checking the LEDs of the navigation lamps 149a to 149c, you can restart the white lights from the beginning, or restart the white lights from the beginning. When the door is closed, the process may be executed in the background (lights off), and when the door is closed, the process may be resumed from the state in progress in the background (for example, in the middle of white lighting). That is, before the door is opened, the LED checks (lighting modes) of the navigation lamps 149a to 149c and the reel backlight 148 are synchronized, but after the door is opened, only the LED check of the navigation lamps 149a to 149c is interrupted. After the door is closed again, the LED checks (lighting modes) of the navigation lamps 149a to 149c and the reel backlight 148 may become asynchronous.

<Operation check/LED check in lower area (door closed)>
Figures 14(a) to (c) show the flow from when the LED check in the lower area is selected during the execution of the LED check (door closing) in the central area until the LED check in the lower area is executed. It is a diagram.

The state shown in FIG. 14(a) is a state in which the LED check in the lower area is temporarily selected during the LED check in the center area, and FIG. 14(b) is the state in which the item in the lower area UE is temporarily selected. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of the display after the OK button 193a is pressed.

In the state shown in FIG. 14B, the LEDs (title panel 162) in the lower area satisfy the operation check start condition (become the target of the operation check), so the LED check in the lower area is started.

As described above, when checking the LEDs in the lower area (title panel 162), it is possible to perform an operation based on a certain operation pattern (in this example, light emission based on an operation pattern that repeats white lighting and extinguishing). .

Specifically, in the LED check of the LED (title panel 162) in the lower area, as shown in FIG. 12(b), after turning on the LED (title panel 162) in the lower area in white, After 5 seconds have elapsed, the LED (title panel 162) in the lower area is turned off, as shown in FIG. 14C, and from then on, the white light is turned on and turned off repeatedly.

According to this example, since the operation can be checked even when the door is closed, convenience can be improved. In addition, since the LEDs other than the LEDs targeted for operation check are turned off, the area targeted for operation check can be easily understood, and the operation check can be performed quickly.

<Operation check/LED check in lower area (door closed → door open)>
FIG. 14(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the door is opened while the LED check of the lower area is being executed with the door closed.

In this state, since the front door 102 has been opened, door open notification is started to notify that the door is open, and in this example, the LEDs in the upper area (upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144) are used as the door open notification. Some of the LEDs (navigation lamps 149a to 149c) in the central area are lit in white.

On the other hand, since the LED in the lower area (title panel 162) is not affected by the opening and closing of the door, the LED check (white lighting and turning off) continues even while the door is open.

<Operation check/Speaker check (door open)>
FIG. 15(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the item of speaker check SC is temporarily selected on the operation check menu screen MCM described using FIG. 8(d).

In this state, since the front door 102 is open, door open notification is started to notify that the door is open. In this example, as the door open notification, the LEDs in the upper area (the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 ) and some of the LEDs in the central area (navigation lamps 149a to 149c) are lit in white, and a door opening sound (in this example, a voice saying "The door is open") is output from a speaker (not shown). ing.

FIG. 15(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display after the OK button 193a is pressed with the speaker check item SC provisionally selected on the operation check menu screen MCM.

When the speaker check SC item is tentatively selected on the operation menu screen MCM and the OK button 193a is pressed, a display notifying that the speaker check is in progress (in this example, "Speaker check in progress") is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. (display of the character string), and the speaker check starts.

In the speaker check of this example, an operation based on a certain operation pattern (in this example, an operation that repeats the following sequence: audio output from the lower right speaker → audio output from the lower left speaker → audio output from the upper speaker → audio output from the lower right speaker → etc.) pattern-based audio output).

Specifically, in the speaker check, as shown in FIG. 15(b), a check sound (in this example, "lower right speaker test in progress") is emitted from the lower right speaker located at the lower right front of the slot machine 100. After a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, a check sound (in this example, " After a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, a check sound ( In this example, a voice saying "Upper speaker test in progress" is output, and thereafter the voices are repeatedly output in this order.

In this example, since the door is being opened, the check sound by the speaker check is output from each speaker in turn, and the door opening sound is output from all speakers.

According to this example, the first certain presentation means (LED) can switch the target part of the operation check in the operation check by operating the operation means, and the second certain presentation means (LED) (speaker), during operation check, the part targeted for the operation check is automatically switched without any operation by the operation means, so you can easily check the operation by automatically switching between the production means that you want to check the operation reliably. It is possible to isolate the performance means to be performed, and it is possible to improve the convenience of checking the operation.

Furthermore, while checking the operation of a certain first effecting means (LED), it is impossible to check the operation of a certain second effecting means, and while checking the operation of a certain second effecting means (speaker), Since it is impossible to check the operation of a certain first performance means, it is possible to check the operation of each individual performance means more reliably.

In addition, the operation of the light emitting means (LED) must be checked visually, the target of operation check can be manually switched to ensure operation check, and the operation of the sound output means (speaker) can be checked by ear. All you have to do is check, and the operation check can be easily performed by automatically switching the target of the operation check.

Further, in the operation check, since the operation check sound can be output while outputting the door open notification sound, the operation check can be performed simultaneously while notifying the outside that the door is open, and convenience can be improved.

<Operation check/Speaker check (door open → door closed)>
FIG. 16A is a diagram showing a state in which the door is closed when a speaker check is executed with the door open.

In this state, since the front door 102 is closed, the output of the door opening sound is terminated, but since the speaker check is not affected by the opening or closing of the door, the speaker check that was being executed while the door was open is stopped. continuing.

<Operation check/setting key operations>
FIGS. 16(b) to 16(d) show that the lever operation to confirm the setting is performed while the LED check (door opening) in the central area is being executed, and the front door 102 is closed before the setting key is returned. It is a diagram showing the flow.

As described above, in the slot machine 100, in the setting change/setting confirmation mode, when a press operation by the operating means (start lever 135) is accepted, the setting value is determined, the setting change is completed, and the setting key is turned off. When the front door 102 is closed in this state (with the setting key returned to the initial position), the state shifts to a normal game state in which normal games can be played.

However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 16(d), the front door 102 is closed while the setting key is on (the setting key has not been returned to the initial position) while the LED check in the central area is being executed. Since it has been closed, it will not transition to normal gaming mode and the demo screen will not be displayed.

Since the operation check can be performed while changing or confirming the settings, there are cases where you forget to change the original settings and close the door. By continuously displaying , it is possible to inform that the normal game is not possible, so it may be possible to inform the parlor staff about forgetting to change settings or forgetting to remove the setting key.

FIGS. 17A to 17C are diagrams showing the flow from when the setting key is returned to when the front door 102 is closed during execution of the LED check (door opening) in the central area.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 17(b) and 17(c), during the execution of the LED check in the central area, the front door 102 is turned off with the setting key turned off (the setting key is returned to the initial position). Since the game has been closed, the game has transitioned to normal gaming mode and is displaying a demo screen.

In addition, since the setting change/setting confirmation mode has ended and the mode has transitioned to the normal gaming state, the operation checks (LED check and speaker check) will be forcibly ended, and the LED will change from emitting light based on the LED check to emitting light for performance. The light emission has changed based on the mode, and the speaker has changed from audio output based on the speaker check to audio output based on the performance audio mode.

According to this example, the operation check can be performed while changing or confirming settings due to the operation of a setting key, and the operation check is performed in connection with turning the setting key from on to off during the operation check. Therefore, it can be terminated without waiting for the completion of the operation check.

As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), and a presentation means (for example, , upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, title panel 162, production button 192, light emitting means such as stop buttons 137 to 139, speakers 272, 277, etc. a sound output means, a display means such as a liquid crystal display device 157), and the effect means performs an operation based on a certain operation pattern (for example, in the case of the upper lamp 142 or the side lamp 144). includes a certain presentation means capable of executing light emission based on an operation pattern that repeats blue lighting → red lighting → green lighting → blue lighting → etc., and the certain presentation means is capable of emitting light based on an operation pattern that repeats blue lighting → red lighting → green lighting → blue lighting → etc. is arranged in a position where the operation can be checked from the front (hereinafter referred to as "operation check"), and some of the certain production means (for example, the reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, the title Panel 162, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139) can be checked for operation when the door is open, and some of the production means (for example, upper lamp 142, The side lamps 144 and the navigation lamps 149a to 149c) are a game machine characterized in that the operation check cannot be performed when the door is open.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, since it is impossible to check the operation of some of the performance means when the door is open, a clerk at the game parlor or the like is asked to It is possible to encourage the user to close the display means to reliably check the operation of the production means, and to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions in the production means.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), and a presentation means (for example, the upper lamp 142). , side lamps 144, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlights 148 for each reel 110 to 112, light emitting means such as the title panel 162, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277, a display means such as a liquid crystal display device 157; lighting → red lighting → green lighting → blue lighting → etc.) includes a certain presentation means capable of executing light emission based on an operation pattern that repeats the sequence of lighting → red lighting → green lighting → blue lighting → etc. It is arranged in a position where the operation can be checked (hereinafter referred to as "operation check"), and a part of the certain production means (for example, the reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, the title panel 162, the production Button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139) can be used to check the operation when the door is open, and some of the certain presentation means (for example, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, The navigation lamps 149a to 149c) indicate that the operation check cannot be performed when the door is open, and that the operation check can be performed at least during setting change and setting confirmation. This is a unique game machine.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, since it is impossible to check the operation of some of the performance means when the door is open, a clerk at the game parlor or the like is asked to It is possible to encourage the user to close the display means to reliably check the operation of the production means, and to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions in the production means. In addition, since operation checks can be performed while changing or confirming settings, only the staff at the game parlor can check the operation, and it also prevents unintentional changes to settings. There are cases.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), and a presentation means (for example, the upper lamp 142). , side lamps 144, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlights 148 for each reel 110 to 112, light emitting means such as the title panel 162, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277, a display means such as a liquid crystal display device 157; lighting → red lighting → green lighting → blue lighting → etc.) includes a certain presentation means capable of executing light emission based on an operation pattern that repeats the sequence of lighting → red lighting → green lighting → blue lighting → etc. A part of the certain presentation means (hereinafter referred to as the "first certain presentation means"), for example, each reel 110, is placed in a position where the operation can be checked (hereinafter referred to as "operation check"). - 112 (reel backlight 148, title panel 162, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139), the operation can be checked while the door is open, and among the certain production means. Some of them (hereinafter referred to as "second certain presentation means"; for example, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the navigation lamps 149a to 149c) cannot be checked for operation when the door is open. The first certain presentation means and the second certain presentation means are arranged in different areas on the game machine, the operation can be checked for each area, and the door is closed. the first certain effect means and the second certain effect means arranged in the area where the movement check has not been performed do not execute the movement based on the certain movement pattern; This game machine is characterized by:

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, since it is impossible to check the operation of some of the performance means when the door is open, a clerk at the game parlor or the like is asked to It is possible to encourage the user to close the display means to reliably check the operation of the production means, and to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions in the production means. In addition, the motion check makes it easier to understand which direction the motion check is being made because a certain performance device placed in an area where the motion check is not performed does not perform a motion based on a certain motion pattern. , operation checks can be performed more reliably.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), and a presentation means (for example, the upper lamp 142). , side lamps 144, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlights 148 for each reel 110 to 112, light emitting means such as the title panel 162, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277, a display means such as a liquid crystal display device 157; lighting → red lighting → green lighting → blue lighting → etc.) includes a certain presentation means capable of executing light emission based on an operation pattern that repeats the sequence of lighting → red lighting → green lighting → blue lighting → etc. A part of the certain presentation means (hereinafter referred to as the "first certain presentation means"), for example, each reel 110, is placed in a position where the operation can be checked (hereinafter referred to as "operation check"). - 112 (reel backlight 148, title panel 162, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139), the operation can be checked while the door is open, and among the certain production means. Some of them (hereinafter referred to as "second certain presentation means"; for example, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the navigation lamps 149a to 149c) cannot be checked for operation when the door is open. The first certain presentation means and the second certain presentation means are arranged in different areas on the game machine, the operation can be checked for each area, and the door is closed. In the state where the operation check is not performed, the first certain effect means and the second certain effect means arranged in the area where the movement check is not performed do not perform the movement based on the certain movement pattern. , the second certain presentation means is a game machine characterized in that, when the door is open, a door open notification indicating that the door is open can be executed. .

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, since it is impossible to check the operation of some of the performance means when the door is open, a clerk at the game parlor or the like is asked to It is possible to encourage the user to close the display means to reliably check the operation of the production means, and to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions in the production means. In addition, the motion check makes it easier to understand which direction the motion check is being made because a certain performance device placed in an area where the motion check is not performed does not perform a motion based on a certain motion pattern. , operation checks can be performed more reliably. Further, since door open notification can be executed, it is possible to check the operation of the presentation means while informing the outside that the door is open.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), and a presentation means (for example, the upper lamp 142). , side lamps 144, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlights 148 for each reel 110 to 112, light emitting means such as the title panel 162, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277, a display means such as a liquid crystal display device 157; lighting → red lighting → green lighting → blue lighting → etc.) includes a certain presentation means capable of executing light emission based on an operation pattern that repeats the sequence of lighting → red lighting → green lighting → blue lighting → etc. A part of the certain presentation means (hereinafter referred to as the "first certain presentation means"), for example, each reel 110, is placed in a position where the operation can be checked (hereinafter referred to as "operation check"). - 112 (reel backlight 148, title panel 162, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139), the operation can be checked while the door is open, and among the certain production means. Some of them (hereinafter referred to as "second certain presentation means"; for example, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the navigation lamps 149a to 149c) cannot be checked for operation when the door is open. The first certain presentation means and the second certain presentation means are arranged in different areas on the gaming machine, the operation can be checked for each area, and the door is opened. In the state where the door is open, the second certain presentation means arranged in the area where the operation check is not performed is capable of executing a door open notification indicating that the door is open. This is a unique game machine.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, since it is impossible to check the operation of some of the performance means when the door is open, a clerk at the game parlor or the like is asked to It is possible to encourage the user to close the display means to reliably check the operation of the production means, and to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions in the production means. Further, since door open notification can be executed, it is possible to check the operation of the presentation means while informing the outside that the door is open.

Further, the certain presentation means includes a plurality of light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, an upper lamp 142, a side lamp 144, a navigation lamp 149a to 149c, a reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, a title panel 162, (light emitting means such as the production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, sound output means such as the speakers 272, 277, display means such as the liquid crystal display device 157), and the plurality of light emitting means are the first light emitting means and the first light emitting means. The first light emitting means (for example, the reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, the title panel 162, the production button 192, and the stop button 137 to 139) include two light emitting means when the door is opened. The operation can be checked while the door is open, and the second light emitting means (for example, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the navigation lamps 149a to 149c) execute the operation while the door is open. When the door is open, the second light emitting means generates a door open notification indicating that the door is open (for example, in FIG. 10). The door open notification shown in b) can be performed, and the door open notification can be performed based on an operation pattern different from the certain operation pattern (for example, an operation based on an operation pattern using the LEDs (upper lamp 142 and side lamps 144) in the upper area). Some of the LEDs in the central area (navigation lamps 149a to 149c) may be lit in white).

With such a configuration, since door open notification can be executed, the operation of the first light emitting means can be checked while notifying the outside that the door is open.

Further, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged in different areas of the game machine, and the operation can be checked for each area, and the second light emitting means is arranged in different areas in the gaming machine, and the second light emitting means It may be possible to check the operation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to check the operation even when the door is closed, thereby increasing convenience.

Further, the light emitting means disposed in the area where the operation check is not performed may be turned off while the door is closed.

With such a configuration, the area targeted for operation check can be easily understood, and operation check can be performed quickly.

Further, the first light emitting means disposed in the area where the operation check is not performed while the door is open is turned off, and the operation check is performed while the door is open. The second light emitting means disposed in the area where the door opening notification is not performed may be configured to perform the door open notification.

With such a configuration, the area targeted for operation check can be easily understood, and operation check can be performed quickly.

Further, the certain operation pattern is a blinking pattern in which the light emitting means blinks in one or more colors (for example, an operation pattern in which blue lighting → red lighting → green lighting → blue lighting → etc. is repeated). The door open notification may be an operation of lighting the second light emitting means in a certain color (for example, lighting in white).

With such a configuration, the difference between door open notification and operation check can be clearly distinguished, and convenience can be improved.

Furthermore, it is equipped with a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and when the power is turned on with the setting key turned on from off (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), settings can be changed. , a part of the setting change operation can be executed with the door open, and in the first case, the display means displays an operation check setting screen (e.g. , the operation check menu screen MCM) shown in FIG. Even if the door is closed after the effect display has started and the setting change has been completed, the effect display will not start and the operation check setting screen will not be displayed if the setting key is off. It may be displayed continuously.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to change the settings, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. Lamp 144, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148 for each reel 110 to 112, title panel 162, production button 192, light emitting means such as stop buttons 137 to 139, sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277, liquid crystal display display means (such as a device 157), the presentation means includes a certain presentation means capable of executing an action based on a certain movement pattern, and the certain presentation means includes a presentation means capable of executing an action based on a certain action pattern. The certain performance means is arranged in a position where the operation can be checked from the front of the game machine (hereinafter referred to as "operation check"), and the certain performance means is composed of a plurality of areas, and the operation can be checked for each area. A part of the certain presentation means (hereinafter referred to as "first certain presentation means"), for example, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the navigation lamps 149a to 149c, and the reels of each reel 110 to 112. In the operation check, the light emitting means such as the backlight 148, title panel 162, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, etc. ) can be switched by operating the operating means, and some of the certain presentation means (hereinafter referred to as "second certain presentation means"). For example, the sound output means such as the speakers 272, 277, etc. ) is a game machine characterized in that, in the operation check, the areas targeted for the operation check (for example, the lower right, lower left, and upper parts) are automatically switched without being operated by the operating means. .

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the first certain performance means can switch the area to be subjected to the movement check in the operation check by operating the operation means; When performing an operation check, the area to be checked for the operation of the performance means is automatically switched without any operation by the operation means, so it is possible to easily perform the operation check by automatically switching between the performance means and the area for which the operation check is to be performed reliably. It is possible to isolate the performance means to be performed, and the convenience of checking the operation can be increased.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. Lamp 144, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148 for each reel 110 to 112, title panel 162, production button 192, light emitting means such as stop buttons 137 to 139, sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277, liquid crystal display display means (such as a device 157), the presentation means includes a certain presentation means capable of executing an action based on a certain movement pattern, and the certain presentation means includes a presentation means capable of executing an action based on a certain action pattern. The certain performance means is arranged in a position where the operation can be checked from the front of the game machine (hereinafter referred to as "operation check"), and the certain performance means is composed of a plurality of areas, and the operation can be checked for each area. A part of the certain presentation means (hereinafter referred to as "first certain presentation means"), for example, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the navigation lamps 149a to 149c, and the reels of each reel 110 to 112. In the operation check, the light emitting means such as the backlight 148, title panel 162, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, etc. ) can be switched by operating the operating means, and some of the certain presentation means (hereinafter referred to as "second certain presentation means"). For example, the sound output means such as the speakers 272, 277, etc. ), in the operation check, the area targeted for the operation check (for example, lower right, lower left, upper part) is automatically switched without any operation by the operation means, and During the operation check, it is impossible to check the operation of the second certain presentation means, and during the operation check of the second certain presentation means, the operation of the first certain presentation means cannot be checked. This game machine is characterized by the fact that it is impossible to check.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the first certain performance means can switch the area to be subjected to the movement check in the operation check by operating the operation means; When performing an operation check, the area to be checked for the operation of the performance means is automatically switched without any operation by the operation means, so it is possible to easily perform the operation check by automatically switching between the performance means and the area for which the operation check is to be performed reliably. It is possible to isolate the performance means to be performed, and the convenience of checking the operation can be increased. Furthermore, while checking the operation of the first certain effect means, it is impossible to check the operation of the second certain effect means, and while checking the operation of the second certain effect means, the first certain effect cannot be checked. Since it is impossible to check the operation of the means, it is possible to check the operation of each individual presentation means more reliably.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. Lamp 144, navigation lamps 149a to 149c, reel backlight 148 for each reel 110 to 112, title panel 162, production button 192, light emitting means such as stop buttons 137 to 139, sound output means such as speakers 272 and 277, liquid crystal display display means (such as a device 157), the presentation means includes a certain presentation means capable of executing an action based on a certain movement pattern, and the certain presentation means includes a presentation means capable of executing an action based on a certain action pattern. The certain performance means is arranged in a position where the operation can be checked from the front of the game machine (hereinafter referred to as "operation check"), and the certain performance means is composed of a plurality of areas, and the operation can be checked for each area. A part of the certain presentation means (hereinafter referred to as "first certain presentation means"), for example, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the navigation lamps 149a to 149c, and the reels of each reel 110 to 112. In the operation check, the light emitting means such as the backlight 148, title panel 162, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, etc. ) can be switched by operating the operating means, and some of the certain presentation means (hereinafter referred to as "second certain presentation means"). For example, the sound output means such as the speakers 272, 277, etc. ), in the operation check, the area targeted for the operation check (for example, lower right, lower left, upper part) is automatically switched without any operation by the operating means, and the operation check is performed by operating the setting key. The operation check can be executed at least during a setting change or a setting confirmation, and the operation check ends in connection with turning the setting key from on to off during the operation check. This is a unique game machine.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the first certain performance means can switch the area to be subjected to the movement check in the operation check by operating the operation means; When performing an operation check, the area to be checked for the operation of the performance means is automatically switched without any operation by the operation means, so it is possible to easily perform the operation check by automatically switching between the performance means and the area for which the operation check is to be performed reliably. It is possible to isolate the performance means to be performed, and the convenience of checking the operation can be increased. In addition, the operation check can be performed while changing the settings or checking the settings due to the operation of the setting key, and the operation check ends when the setting key is turned from on to off during the operation check. The operation check can be terminated without waiting for completion.

Further, the first certain presentation means may be a plurality of sound output means capable of outputting sound, and the second certain presentation means may be a plurality of light emitting means capable of emitting light.

With this configuration, the operation of the light emitting means must be checked visually, the target of operation check can be manually switched to ensure operation check, and the operation of the sound output means must be checked by ear. All you have to do is check, and the operation check can be easily performed by automatically switching the target of the operation check.

Further, it includes a door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102), and when the door is open, the sound output means generates a door open notification sound that indicates that the door is open (for example, A sound such as "The door is open" or a warning sound such as a beeping sound) can be executed, and the certain motion pattern may be a sound that can specify the area to be subjected to the motion check (for example, a 15, an operation check sound including a sound such as "lower right speaker test in progress" → "lower left speaker test in progress" → "upper speaker test in progress" is output from the sound output means, and The open notification sound is a sound different from the operation check sound, and the sound output means is capable of performing the operation check in a state where the door is open, and in the operation check, the sound output means is configured to output the door open notification sound. It may be possible to output the operation check sound while outputting it.

With such a configuration, it is possible to simultaneously check the operation while informing the outside that the door is open, thereby increasing convenience.

The light emitting means includes a door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102), and the plurality of light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means. The operation check may be possible when the door is open, and the second light emitting means may not perform the operation and the operation check may not be possible when the door is open.

With such a configuration, by closing the door to check the operation of the second light emitting means, it may be possible to prevent erroneous operations such as setting changes.

Further, the light emitting means disposed in the area not subject to the operation check may be turned off when the door is closed.

With such a configuration, the area targeted for operation check can be easily understood, and operation check can be performed quickly.

Further, the operation check may be executable while changing settings or confirming settings.

With such a configuration, only a clerk at the game parlor or the like can check the operation.

Furthermore, it is equipped with a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and when the power is turned on with the setting key turned on from off (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), settings can be changed. , a part of the setting change operation can be executed with the door open, and in the first case, the display means displays an operation check screen (for example, FIG. 8 It is possible to display the operation check menu screen (MCM) shown in (d) etc., and after the setting change is completed, the operation check screen disappears in connection with turning the setting key from on to off, and the effect related to the game is displayed. Even if the door is closed after the display has started and the setting change has been completed, the effect display will not start and the operation check screen will continue if the setting key is off. It may be displayed.

Since the operation check can be performed while changing or confirming the settings, there are cases where you forget to change the original settings and close the door. By continuously displaying , it is possible to inform that the normal game is not possible, so it may be possible to inform the parlor staff about forgetting to change settings or forgetting to remove the setting key.

Further, the "presentation means" according to the present invention may be a display means such as the liquid crystal display device 157, or may be a movable body such as the shutter 163.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present invention is a game machine that can notify a certain error, and the certain error is at least one error among a plurality of types of errors that can occur in the game machine. Yes, if the power is turned off while the above-mentioned error is occurring, and the error continues when the power is turned on after the power-off, press the setting key as part of the setting change operation. The set value cannot be changed even if it is operated (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), and if the above-mentioned error does not occur when the power is turned on, the set value cannot be changed. It includes a state in which changes can be made (hereinafter referred to as the "second state") and a state in which setting values can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as the "third state"). If the power is turned on while a certain operation is performed using the setting key, the second state is entered, and if the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on, the second state is entered. If the power is cut off while the certain error is occurring and the power is turned on after the certain operation is performed, the first state is reached; The game machine may be characterized in that when the certain error is resolved in the first state, the game machine can shift to the third state.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) is a gaming machine that can notify a certain error, and the certain error is caused by This is at least one error among multiple types of errors that may occur (for example, medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow error, RAM failure, prize winning error, etc.), and the certain error occurs. If the power is cut off while the power is on, and the error continues when the power is turned on after the power cut, operate the setting key (for example, press the setting key switch) as part of the setting change operation. When the power is turned on, the setting value cannot be changed (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), and the certain error occurs when the power is turned on. The state in which the setting value does not occur includes a state in which the set value can be changed (hereinafter referred to as the "second state") and a state in which the set value can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as the "third state"). ), and when the power is turned on with a certain operation using the setting key performed as part of the setting change operation, the second state is entered, and the state is changed to the second state after the power is turned on. If an operation is performed, the third state occurs, the power is cut off while the certain error occurs, and the certain operation is performed as part of the setting change operation after the power cut. If the power is turned on in a state where the set value is turned on, the set value will be in the first state where it is impossible to change it, and if the certain error is resolved in the first state, the set value cannot be changed. The setting value can be confirmed without transitioning to a state in which the first state is possible, and the first state is not notified after the certain error notification (for example, a certain error notification) is started. The game machine may be started (for example, by notifying a state that settings cannot be changed).

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent a situation where an error occurs after the operation to change the setting value is completed and the game is started, and the operation to change the setting value is wasted. This can be avoided and work efficiency can be improved. In addition, in order to notify the first state after a certain error notification has started, it is easy to understand that a certain error has occurred and that the setting value cannot be changed. It is possible to improve workability. Furthermore, after the error has been resolved, the setting values can be checked without transitioning to a state where the settings can be changed, so it is possible to ensure that the settings cannot be changed even after the error has been resolved. It is possible to reliably check whether the set value has been changed to an incorrect value due to an error (whether there is a malfunction), and work efficiency can be improved.

<Number of bets warning notification>
Next, the bet number warning notification will be explained using FIGS. 18 to 21. Note that each of FIGS. 18 to 21 is a schematic diagram (front view) showing the main parts of the slot machine 100.

<Bet number warning notification/notification means, display means, status notification means>
First, the notification means that can execute the bet number warning notification will be explained. The slot machine 100 according to the present example includes a notification unit capable of issuing a bet number warning notification (warning notification) when a game is executed with a bet amount different from the recommended bet amount.

The slot machine 100 includes a display means that can display information as one of the notification means. Examples of the display means included in the slot machine 100 include the liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157, the payout number display 127, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, etc. described using FIG. In this example, it is composed of a liquid crystal display device and an LED.

When a display means is applied as a notification means, for example, the liquid crystal display device 126 may display a character string such as "2-bet game! Bet 3-coins!!" while displaying the normal background, or Using the entire display area of the display device 126 to display an image including a character string such as "Please play a 3-coin bet game" corresponds to an example of the number-of-bets warning notification.

The slot machine 100 includes a sound output means capable of outputting sound as one of the notification means. Examples of sound output means included in the slot machine 100 include the speakers 272 and 277 described using FIG. 2.

When sound output means is applied as the notification means, for example, a warning sound may be output from the speakers 272, 277, a warning sound may be output in connection with the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 or the start lever 135, Outputting a voice such as "Bet on 2 coins. Please be careful" or "Play a game with a bet on 3 coins" corresponds to an example of the bet number warning notification.

The slot machine 100 includes a light emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light as one of the notification means. Examples of the light emitting means provided in the slot machine 100 include the upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144 described using FIG. 148, a title panel 162, a production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, a start lever 135, etc., and in this example, all light emitting means are constituted by LEDs.

When a light emitting means is applied as the notification means, for example, blinking the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144, changing the color of the light emitted from the stop buttons 137 to 139 and the start lever 135, etc. are examples of the number of bets warning notification. Applicable.

The title panel 162 in this example also functions as a status notification means provided at a position visible to the player. Although the details will be described later, the title panel 162 (state notification means) can execute a first notification indicating that the state is in the first state and a second notification indicating that the state is in the second state. be.

<Number of bets warning/gaming performance>
Next, the gameplay of the slot machine 100 of this example will be explained.

The slot machine 100 according to the present example has a two-bet recommended game (first state) in which a two-bet bet game (first number of bets) is recommended, and a three-bet bet game (second number of bets). A 3-coin bet recommended game (second state) in which a game is recommended.

The first state is a normal game that shifts to the second state when a bonus (a certain internal winning combination) is won internally in a game with two bets (first number of bets). On the other hand, the second state is an AT game in which a certain internal winning combination is not won in a game with 3 bets (second number of bets), and the first state is better than the second state. This is a disadvantageous situation for the player.

The states shown in FIGS. 18(a) to (d), FIGS. 19(a) to (d), and FIG. 20(a) are two-bet recommended games (first state), and the states shown in FIGS. 20(b) to The state shown in FIGS. 21(d) and 21(a) to 21(b) is a 3-coin bet recommended game (second state).

As described above, the title panel 162 in this example is capable of executing a first notification indicating that it is in the first state and a second notification indicating that it is in the second state. Now, in the two-bet recommended game (first state) shown in FIGS. 18(a) to 20(a), the first notification is executed by turning off the title panel 162.

On the other hand, in the 3-bet recommended game (second state) shown in FIGS. 20(b) to 21(b), the second notification is executed by lighting up the title panel 162 in the same notification mode as the normal game. are doing.

Note that the notification mode of the "first notification" and the "second notification" according to the present invention is not particularly limited, and for example, in the 3-bet recommended game (second state), notification different from the normal game The second notification may be performed by performing notification in a specific manner (for example, by lighting up the title panel 162 with a special light emission pattern).

Further, the "status notification means" according to the present invention is not limited to the title panel 162, but includes, for example, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 described using FIG. 149c, the reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, the production button 192, the stop buttons 137 to 139, the start lever 135, or other light emitting means, or the speaker 277, 277 or other sound output means. good.

<Number of bets warning/Example>
Next, an example of the number of bets warning notification will be described.

<Number of bets warning/Example/2-bet recommended game (first state)>
The states shown in FIGS. 18(a) to (d), FIGS. 19(a) to (d), and FIG. 20(a) are two-bet recommended games (first state), and the states shown in FIG. The state shown is a state in which a two-bet recommended game (first state) has been started in the slot machine 100 after initial shipment, and a bonus (a certain internal winning combination) has not been won internally (bonus non-winning state). be.

This 2-coin bet recommended game (first state) is a state in which the player does not play any games, but the clerk at the game parlor changes it to the 3-coin bet recommended game (second state). In addition to the AT lottery not being held, even if you win a bonus in a 3 bet game, the payout of medals in the bonus game is small, and the 3 This is a more disadvantageous state for the player than the recommended bet game (second state).

In this example, by turning off the title panel 162, a first notification indicating that the current state is a two-bet recommended game (first state) is started.

According to this example, players and gaming parlors are informed that the first state is not the originally recommended gaming state and that if a warning is issued in the second state, it will be disadvantageous for the player. It is possible to suggest this to store staff, etc., and prevent any disadvantage from being caused.

The state shown in FIG. 18(b) is a state in which 13 medals (gaming media) have been inserted, 3 medals are used as the number of bets for the game, and the remaining 10 medals are electronically stored (credited). .

In this example, the stored credit number display 125 displays a display indicating that there are 10 credits (in this example, a numerical value of "10" is displayed).

The state shown in FIG. 18(c) is a state in which the start lever 135 has been operated (lever operation) in a three-bet bet game.

In this example, when a 3-bet bet game (game with the second number of bets) is executed in a 2-bet recommended game (first state), the number of bets warning notification (warning notification) is configured not to be executed. Therefore, the bet number warning notification is not executed here.

According to this example, when a game with the first number of bets is executed in the second state, a warning notification is executed, and when a game with the second number of bets is executed in the first state, Since the warning notification is not performed, the warning notification is performed only in the second state, which should be originally recommended, so that it is possible to suggest the correct way to play to the player, and to avoid giving a bad impression about the second state. can be prevented. Moreover, when a game with the second number of bets is executed in the first state, by not issuing a warning notification, it is possible to make the player aware that the game is not in the second state.

In addition, in this game, a specific winning combination (strong cherry in this example) is internally won, but in this example, the system is configured so that the preview display is not displayed in the game where two bets are recommended (first state). Therefore, here, a preview effect based on the internal winning of a specific winning combination (strong cherry) is not executed.

According to this example, by not displaying a preview in the first state, it is possible to create a sense of discomfort and make the game store clerk or the like realize that the player has forgotten to shift to the second state. Furthermore, since it is possible to know that the first state is in place, it is possible to encourage players, game parlor staff, etc. to voluntarily shift to the second state.

The state shown in FIG. 18(d) is a state in which the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 has been performed in a three-bet bet game.

In this example, the third stop operation was performed while the specific winning combination (Strong Cherry) was internally won, and the specific winning combination (Strong Cherry) was won. If a 3-bet game (game with the second number of bets) is executed in a 2-bet recommended game (first state), payout will not be executed even if a specific winning combination is won. Therefore, payout is not executed here.

The state shown in FIG. 19(a) is a state where two credits allocated from ten credits are used as the bet amount for the game.

In this example, the stored credit number display 125 displays a display indicating that the number of credits is 8 (=10-2) (in this example, a numerical value of "8" is displayed).

The state shown in FIG. 19(b) is a state in which the start lever 135 has been operated (lever operation) in a two-stakes bet game.

In this example, since a two-bet bet game (a game with the first number of bets) is being executed in the two-bet recommended game (first state), the number-of-bets warning notification is not executed. Furthermore, since the bonus (a certain internal winning combination) has not been internally won, the bonus non-winning state is maintained.

The state shown in FIG. 19(c) is a state in which the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 has been performed in a two-copy bet game and a winning combination non-winning state.

In this example, since the winning combination was not won, no payout was executed.

The state shown in FIG. 19(d) is a state in which two of the eight credits are used as the bet amount for the game.

In this example, the stored credit number display 125 displays a display indicating that the number of credits is 6 (=8-2) (in this example, a numerical value of "6" is displayed).

The state shown in FIG. 20(a) is a state in which the start lever 135 is operated (lever operation) in a two-stakes bet game.

In this example, since a two-bet bet game (game with the first number of bets) is being executed in the recommended two-bet bet game (first state), the number of bets warning notification is not executed, but the bonus (a certain internal Since the winning combination was won internally, the state has shifted from a non-bonus winning state to a bonus winning state.

<Number of bets warning/Example/3 bet recommended game (second state)>
The states shown in FIGS. 20(b) to 20(d) and FIGS. 21(a) to 21(b) are 3-bet recommended games (second state), and the state shown in FIG. 20(b) is a 2-bet bet game (second state). This is a state in which the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 has been performed in a betting game and a bonus winning state.

In this example, since the bonus was internally won when the lever was operated (internal lottery), the third stop operation of the game was used as a trigger to change the game from the 2-bet recommended game (first state) to the 3-bet recommended game ( At the same time, by lighting up the title panel 162, a second notification indicating that the current state is a 3-bet recommended game (second state) is started.

According to this example, it is possible to make the clerk of the game parlor or the like realize that the player has forgotten to shift to the second state. Furthermore, since it is possible to know that the first state is in place, it is possible to encourage players, game parlor staff, etc. to voluntarily shift to the second state.

The state shown in FIG. 20(c) is a state in which three credits out of eight credits are used as the bet amount for the game.

In this example, the stored credit number display 125 displays a display indicating that the number of credits is 5 (=8-3) (in this example, a numerical value of "5" is displayed).

The state shown in FIG. 20(d) is a state in which the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 has been performed in a three-bet bet game.

In this example, the 3-coin bet recommended game (second state) is configured so that a preview display can be displayed. , a payout (in this example, 4 pieces) corresponding to a specific winning combination (strong cherry) is made.

The state shown in FIG. 21(a) is a state where two credits allocated from nine credits are used as the bet amount for the game.

In this example, the stored credit number display 125 displays a display indicating that the number of credits is 7 (=9-2) (in this example, a numerical value of "7" is displayed).

The state shown in FIG. 21(b) is a state in which the start lever 135 has been operated (lever operation) in a three-bet bet game.

In this example, when a 3-bet bet game (game with the second number of bets) is executed in a 3-bet recommended game (second state), a bet number warning notification (warning notification) is configured to be executed. Therefore, here, a bet number warning notification AR (in this example, display of an image including a character string such as "2 bet game! Bet 3!!") is executed.

As explained above, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine), the notification means and the control for transitioning to one of the plurality of states means (for example, a control unit 300), the plurality of types of states include a first state and a second state, and the first state is a first bet number. The second state is a state in which a game with a second number of bets (for example, a three-piece bet game) is recommended; The first number of bets and the second number of bets are different numbers, and when a game is executed with a number of bets different from the recommended number of bets, the notification means is configured to issue a warning notification regarding the number of bets (e.g. , the number of bets to be bet (AR) shown in FIG. The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification means does not issue the warning notification when a game with the second number of bets is executed in the first state.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a game with the first number of bets is executed in the second state, a warning notification is executed, and a game with the second number of bets is executed in the first state. In this case, the warning is not issued when the game is played, so by issuing the warning only in the second state, which should be recommended, it is possible to suggest the correct way to play to the player, and It can prevent giving a bad impression. Moreover, when a game with the second number of bets is executed in the first state, by not issuing a warning notification, it is possible to make the player aware that the game is not in the second state.

Further, the first state may be more disadvantageous to the player than the second state.

With such a configuration, players will be informed that the first state is not the originally recommended gaming state and that if a warning is issued in the second state, it will be disadvantageous for the player. This can be suggested to the store clerk at the game parlor, and it is possible to prevent any disadvantage from being caused.

Further, the first state is a normal game that shifts to the second state when a certain internal winning combination (for example, a bonus) is internally won in a game with the first number of bets; The state may be an AT game in which no prize is won in the certain internal winning combination in the game based on the second number of bets.

The state notification means is provided at a position visible to the player (for example, the title panel 162 shown in FIG. 18), and the state notification means includes a first state indicating that the player is in the first state. It is possible to execute a notification (for example, turning off the title panel 162) and a second notification (for example, turning on the title panel 162) indicating that the second state is present, and the first notification is The second notification is switched in connection with the internal winning of the certain internal winning combination in the first state, and the notification mode of the second notification is the same as the notification mode of the state notification means in the normal game. It's okay.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the clerk of the game parlor or the like aware that the player has forgotten to shift to the second state. Furthermore, since it is possible to know that the first state is in place, it is possible to encourage players, game parlor staff, etc. to voluntarily shift to the second state.

The display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157) capable of displaying a plurality of types of display is provided, and the plurality of types of display is a background display (for example, as shown in FIG. 18, FIG. 20(d)) and a preview display (for example, a preview effect based on the internal winning of a specific winning combination (strong cherry) shown in FIG. 20(d)), the background display is The first state and the second state may be the same, and the preview display may be displayed in the second state and may not be displayed in the first state.

With such a configuration, by not displaying a preview in the first state, it can give a sense of discomfort and make the clerk of the game parlor or the like realize that the player has forgotten to shift to the second state. Furthermore, since it is possible to know that the first state is in place, it is possible to encourage players, game parlor staff, etc. to voluntarily shift to the second state.

Further, in the first state, a first background display may be displayed, and in the second state, a second background display different from the first background display may be displayed, or a second background display different from the first background display may be displayed. The background display may be a background display that can be displayed only in the first state (background display exclusively for the first state). Similarly, regarding the notice display, in the first state, the first notice display may be displayed, and in the second state, a second notice display different from the first notice display may be displayed. Alternatively, the first preview display may be a preview display that can be displayed only in the first state (a preview display exclusively for the first state).

<Menu screen (settings screen)>
Next, the menu screen (setting screen) will be explained using FIGS. 22 to 27.

The state shown in FIG. 22(a) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened and the power is turned on with the setting key provided inside the main body 101 turned on.

In this example, since the power is turned on with the setting key provided inside the main body 101 turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change/setting confirmation mode, and the menu screen (setting screen) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. is displayed. By operating the cross key 193b or the OK button 193a, a clerk at a game parlor can select any of the settings change history, error history, system volume setting, power saving mode setting, and operation check on the menu screen (setting screen). Items can be selected arbitrarily.
According to this example, in addition to tasks such as changing settings and confirming settings, it is possible to perform various other settings, and it is possible to improve convenience for store staff at game parlors and the like.

<Menu screen (settings screen)/system volume setting>
Next, system volume setting will be explained using FIG. 22. In the system volume setting, it is possible to set a maximum volume that can only be set by an administrator such as a clerk at a gaming parlor, and an error sound to be output when an error occurs (for example, when the front door 102 is opened).

FIG. 22(b) is a diagram showing a display example when the system volume setting SS item is tentatively selected on the menu screen, and FIG. 22(c) is a diagram showing a display example when the system volume setting SS item is tentatively selected. It is a figure showing an example of a display after an OK button 193a is pressed.

When the system volume setting SS item is tentatively selected on the menu screen and the OK button 193a is pressed, the system volume screen SSM is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, as shown in FIG. 22(c). A clerk at the game parlor or the like can adjust the volume of the sound output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277, etc.) (the volume set by the administrator) on the system volume screen SSM by operating the cross key 193b or the OK button 193a. It is possible to do so.

In this example, by pressing the right button of the cross key 193b, it is possible to increase the administrator setting volume step by step in the order of volume 1 (minimum volume) → volume 2 → volume 3 (maximum volume and initial value). Yes, by pressing the left button of the cross key 193b, it is possible to gradually decrease the administrator setting volume in the order of volume 3 (maximum volume and initial value) → volume 2 → volume 1 (minimum volume). By pressing the OK button 193a, it is possible to set (memorize) the administrator-set volume.

The sound pressures of volumes 1 to 3 are not particularly limited, but for example, the sound pressure of volume 1 is 80 dB, the sound pressure of volume 2 is 90 dB, and the sound pressure of volume 3 is 100 dB. Further, it goes without saying that the setting value of the administrator-set volume is not limited to three levels. Further, although an example is shown in which the maximum volume is set as the initial value, it may be the minimum volume or any other volume.

FIG. 22(d) is a diagram showing a display example after the administrator setting volume is changed to volume 2 on the system volume screen SSM and the OK button 193a is pressed.

In this example, since the left button of the cross key 193b is pressed on the system volume screen SSM shown in FIG. Since the OK button 193a was pressed after changing the volume to 2, the temporarily selected volume 2 is set (memorized) as the administrator-set volume.

Although not shown, an item for setting the system light amount is added to the menu screen, and the light emitting means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, navigation lamp 149a to 149c, production button 192, stop button 137) 139, title panel 162, etc.), it may be possible to adjust the amount of light output (the amount of light set by the administrator).

In this case, by pressing the right button of the cross key 193b, it is possible to increase the administrator setting light intensity step by step in the order of light intensity 1 (minimum light intensity) → light intensity 2 → light intensity 3 (maximum light intensity and initial value). , by pressing the left button of the cross key 193b, it is possible to gradually decrease the administrator setting light intensity in the order of light intensity 3 (maximum light intensity and initial value) → light intensity 2 → light intensity 1 (minimum light intensity), and then click OK. By pressing the button 193a, it may be possible to set (confirm) the administrator-set light amount.

The brightness of light amounts 1 to 3 is not particularly limited, but for example, the brightness of light amount 1 is "dark (duty ratio 40%)", the brightness of light amount 2 is "medium (duty ratio 70%)", and the brightness of light amount 1 is "dark (duty ratio 40%)". The brightness of No. 3 is "bright (duty ratio 100%)". Further, it goes without saying that the setting value of the administrator-set light amount is not limited to three levels. Furthermore, although an example has been shown in which the maximum light amount is set as the initial value, it may be the minimum light amount or any other light amount.

<Menu screen (settings screen)/power saving mode setting off → on>
Next, power saving mode setting will be explained using FIG. 23. In the power saving mode setting, it is possible to set at least one of the volume and the light intensity. In this example, when the power saving mode is set to on, the sound output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277, etc.) Change the volume, the amount of light output from the light emitting means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.), and the brightness of the display means (liquid crystal display 157) to values suitable for power saving (lower the volume, change the stereo It is possible to change the sound to monaural sound, lower the light intensity and brightness, make the color monochromatic, switch from static lighting to dynamic lighting, etc.

The content of the power saving mode is not particularly limited; for example, after turning the power saving mode from off to on, the mode may be switched to the power saving mode when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after turning on the power saving mode, or the power saving mode may be changed to When a button is operated, it may be forcibly shifted to the power saving mode, or it may be configured not to shift to the power saving mode in a certain gaming state (for example, AT game or bonus game). Even during a game, the game may shift to a power saving mode and limit the volume of the sound output means, the amount of light of the light emitting means, the brightness of the display means, etc.

FIGS. 23(a) and 23(b) are diagrams showing display examples when the power saving mode setting EM item is provisionally selected on the menu screen returned from system volume setting, and FIG. 23(c) is FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a display after the OK button 193a is pressed while the item of power saving mode setting EM is temporarily selected.

When the power saving mode setting EM item is tentatively selected on the menu screen and the OK button 193a is pressed, the power saving mode setting screen EMM is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, as shown in FIG. 23(c). . A clerk at a game parlor or the like can turn the power saving mode setting on or off on the power saving mode setting screen EMM by operating the cross key 193b or the OK button 193a.

FIG. 23(d) is a diagram showing a display example when power saving mode setting ON is temporarily selected on the power saving mode setting screen EMM, and FIG. 24(a) is a diagram showing a display example when power saving mode setting ON is set. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display example of a state in which the screen is displayed.

In this example, since the lower button of the cross key 193b is pressed on the power saving mode setting screen EMM shown in FIG. 23(c), the temporary selection of the power saving mode setting is performed as shown in FIG. 23(d). After changing from off to on and temporarily selecting power saving mode setting on, the OK button 193a is pressed as shown in FIG. 24(a), so the temporarily selected power saving mode setting is omitted It is set (memorized) as the power mode.

<Menu screen (settings screen)/power saving mode setting on → system volume setting>
FIGS. 24(b) and 24(c) are diagrams showing display examples when the system volume setting SS item is tentatively selected on the menu screen returned from the power saving mode setting, and FIG. 24(d) is FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a display after the OK button 193a is pressed while the item of system volume setting SS is temporarily selected.

In this example, after setting the volume to volume 2 (a certain volume) as the system volume setting (first setting), and then setting the power saving mode from off to on as the power saving mode setting (second setting) In this case, as shown in FIG. 24(d), the system volume setting (first setting) is disabled and volume 2 (certain volume) is configured to be set to volume 3 (initial value, maximum volume). are doing.

According to this example, when the power saving mode is set from off to on, the settings related to the volume (first setting) are disabled, so while checking the volume and light intensity set by the power saving mode, The volume can be reset, making it more convenient for game parlor staff and others. It is possible to prompt the reconfiguration work related to the

In addition, when the power saving mode is set from off to on, the volume according to the first setting is set to the maximum volume, so it is possible for staff at game parlors etc. to change the volume and light intensity set by the power saving mode. It is possible to prompt the user to re-set the volume while checking the balance of the volume.

<Menu screen (settings screen)/power saving mode setting off → system volume setting>
FIG. 25A is a diagram showing a display example after the administrator setting volume is changed to volume 1 on the system volume screen SSM and the OK button 193a is pressed.

In this example, since the left button of the cross key 193b is pressed on the system volume screen SSM shown in FIG. Since the OK button 193a was pressed after changing the volume to 1, the temporarily selected volume 1 is set (memorized) as the administrator-set volume.

FIGS. 25(b) and 25(c) are diagrams showing display examples when the power saving mode setting EM item is provisionally selected on the menu screen returned from system volume setting, and FIG. 25(d) is FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a display after the OK button 193a is pressed while the item of power saving mode setting EM is temporarily selected.

When the power saving mode setting EM item is tentatively selected on the menu screen and the OK button 193a is pressed, the power saving mode setting screen EMM is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, as shown in FIG. 25(d). . A clerk at a game parlor or the like can turn the power saving mode setting on or off on the power saving mode setting screen EMM by operating the cross key 193b or the OK button 193a.

FIG. 26(a) is a diagram showing a display example when power saving mode setting OFF is temporarily selected on the power saving mode setting screen EMM, and FIG. 26(b) is a diagram showing a display example when power saving mode setting OFF is set. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display example of a state in which the screen is displayed.

In this example, since the upper button of the cross key 193b is pressed on the power saving mode setting screen EMM shown in FIG. 25(d), the temporary selection of the power saving mode setting is performed as shown in FIG. 26(a). After changing from on to off and temporarily selecting power saving mode setting off, as shown in FIG. 26(b), the OK button 193a is pressed, so the temporarily selected power saving mode setting off is saved. It is set (memorized) as the power mode.

FIGS. 26(c) and 26(d) are diagrams showing display examples when the system volume setting SS item is tentatively selected on the menu screen returned from power saving mode settings, and FIG. 27(a) is FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a display after the OK button 193a is pressed while the item of system volume setting SS is temporarily selected.

In this example, when the power saving mode is set to on, the volume is set to volume 1 (a certain volume) as the system volume setting (first setting), and then the power saving mode setting (second setting) is set to volume 1 (a certain volume). ), the system volume setting (first setting) is maintained when the power saving mode is set from on to off.

When power saving mode is set to off, there is often no need to reset the volume settings, but according to this example, when power saving mode is set from on to off, the volume settings are maintained. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden on the staff of the game parlor.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a setting means (for example, the main control unit 300, device 157, cross key 193b, OK button 193a), the plurality of settings include a first setting and a second setting, and the first setting is a volume control (e.g. , the volume output from the speakers 272, 277) (for example, the system volume setting shown in FIG. 22(b)), and the second setting is a setting regarding the power saving mode (for example, the system volume setting shown in FIG. 23(b)). The power saving mode is a power saving mode setting shown in FIG. or the brightness of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157)) (e.g., lower the volume and light intensity, increase the volume and lower the light intensity, lower the volume and increase the light intensity, mute the sound output means. After setting the volume to the first volume (for example, the initial value) as the first setting, the power saving mode can be turned off as the second setting. If the first volume is set to on, the first volume is maintained, and after the volume is set to a second volume (for example, a volume other than the initial value) as the first setting, the second volume is set to the second volume. This gaming machine is characterized in that when the power saving mode is set from off to on, the second volume is changed to a different volume (for example, initialized to the maximum volume or minimum volume).

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, when the power saving mode is set from off to on, the settings related to the volume (first setting) are disabled, so the volume and light intensity set by the power saving mode are disabled. It is possible to reset the volume while confirming the current level, which increases the convenience of the staff at the game parlor. You can prompt the user to reconfigure the volume while confirming the settings.

Further, when the power saving mode is set from off to on as the second setting after the volume is set to the initial value as the first setting, the initial value may be maintained; in this case, The initial value may be the maximum volume (or minimum volume) of the volume that can be set as the first setting.

With such a configuration, when the power saving mode is set from off to on, the volume according to the first setting will be set to the maximum volume. It is possible to prompt the user to re-set the volume while checking the balance with the volume and light intensity.

Further, in a state where the power saving mode is set to on, after setting the volume to the first volume as the first setting, the power saving mode is set from on to off as the second setting. In this case, the first volume may be maintained (the first setting may not be invalidated).

When the power saving mode is set to off, there is often no need to reset the volume settings, but with this configuration, the volume settings may change when the power saving mode is set from on to off. Since the information is maintained, it is possible to reduce the burden on the staff of the game parlor.

Further, the setting by the setting means may be performed at least during setting change and setting confirmation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to perform various other settings in addition to tasks such as setting changes and setting confirmations, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the game parlor staff and the like.

It also includes a door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157) that can display a display related to the settings, and the setting key is turned from off to on. When the power is turned on in this state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), settings can be changed, and part of the setting change operation (for example, adding 1 to set values 1 to 6) (pressing operation by a setting switch for updating) can be executed with the door open, and in the first case, the display means can execute at least one setting among the plurality of settings. A setting screen (for example, the menu screen shown in FIG. 22(a)) can be displayed, and after the setting change is completed (for example, after the push operation by the start lever 135 is accepted and the setting value is confirmed), the setting screen is displayed. In connection with turning the key from on to off, the setting screen disappears, a production display (for example, a demo screen display or a normal production) is started (for example, see FIG. 17(c)), and the setting change is completed. Even if the door is later closed, if the setting key is off, the effect display will not start and the setting screen will continue to be displayed (for example, see FIG. 16(d)). ).

Since various settings can be executed while changing settings or checking settings, there are cases where you forget to change the original settings and close the door, but with this configuration, the settings screen By continuously displaying , it is possible to inform that the normal game is not possible, so it may be possible to inform the parlor staff about forgetting to change settings or forgetting to remove the setting key.

In addition, when the setting key is turned on from off after the power is turned on (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), the settings can be confirmed, and some of the settings confirmation operations (for example, the setting value can be executed with the door open, and in the first case, the display means is capable of executing at least one of the plurality of settings. A setting screen (for example, the menu screen shown in FIG. 22(a)) can be displayed, and after the setting confirmation is completed, the setting screen disappears in connection with turning the setting key from on to off, and the game is stopped. Even if the door is closed after the related effect display (for example, demo screen display or normal effect) is started (for example, see FIG. 17(c)) and the setting confirmation is completed, the setting key is not pressed. In the off state, the effect display may not start and the setting screen may be continuously displayed (for example, see FIG. 16(d)).

Since various settings can be executed while changing settings or checking settings, you may forget to check the original settings and close the door, but with this configuration, the settings screen By continuously displaying , it is possible to notify that the normal game is not possible, so it may be possible to tell the hall clerk that you forgot to check the settings or forgot to remove the setting key.

Further, while changing the settings or checking the settings, the system may be configured such that the fact that the door is open is notified by light or display, but the fact that the door is open is not notified by sound.

With such a configuration, the work of changing or confirming settings can be performed in a quiet environment, thereby increasing the convenience of the staff at the game parlor and the like.

<Various notifications>
Next, various notifications that can be executed by the slot machine 100 will be explained.

<Various notification/notification means (display means)>
First, prior to explaining various notifications, the notification means provided in the slot machine 100 will be described using FIG. 28(a). FIG. 28(a) is a schematic diagram (front view) of the main parts of the notification means included in the slot machine 100.

The slot machine 100 includes a display means that can display information as one of the notification means. Examples of the display means included in the slot machine 100 include the liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157, the payout number display 127, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, etc. described using FIG. In this example, these display means are comprised of a liquid crystal display, an LED, a segment display, and the like.

<Various notification/notification means (sound output means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a sound output means capable of outputting sound as one of the notification means. Examples of sound output means included in the slot machine 100 include the speakers 272 and 277 described using FIG. 2.

<Various notification/notification means (light emitting means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a light emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light as one of the notification means. The light emitting means provided in the slot machine 100 includes, for example, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, the production button 192, the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the start lever described using FIG. 135, etc., and in this example, all of these light emitting means are composed of LEDs.

Note that the performance button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, and start lever 135 also function as operating means that can be operated by the player. The present invention is also applicable to pachinko machines, and examples of light emitting means included in pachinko machines include frame lamps, performance buttons, accessories, and the like.

<Various notification/setting change/setting confirmation mode>
Next, prior to explaining various notifications, the setting change/setting confirmation mode will be explained.

In the game machine according to this embodiment, the front door 102 (door body) is opened and the power is turned on with a certain operation (operation from OFF to ON) performed using a setting key provided inside the main body 101. (or when the setting key is turned from OFF to ON before the predetermined time elapses after the power is turned on (before the control unit checks the on/off status of the setting key)). It is possible to shift to a state (setting change mode) in which changes (setting changes) are possible.

Here, setting change refers to changing the setting value of the gaming machine, and in this example, while displaying the setting value (any of settings 1 to 6) on the payout number display 127, the operation means ( Each time a press operation of the setting switch (setting switch) is detected, the currently set setting values 1 to 6 are incremented by 1 and updated, and when the setting value exceeds 6, the process returns to 1, which is repeated. It is possible to change the setting value.

Further, in the setting change mode, when a push operation by the operating means (in this example, the start lever 135) is accepted, the setting value is confirmed, and when a certain operation by the setting key is canceled (in this example, the on When the setting key is pulled out after the operation to turn it off), the state in which the setting values can be changed (setting change mode) ends, and the state shifts to the normal game state in which normal games can be played. Note that "cancellation of a certain operation" is not limited to "the operation of turning the setting key from on to off and then removing it", but also "the operation of turning the setting key from on to off". Good too.

Note that if the operation means (start lever 135) is operated without pressing the operation means (setting switch), or if the operation means (setting switch) is repeatedly pressed down, the set value may change one cycle (e.g. , setting 5→setting 6→setting 1→...→setting 5) and then operating the operating means (start lever 135), the setting is the same as the previous setting.

In the game machine according to this embodiment, after opening the front door 102 (door body) and turning on the power, a certain operation (operation from OFF to ON) is performed using a setting key provided inside the main body 101. It is possible to shift to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation).

Here, setting confirmation refers to checking the setting values of the game machine, and in this example, the initial setting value (for example, setting 1) or By displaying the set value (any of settings 1 to 6) set by changing the settings on the payout number display 127, the set value can be confirmed.

Further, in the setting confirmation mode, when a certain operation using the setting key is canceled (in this example, the setting key is removed after the operation to turn from on to off is performed) and the front door 102 is closed, the set value is changed. The state in which confirmation is possible (setting confirmation mode) ends, and a transition is made to the normal game state in which normal games are possible. Note that "cancellation of a certain operation" is not limited to "the operation of turning the setting key from on to off and then removing it", but also "the operation of turning the setting key from on to off". Good too.

In addition, in this specification, the setting change mode in which settings can be changed and the setting confirmation mode in which settings can be confirmed may be collectively referred to as setting change/setting confirmation mode. , a settings change mode in which only settings can be changed, a settings confirmation mode in which only settings can be confirmed, and a mode in which settings can be changed and settings confirmed.

<Various notification/setting change modes>
Next, various notifications in the setting change mode will be explained.

FIG. 28(b) to FIG. 30(c) are diagrams chronologically showing examples of various notifications from when the operation check and the setting change are executed in the setting change mode until the transition to the normal game.

<Various notifications/door opening → Power on with setting change → Shift to setting change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 28(b) is a state in which a clerk at the game parlor opens the front door 102, turns the setting key from off to on, turns on the power, and shifts to setting change mode. It is.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on with the front door 102 (door body) opened and a certain operation (operation from OFF to ON) performed using the setting key provided inside the main body 101 ( Or, if the setting key is turned from off to on before a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the power is turned on (before the control unit checks the on/off status of the setting key), the setting value is changed (setting change ) is possible (setting change mode).

Furthermore, in the slot machine 100, when the set value is changeable and the door body is open (first case), a notification sound indicating that the set value is changeable is output. It does not start, but starts outputting a notification sound indicating that the door body is in the open state. In addition, when the set value is changeable and the door body is open (first case), a display including a display indicating that the set value is changeable is displayed in the first display mode. Display in .

Specifically, since the state shown in FIG. 28(b) is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, the setting change notification sound ( In this example, the opening notification sound (the first sound indicating that the door body is in the open state) is not started without outputting the voice of Person A saying "Settings are being changed!" shown in FIG. 28(c). In this example, the voice of person A saying "The door is open" is repeatedly output from the speakers 272 and 277.

According to this example, when the door is opened during the setting change, the notification sound indicating the door opening is output while the notification sound indicating the setting change is not output, so the notification sound indicating the door opening can be highlighted. A clerk at a game parlor or the like can reliably know that the door is open.

In addition, since this state is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, a setting change in progress display (in this example, "Settings changing in progress") indicates that the setting value can be changed. The display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a display including a character string "Change Settings" in the first display mode (in this example, a display mode in which a character string "Settings Changing" is placed in the center of a yellow background image). to be displayed.

According to this example, when the door is opened while the settings are being changed, a notification sound indicating that the settings are being changed is not outputted, but a display indicating that the settings are being changed is displayed, so that the clerk at the game parlor or the like can tell that the settings are being changed by the display. can be reliably grasped visually.

In addition, in the slot machine 100, when the setting value is changeable and the door body is in the open state (first case), a part of the notification means is used to notify that the door body is in the open state. Make a notification indicating.

Specifically, the state shown in FIG. 28(b) is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, so the upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, and production button 192 flash in red, A notification indicating that the front door 102 is in an open state (open notification) is performed.

According to this example, the light emitting means alerts the clerk of the game parlor that the door body is open while the settings are being changed (indicating that the settings are being changed or that fraudulent activity is occurring). etc. can be reliably informed.

Note that the production button 192 is a means that functions as an operation means for various settings, etc., and also a means that functions as a notification means that can make notifications. When functioning as a means, it is an operation means whose operation is invalid.

<Various notification/setting change modes (door open → door closed)>
The state shown in FIG. 28(c) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state while the setting key is kept on after shifting to the setting change mode.

In the slot machine 100, when the set value is in a changeable state and the door body is in a closed state (second case), output of a notification sound indicating that the set value is in a changeable state is started. . In addition, when the set value is changeable and the door body is closed (second case), a display including a display indicating that the set value is changeable is displayed in the second display mode. Display in .

The state shown in FIG. 28(c) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed in the setting change mode, so the setting change notification sound (in this example, " "Settings are being changed!" is repeatedly output from the speakers 272 and 277.

As explained using FIGS. 28(b) and 28(c), according to this example, when the door is open during the setting change, the notification sound during the setting change is not output, but when the door is closed during the setting change. In the state, a notification sound is output when the settings are being changed, so the door open and door closed states can be linked with the presence or absence of the notification sound when the settings are being changed, providing a game machine with unique notification means. can do. In addition, when the door is open, a notification sound alerts the gaming parlor that the door is open while settings are being changed (settings may have been changed or fraudulent activity may have occurred). It is possible to reliably notify the store clerk, etc., and when the door is closed, the notification sound can reliably notify the store clerk, etc. of the game parlor that the setting change has not been completed.

In addition, when the slot machine 100 is in a state where the setting value can be changed and the door body is in the closed state (second case), the slot machine 100 displays a setting changing display ( In this example, the display including the text string "Changing settings") is displayed in the second display format (in this example, the text string "Changing settings" is placed in the upper left corner of the green background image). , is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 as a setting screen (first setting screen; display mode including the operation check setting screen) on which an operation check can be started.

Specifically, in the setting change mode of this example, a setting screen (first setting screen, operation check setting screen) on which an operation check can be started is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. A clerk at the game parlor or the like can arbitrarily select any of the following items: speaker check, accessory check, and production button check on the setting screen (first setting screen) by operating the cross key 193 (operating means). It is possible to do so.

According to this example, when the door is open while the settings are being changed, a display including a display indicating that the set value can be changed is displayed in the first display mode, while when the door is closed while the settings are being changed. In the status, a display including a display indicating that the set value can be changed is displayed in a second display format that is different from the first display format. It is possible to easily understand which state it is in.

In addition, in this example, in the second display mode, the character string "Settings changing" is displayed in a smaller size than in the first display mode, but when the door is closed while the settings are being changed, the notification sound when changing the settings is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably inform the game parlor staff etc. that the setting change has not been completed through the notification sound.

Note that the items (first setting) that can be selected in the setting change mode are not limited to this example, and may include, for example, light emitting means such as the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 in addition to (or instead of) the exemplified items. Checking the operation of the movable body, which will be described later with reference to FIG. Light intensity setting of display means such as, power saving mode setting, setting change history (date and time, setting value at the time of setting change), setting confirmation history (date and time, setting value at the time of setting confirmation), information on errors that occurred in the past. It may be a history or the like.

<Various notifications/setting change mode (door closing)/operation check>
As explained using FIG. 8 and the like, the operation check refers to checking a certain performance means (one or more performance means) among the plurality of performance means provided in the slot machine 100 in a certain predetermined operation pattern. This is the work of checking (inspecting) whether a certain performance means is operating based on a certain operation pattern (whether there is any abnormality) by operating it based on a certain operation pattern.

Although the type of operation check is not particularly limited, in this example, a speaker check, an accessory check, and a performance button check can be executed.

The speaker check includes, for example, an operation pattern that outputs a certain sound from the sound output means, an operation pattern that changes the volume or frequency of the sound output from the sound output means, and an operation pattern that stops the output of the sound from the sound output means (mutes the sound). ) a speaker based on an operation pattern, an operation pattern that outputs sound in a certain order when there are multiple sound output means, an operation pattern that outputs sound from only some sound output means when there are multiple sound output means, etc. This is the work of checking whether the sound output means such as 272, 277, etc. are operating according to the operation pattern.

The accessory check includes, for example, an operation pattern in which the LEDs constituting the light-emitting means are lit in a certain order, an operation pattern in which the LEDs constituting the light-emitting means are blinked, an operation pattern in which the color of the light-emitting means is changed, and multiple light-emitting means. The upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and each reel 110 to 112 are set based on an operation pattern that causes the light emitting means to emit light in a certain order in a certain case, or an operation pattern that displays only some of the light emitting means when there are multiple light emitting means, etc. Check whether light emitting means such as the reel backlight 148, stop buttons 137 to 139, and start lever 135 are operating according to the operating pattern, and whether movable bodies such as the shutter 163 are operating according to the operating pattern. This is a task that requires checking.

The effect button check is based on, for example, an operation pattern that causes the effect button 192 to vibrate, an operation pattern that causes the light emitting means of the effect button 192 to emit light in a certain color, an operation pattern that causes the light emitting means of the effect button 192 to blink in a certain color, etc. This is a task of checking whether the production button 192 (operation means) is operating according to the operation pattern.

In this example, after shifting to the setting change mode, when the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state with the setting key turned on, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed as shown in FIG. 28(c). An operation check setting screen like this will be displayed.

On the operation check setting screen in this example, three items are displayed: speaker check, accessory check, and production button check, and by operating the cross key 193 (operation means), it is possible to temporarily select any operation check item. When the performance button 192 is pressed with any of the operation checks provisionally selected, the corresponding operation check is started.

<Various notifications/setting change mode (door closed)/start speaker check>
The state shown in FIG. 28(d) is a state in which the effect button 192 is pressed with the speaker check item provisionally selected on the operation check setting screen, and the speaker check is executed.

In the speaker check of this example, first, the upper speaker of the speakers 272 and 277 placed at the top of the main body 101 outputs a voice saying "This is the upper speaker." The lower left speaker located at the lower left of the main body 101 outputs a voice saying "This is the lower left speaker." Finally, among the speakers 272 and 277, the lower right speaker located at the lower right of the main body 101 outputs the sound "This is the lower right speaker." The operation of the speaker (sound output means) is checked by outputting a voice saying "Speaker". Also, during the speaker check, the output of the setting change notification sound (in this example, the sound saying "Settings are being changed!") is interrupted.

According to this example, when the door is in the closed state, the display mode (second display mode) including the setting screen where the operation check can be started is used to display that the setting value can be changed. In the closed state, the operation of the presentation means can be surely checked.

<Various notifications/setting change mode (door closed)/speaker check completed>
The state shown in FIG. 28(e) is the state in which the speaker check executed in FIG. 28(d) has been completed.

In this example, since the speaker check has ended, the settings change notification sound that was interrupted during the speaker check (in this example, the sound "Settings are being changed!") is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

<Various notifications/setting change mode (front door closed)/start button check>
The state shown in FIG. 28(f) is a state where the effect button check is temporarily selected on the operation check setting screen, and the state shown in FIG. 29(a) is a state where the effect button check is temporarily selected and the effect button is pressed. 192 has been pressed and the performance button check has been executed.

In the performance button check of this example, the performance check of the performance button 192 (operation means) is executed by vibrating the performance button 192 for a predetermined period of time. Also, during the performance button check, unlike the speaker check, the setting change notification sound (in this example, the sound "Settings are being changed!") continues to be output.

According to this example, when the door is in the closed state, the display mode (second display mode) including the setting screen where the operation check can be started is used to display that the setting value can be changed. In the closed state, the operation of the presentation means can be surely checked.

In addition, since the production button (operation means) also functions as a notification means for notifying the door opening, it is preferable to be able to check the operation only when the door is closed. Checks can be carried out reliably.

Note that the operation pattern for checking the performance button is not limited to vibration, and instead of (or in addition to) the vibration, the performance button 192 may be turned on or blinked in a predetermined pattern.

<Various notifications/setting change mode (door closed)/end of production button check>
The state shown in FIG. 29(b) is the state in which the effect button check executed in FIG. 29(a) has been completed.

In this example, since the performance button check has been completed, the vibration of the performance button 192 is stopped, while the output of the setting change notification sound (in this example, the sound "Settings are being changed!") is continued.

<Various notification/setting change modes (door closed → door open)>
The state shown in FIG. 29(c) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state while the setting key is kept on after shifting to the setting change mode.

In this state, since the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, a setting change notification sound (in this example, "Settings are being changed") indicates that the setting values can be changed. The opening notification sound (the first sound, in this example, the sound "The door is open") indicating that the door body is in the open state is output from the speakers 272 and 277 without starting the output of the sound). At the same time, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 flash in red to notify that the front door 102 is open (open notification).

Note that the production button 192 is a means that functions as an operation means for various settings, etc., and also a means that functions as a notification means that can make notifications. operation will be disabled.

In addition, since the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, the display including the setting change in progress display (in this example, the display of the character string "Settings changing") is displayed in the first display mode. (In this example, a display mode in which a character string "settings changing" is placed in the center of a yellow background image) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

<Various notifications/setting change mode (door open)/setting change operations>
The state shown in FIG. 29(d) is a state in which the setting value has been determined and the setting change has been completed.

In this example, while displaying the set value on the payout number display 127, each time a press operation by the operating means (setting switch) is detected, 1 is added to the currently set set values 1 to 6. After updating and changing the setting value from setting 1 to setting 6, since a press operation by the operating means (in this example, the start lever 135) is accepted, the setting value is determined to setting 6, and the payout number display 127 The number “06” is displayed.

In addition, in the same state, since the setting value has been finalized and the setting change has been completed, the setting change in progress display is terminated, and the setting change completion display (in this example , a screen in which a character string "setting change complete" is placed in the center of a yellow background image) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

In this example, since the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, the opening notification sound (sound saying "The door is open") continues to be output, but the operating means (main In the example, when a press operation on the start lever 135) is received, the output of the release notification sound is interrupted, and the setting change completion notification sound (for example, "Setting change After the speaker 272, 277 outputs a voice saying "The opening notification sound has been completed", the output of the release notification sound may be restarted.

<Various notifications/setting change mode (door open)/end of setting change>
The state shown in FIG. 29(e) is a state in which a certain operation using the setting key is canceled (the setting key is removed after the setting key is turned from on to off) and the setting change mode has ended.

In this state, the setting change mode (a state in which setting values can be changed) has ended and the state has shifted to the normal game state where normal games can be played, so the setting change completion display is ended and the demo screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 157 Display in the display area. Note that since the front door 102 is in an open state, the output of the open notification sound (sound saying "The door is open") continues.

<Various notifications/Normal game state (door open → door closed)>
The state shown in FIG. 29(f) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state after the setting change mode ends and the normal gaming state is entered.

In this state, the front door 102 is not in the open state and is not in the setting change mode, so the setting change indication is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and the open notification sound and setting change notification sound are output from the speakers 272 and 277. Also, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are not used to notify the opening.

<Various notifications/Normal gaming state (door closed → door open)>
The state shown in FIG. 30(a) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state after transitioning to the normal gaming state and playing at least one game.

When the slot machine 100 is in a state where the set value can be changed and the door is in the open state (first case), the slot machine 100 outputs a notification sound indicating that the door is in the open state as the first sound (in this example). Then, the voice of person A saying "The door is open" is output, the state where the setting values can be changed ends, the state shifts to the normal game state, and after at least one game has been played, the door body closes. When the door changes from the state to the open state, a second sound (in this example, the voice of Person B saying "The door is open") is used to indicate that the door is in the open state. Output.

The state shown in FIG. 30(a) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened after the setting change mode (a state in which setting values can be changed) has ended, the state has shifted to the normal game state, and at least one game has been played. Therefore, the open notification sound (second sound, in this example, the voice of person B saying "The door is open") indicating that the door body is open is output from the speakers 272 and 277. At the same time, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are blinked in red to notify that the front door 102 is open (open notification).

According to this example, after the state in which the set value can be changed ends, the state shifts to the normal gaming state, and at least one game is played (executed) in the normal gaming state, the door body changes from the closed state to the open state. When this occurs, a second sound different from the first sound output when the setting value can be changed is output, so by changing the output sound, the setting change is completed and the game returns to the normal gaming state. It is possible to make the clerk of the game parlor and the like recognize again that the player is playing the game. Additionally, since it is possible to check the operation of the door when it is in the closed state, there is a risk of forgetting whether or not the settings have been changed when performing the operation check. It is possible to make the clerk at the game parlor recognize again that the game has been completed.

In addition, in this example, when the state where the setting values can be changed (setting change mode) ends, the state shifts to the normal gaming state, and after at least one game has been played, the door body changes from the closed state to the open state. Although the present invention is configured to output a second sound different from the first sound, the present invention is not limited thereto. After transitioning and playing at least one game, the first sound ( For example, the configuration is configured to output a second sound (for example, the voice of person B saying ``The door is open'') that is different from the voice of person A saying ``The door is open.'' Good too.

In addition, after a certain state (a state in which the set value can be changed or a state in which the set value can be confirmed) ends and the player enters the normal gaming state and plays at least one game, a gaming state advantageous to the player is established. (for example, if you win CZ, etc.), a second sound that is different from the first sound output in a certain state (for example, the voice of person A saying "Please close the door") (For example, the voice of person B saying "Please close the door") may be output, or the first sound to be output in a certain state (for example, "Please close the door") may be output. It may be configured such that the same sound as the voice of person A saying "Please" may be output.

Also, when a certain state (a state in which the setting value can be changed or a state in which the setting value can be confirmed) ends, and before transitioning to the normal gaming state and completing one game (in the normal gaming state, even one game is completed) When the door body changes from the closed state to the open state, the same sound as the first sound output in a certain state (for example, the voice of person A saying "Please close the door") is emitted. It may also be configured to output.

Further, when the door body is in an open state after a certain state (a state in which the set value can be changed or a state in which the set value can be confirmed) has ended (second case; for example, FIG. 29(e) As shown in FIG. 3, the opening notification sound may be output as the first sound when the setting key is removed from the keyhole after the setting key is turned from on to off.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably inform the staff of the game parlor that the door is open even though a certain state has ended, and it is possible to prevent forgetting to close the door. can.

In addition, after a certain state (a state in which the set value can be changed or a state in which the set value can be confirmed) has ended, the door body is in an open state (second case), and the door body is If the door body changes from the closed state to the open state without playing a game after changing from the open state to the closed state (for example, as shown in FIG. 29(f), after the door body changes to the closed state The opening notification sound may be configured to be output as the first sound when the door body is in the open state without playing a game.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably inform the staff of the game parlor that the door is open even though a certain state has ended, and it is possible to prevent forgetting to close the door. can.

<Various notifications/Normal gaming state (door open state → door closed state → medal insertion)>
The state shown in FIG. 30(b) is the state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state in the normal gaming state, and the state shown in FIG. 30(c) is the state in which the front door 102 is in the closed state and the medals are has been inserted.

In this example, in the normal game state, the front door 102 is closed and medals have been inserted, so the demo screen is ended, the normal game screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the normal game is started. has started.

As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values, and a setting means that can be opened and closed. A door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, a payout number display 127, a stored number display 125, speakers 272, 277, an upper lamp 142, and a side lamp 144). , reel backlight 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), and a certain operation (for example, turning on from off) using a setting key is performed. When the power is turned on in a state where the setting value is changed (e.g., setting change mode), the notification means is means including sound output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277). , when the setting value is in a changeable state and the door body is in an open state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"; for example, the setting change mode shown in FIG. 28(b) (when the front door 102 is open), the sound output means does not output a notification sound indicating that the set value can be changed; When the door body changes from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"; for example, when the front door 102 is closed in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 28(c)), , starts outputting a notification sound (for example, the voice of person A saying "Settings are being changed!" shown in FIG. 28(c)) indicating that the setting value can be changed (or can start). This is a game machine characterized by the following:

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, when the door is open while the settings are being changed, the notification sound that the settings are being changed is not outputted, while when the door is closed and the settings are being changed, the notification sound that the settings are being changed is output. Therefore, it is possible to link the door open and door closed states with the presence or absence of the notification sound during the setting change, and it is possible to provide a game machine with unique notification means. In addition, when the door is open, a notification sound alerts the gaming parlor that the door is open while settings are being changed (settings may have been changed or fraudulent activity may have occurred). It is possible to reliably notify the store clerk, etc., and when the door is closed, the notification sound can reliably notify the store clerk, etc. of the game parlor that the setting change has not been completed.

Further, in the first case, the sound output means may generate a notification sound indicating that the door body is in an open state (for example, the person A who says "The door is open" as shown in FIG. 28(b)) It may also be a means for outputting (audio).

With such a configuration, when the door is opened while the settings are being changed, the notification sound indicating that the door is open is output while the notification sound indicating that the setting is being changed is not output, making it possible to make the notification sound indicating that the door is open stand out. This allows the store clerk at the game parlor to surely know when the door is open.

Further, the notification means is means including a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the display means, in the first case, displays ( For example, in the second case, the display means displays a display indicating that the setting value is in a changeable state. It may also be a means for displaying an indication including.

With such a configuration, when the door is opened while the settings are being changed, a notification sound indicating that the settings are being changed will not be outputted, but a message indicating that the settings are being changed will be displayed, so that the staff at the game parlor will be able to see through the display that the settings are being changed. It is possible to grasp certain things visually.

Further, in the first case, the display means displays a display indicating that the setting value is changeable in a first display mode (for example, a yellow background image shown in FIG. 28(b)). In the second case, the display means displays a display indicating that the setting value is ready to be changed. In the second display mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 28(c), the character string "Settings changing" is placed in the upper left corner of the green background image, and the setting screen where the operation check can be started (operation check setting the first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes, and the first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes, and the first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes, and the first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes, and the first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes. means (for example, a speaker, an accessory (movable body), a performance button), and the certain performance means is located at a position where the operation can be checked from the front of the game machine (hereinafter referred to as "operation check"). The second display mode may be a display mode including a setting screen on which the operation check can be started.

With such a configuration, when the door is open while the settings are being changed, a display including a display indicating that the set value can be changed is displayed in the first display mode, and while the setting value is being changed. When the door is closed, a display including a display indicating that the set value can be changed is displayed in a second display format that is different from the first display format. It is possible to easily determine which state is in the closed state. In addition, when the door is closed, a display mode (second display mode) that includes a setting screen that allows you to start an operation check is displayed to indicate that the setting value can be changed. It is possible to reliably check the operation of the production means.

Further, at least a part of the certain presentation means (for example, a presentation button) is a means that functions as the notification means capable of giving a notification indicating that the door body is in an open state in the first case. It's okay.

With such a configuration, it is preferable that the means that also functions as a notification means for notifying the door open be able to check the operation only when the door is closed. You can make it happen.

Further, in the first case, the sound output means outputs a notification sound indicating that the door body is in an open state (e.g., "The door is open" as shown in FIG. 28(b)). When the door body changes from the closed state to the open state after the state in which the set value can be changed ends, the sound output means Means for outputting a notification sound indicating that the door body is in an open state as a second sound (for example, the voice of person B saying "The door is open" shown in FIG. 30(a)) The first sound and the second sound may be different sounds.

With this configuration, when the door body changes from the closed state to the open state after the state where the set value can be changed ends, the first sound that is output when the set value can be changed will be different. Since the second sound is output, the clerk at the game parlor can once again recognize that the setting change has been completed by changing the output sound. Additionally, since it is possible to check the operation of the door when it is in the closed state, there is a risk of forgetting whether or not the settings have been changed when performing the operation check. It is possible to make the clerk at the game parlor recognize again that the game has been completed.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values, and a door body that can be opened and closed ( For example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), in a state where a certain operation (for example, turning on from off) is performed using a setting key. When the power is turned on, the setting value is in a changeable state (for example, setting change mode), and the notification means is means including sound output means (for example, speakers 272, 277), When the set value is in a changeable state and the door body is in an open state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"; for example, in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 28(b), the output means 102 is open), the sound output means does not output a notification sound indicating that the set value is in a changeable state, and the sound output means does not output a notification sound indicating that the set value is in a changeable state. When the door body changes from an open state to a closed state (for example, when the front door 102 is closed in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 28(c)), the set value is in a changeable state. Means for starting the output of a notification sound (for example, the voice of person A saying "Settings are being changed!" shown in FIG. 28(c)) indicating that the sound output means is in the first case. and means for outputting a notification sound indicating that the door body is in an open state as a first sound (for example, the voice of person A saying "the door is open" as shown in FIG. 28(b)). Yes, the sound output means is configured to cause the door body to be in an open state when the door body changes from a closed state to an open state after the state in which the set value can be changed ends and the state shifts to a normal gaming state. This means may output a notification sound indicating that a second sound (for example, the voice of person B saying "The door is open" shown in FIG. 30(a)), and The game machine is characterized in that the sound and the second sound are different sounds.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, when the door is open while the settings are being changed, the notification sound that the settings are being changed is not outputted, while when the door is closed and the settings are being changed, the notification sound that the settings are being changed is output. Therefore, it is possible to link the door open and door closed states with the presence or absence of the notification sound during the setting change, and it is possible to provide a game machine with unique notification means. In addition, when the door is open, a notification sound alerts the gaming parlor that the door is open while settings are being changed (settings may have been changed or fraudulent activity may have occurred). It is possible to reliably notify the store clerk, etc., and when the door is closed, the notification sound can reliably notify the store clerk, etc. of the game parlor that the setting change has not been completed.

In addition, when the door changes from the closed state to the open state after the setting value can be changed, a second sound different from the first sound output when the setting value can be changed is output. Therefore, by changing the sound that is output, it is possible to make the store clerk at the game parlor and the like recognize again that the setting change has been completed. Additionally, since it is possible to check the operation of the door when it is in the closed state, there is a risk of forgetting whether or not the settings have been changed when performing the operation check. It is possible to make the clerk at the game parlor recognize again that the game has been completed.

Further, the "first sound" and the "second sound" according to the present invention may be different sounds, for example, the content of the sound is the same but the type of sound is different (for example, the first sound may be a male voice and the second sound may be a female voice, both saying "The door is open"), or they may be at least partially different (for example, the first sound may be "The door is open"). The second sound may be "The door is open. Please close the door"), and the playback speed, pitch, number of repetitions, etc. of the sound may be different. It may be something.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values, and a door body that can be opened and closed ( For example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), in a state where a certain operation (for example, turning on from off) is performed using a setting key. When the power is turned on, the setting value is in a state where it can be changed (for example, setting change mode), and when the certain operation using the setting key is performed after the power is turned on, the setting value is changed. The setting value can be confirmed (e.g., setting confirmation mode), and the notification means includes sound output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277), and the sound output means is in a certain state. When the door body is in an open state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"; for example, when the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 28(b)), the door body is in an open state. means for starting output of an open notification sound indicating a state, the certain state being either a state in which the setting value can be changed or a state in which the setting value can be confirmed; In the first case, the sound output means outputs the open notification sound as a first sound (for example, the voice of person A saying "the door is open" as shown in FIG. 28(b)). means, and the sound output means outputs the open notification when at least one game is played after the certain state ends and the state shifts to the normal game state, and the door body changes from the closed state to the open state. A means that may (or always outputs) a sound as a second sound (for example, the voice of person B saying "The door is open" shown in FIG. 30(a)), The first sound and the second sound are different sounds. When the door body is in an open state (in a state before transitioning to a gaming state and playing at least one game) (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), the opening notification sound is the first sound. This game machine is characterized in that it is an output means.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, after a certain state (a state in which the set value can be changed or a state in which the set value can be confirmed) is completed, at least one game is played, and the door body is changed from the closed state. When the game enters the open state, it outputs a second sound that is different from the first sound that is output in a certain state, so changing the output sound can complete a certain state and transition to the normal gaming state. It is possible to make the clerk of the game parlor and the like recognize again that the game is being held. In addition, after a certain state ends, if the door body is in the open state (second case), the open notification sound is output as the first sound, so if a certain state ends but the door body is It is possible to reliably notify the clerk of the game parlor of the open state, and it is possible to prevent forgetting to close the door.

In addition, the sound output means is configured to output sound when, in the second case, the door body changes from the closed state to the open state without playing a game after the door body changes from the open state to the closed state. , the opening notification sound may be output as the first sound.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably inform the staff of the game parlor that the door is open even though a certain state has ended, and it is possible to prevent forgetting to close the door. can.

In addition, when the set value can be changed and the door body is in the closed state, the first setting (for example, operation checks such as speaker check, accessory check, performance button check, etc.), volume setting A first setting screen (e.g., the first setting screen shown in FIG. 28(c)) on which the setting values can be changed (for example, the first setting screen shown in FIG. 28(c)) is started, and when the door body In the case of the open state, the display of the first setting screen does not start, and if the setting values can be checked and the door body is in the closed or open state, the second setting ( Display of a second setting screen (e.g., the second setting screen shown in FIG. 30(e)) on which you can set the volume, setting change history, error history, time setting, operation check, light intensity setting, etc. is started, and the first setting and the second setting may be at least partially different settings.

With this configuration, it is possible to separately set items that can be set when changing settings and items that can be set when checking settings, and when the setting value can be checked, the door body can be closed. Since the second setting is possible in either the state or the open state, it is possible to improve the convenience of the store clerk at the game parlor.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values, and a door body that can be opened and closed ( For example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), and when the power is turned on while a certain operation is performed using the setting key, the above-mentioned The setting value is in a state where the setting value can be changed (e.g., setting change mode), and the notification means includes a sound output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277), and the sound output means is capable of changing the setting value. When the door body is in the open state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"; for example, when the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 28(b)), The means does not output a notification sound indicating that the set value can be changed, and the sound output means changes the set value from the open state to the closed state when the set value is changeable. (for example, when the front door 102 is closed in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 28(c)), a notification sound (for example, in the figure 28(c), the sound output means starts outputting the voice of person A saying "Settings are being changed!", and the sound output means is, in the first case, when the door body is in an open state. means for outputting an open notification sound indicating that the door is open as a first sound (for example, the voice of person A saying "the door is open" as shown in FIG. 28(b)), and the sound output means After the state in which the setting value can be changed ends and the state shifts to the normal gaming state, at least one game is played and the door body changes from the closed state to the open state, the opening notification sound is changed to a second sound ( For example, as shown in FIG. 30(a), this means may (or always outputs) the voice of person B saying "The door is open~", and the first sound and the The second sound is a different sound, and the sound output means outputs the sound after the setting value has been changed (for example, after the setting key is operated from on to off, After removing the setting key from the keyhole, after changing the setting value with the setting switch, or after changing the setting value with the setting switch and performing an operation to confirm the setting value), (before transitioning to the normal gaming state mentioned above) (or in a state before transitioning to the normal gaming state and playing at least one game) when the door body is in an open state (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"). ) is a means for outputting the opening notification sound with the first sound.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, when the door is open while the settings are being changed, the notification sound that the settings are being changed is not outputted, while when the door is closed and the settings are being changed, the notification sound that the settings are being changed is output. Therefore, it is possible to link the door open and door closed states with the presence or absence of the notification sound during the setting change, and it is possible to provide a game machine with unique notification means. In addition, when the door is open, an opening notification sound alerts the gaming establishment that the door is open while the settings are being changed (settings may have been changed or fraudulent activity may have occurred). When the door is closed, the notification sound can reliably notify the store clerk, etc. of the game parlor that the setting change has not been completed.

In addition, when the state where the set value can be changed ends and the state changes to the normal gaming state, and the door body changes from the closed state to the open state after playing at least one game, the output is output in the state where the set value can be changed. Since the opening notification sound is output with a second sound that is different from the first sound, the clerk at the game store etc. is made aware again that the setting change has been completed by changing the output notification sound. be able to. In addition, after the setting change is completed, if the door body is in the open state (second case), the open notification sound is output as the first sound, so even if the setting change is completed, the door body is in the open state. It is possible to reliably notify the clerk of the game parlor, etc., of the fact that the door is closed, and it is possible to prevent forgetting to close the door.

In addition, the sound output means is configured to output sound when, in the second case, the door body changes from the closed state to the open state without playing a game after the door body changes from the open state to the closed state. , the opening notification sound may be output as the first sound.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably notify the staff at the game parlor that the door is open even though the setting change has been completed, and it is possible to prevent forgetting to close the door. .

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values, and a door body that can be opened and closed ( For example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), and if a certain operation is performed using the setting key after the power is turned on, the setting The state is such that the value can be checked (for example, setting confirmation mode), and the notification means includes a sound output means (for example, speakers 272, 277), and the sound output means is in a state in which the setting value can be checked. state and the door body is in an open state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"; for example, when the front door 102 is open in the setting confirmation mode), the setting value can be confirmed. The sound output means does not output a notification sound indicating that the setting value is confirmed when the door body changes from the open state to the closed state (for example, when the door body changes from the open state to the closed state). mode, when the front door 102 is closed), starts outputting a notification sound (for example, the voice of person A saying "Settings are being checked!") indicating that the setting values can be confirmed. In the first case, the sound output means outputs an open notification sound indicating that the door is in an open state to a first sound (for example, a person A saying "The door is open"). The sound output means is a means for outputting a sound (audio), and the sound output means is a means for outputting a sound when at least one game is played after the state in which the set value can be confirmed ends and the state shifts to a normal game state, and the door body is opened from the closed state. means that may (or always outputs) the open notification sound as a second sound (for example, the voice of person B saying "The door is open") when the state The first sound and the second sound are different sounds, and the sound output means outputs the setting after the confirmation of the setting value is completed (for example, after operating the setting key from on to off). After operating the key from on to off and then removing the setting key from the keyhole, or after displaying the current setting value and then erasing the current setting value), (in the state before transitioning to the normal gaming state) or, when the door body is in an open state (in a state before shifting to the normal gaming state and playing at least one game) (hereinafter referred to as "second case"). ) is a means for outputting the opening notification sound with the first sound.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, when the door is open while the settings are being checked, the notification sound indicating that the settings are being checked is not outputted, while when the door is being closed and the settings are being checked, the notification sound is output when the door is being checked. Therefore, the door open and door closed states and the presence or absence of the notification sound during setting confirmation can be linked, and a gaming machine with unique notification means can be provided. In addition, when the door is open, an opening notification sound alerts the game store that the door is open while the settings are being checked (settings may be being checked or fraudulent activity may be occurring). When the door is closed, the notification sound can reliably notify the store clerk, etc. of the game parlor that the setting confirmation has not been completed.

In addition, when the state in which the set value can be confirmed ends and the state shifts to the normal gaming state, and the door body changes from the closed state to the open state after playing at least one game, the set value is output in the state in which the set value can be confirmed. Since the release notification sound is output with a second sound that is different from the first sound, the staff at the game parlor etc. are made aware again that the setting confirmation has been completed by changing the release notification sound that is output. be able to. In addition, after setting confirmation is completed, if the door body is in the open state (second case), the open notification sound is output as the first sound, so even if the setting confirmation is finished, the door body is in the open state. It is possible to reliably notify the clerk of the game parlor, etc., of the fact that the door is closed, and it is possible to prevent forgetting to close the door.

In addition, the sound output means is configured to output sound when, in the second case, the door body changes from the closed state to the open state without playing a game after the door body changes from the open state to the closed state. , the opening notification sound may be output as the first sound.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably inform the staff at the game parlor that the door is open even though the setting confirmation has been completed, and it is possible to prevent forgetting to close the door. .

<Various notification/setting confirmation modes>
Next, various notifications in the setting confirmation mode will be explained. FIGS. 30(b) to 32(f) are diagrams chronologically showing examples of various notifications after the operation check and setting confirmation are executed in the setting confirmation mode until the transition to the normal game.

<Various notifications/door opening → power on>
The state shown in FIG. 30(d) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened and the power is turned on.

In this state, since the front door 102 is open, the speaker 272 emits an open notification sound (in this example, a sound saying "The door is open") indicating that the door body is in the open state. , 277, and blinks the upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144 in red to notify that the front door 102 is open (open notification). In this example, the opening notification by the effect button 192 is not performed.

<Move to notification/setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 30(e) is a state in which the setting key is turned on from off after the power is turned on, and the setting confirmation mode is entered.

The slot machine 100 opens when the front door 102 (door body) is opened and the power is turned on, and then a certain operation (turning from off to on) is performed using a setting key provided inside the main body 101. , it is possible to shift to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation).

In addition, in the slot machine 100, when the set value can be confirmed and the door body is in the open state (first case), a notification sound indicating that the set value can be confirmed is output. It does not start, but starts outputting a notification sound indicating that the door body is in the open state. In addition, when the set value can be confirmed and the door body is in the open state (first case), a display including a display indicating that the set value can be confirmed is displayed in the third display mode. Display in .

The state shown in FIG. 30(e) is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the setting confirmation mode, so the setting confirmation notification sound (in this example, the 31(c)) without starting to output the opening notification sound (the first sound that indicates that the door body is in the open state. In this example, the sound "The door is The voice of person A saying "I'm opening the door" is repeatedly output from the speakers 272 and 277.

According to this example, when the door is opened during setting confirmation, the notification sound indicating the door opening is output while the notification sound indicating the setting confirmation is not output, so the notification sound indicating the door opening can be highlighted. A clerk at a game parlor or the like can reliably know that the door is open.

In addition, the display including the setting confirmation display (in this example, the display of the character string "Settings confirmation") indicating that the setting values can be confirmed is displayed in a third display mode (in this example, in gray color). is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in a display mode in which a character string ``Settings Confirmation'' is placed in the upper left corner of the background image.

According to this example, when the door is opened while the settings are being checked, a notification sound indicating that the settings are being checked is not outputted, but a display indicating that the settings are being checked is displayed, so the clerk at the game parlor etc. can be informed by the display that the settings are being checked. can be reliably grasped visually.

In addition, in the slot machine 100, when the set value can be confirmed and the door body is in the open state (first case), a part of the notification means is used to notify that the door body is in the open state. Make a notification indicating.

The state shown in FIG. 30(e) is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the setting confirmation mode, so the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 flash in red, indicating that the front door 102 is in an open state. Make a notification (open notification) indicating the following.

According to this example, the light emitting means alerts the game store clerk that the door body is open while the settings are being checked (indicating that the settings are being checked or that there is a possibility of fraudulent activity, etc.). etc. can be reliably informed.

In addition, in the setting confirmation mode, since the opening notification by the effect button 192 is not performed, unlike the setting change mode, even if the front door 102 is in the open state, the operation check of the effect button 192 (presentation) is not performed. button check), and the production button 192 can also be operated as an operating means.

In addition, the slot machine 100 is in a state where the set value can be confirmed and the door body is in the open state (first case), or when the set value is in the state where the set value can be confirmed and the door body is in the open state and then closed. In either case (second case), a settings confirmation display indicating that the setting values can be confirmed (in this example, the string "Settings confirmation" is displayed) The third display mode (in this example, the text string "Checking settings" is placed in the upper left of the gray background image, and a settings screen (second settings screen) where various settings can be made is displayed). display mode) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

Specifically, in the setting confirmation mode of this example, a setting screen (second setting screen) on which various settings can be made is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. By operating the cross key 193 (operation means), a clerk at a game parlor can check the volume setting, setting change history (date and time, setting values at the time of setting change, etc.), errors, etc. on the setting screen (second setting screen). It is possible to arbitrarily select any of the following items: history (types of errors that occurred in the past, date and time of occurrence, etc.) and time settings.

According to this example, various settings can be made even when the door is open while the settings are being confirmed, so there is no need to temporarily close the door, and this improves the convenience of game store staff and others. Work efficiency can be increased.

Note that the items (second settings) that can be selected in the setting confirmation mode are not limited to this example, and may include, for example, light emitting means such as the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 in addition to (or instead of) the exemplified items. Checking the operation of the movable body, which will be described later with reference to FIG. , history of setting confirmation (date and time, setting values at the time of setting confirmation, etc.), operation check, and the like.

<Various notifications/setting confirmation mode (door open)/volume settings>
The state shown in FIG. 30(f) is a state in which the production button 192 is pressed with the volume setting item provisionally selected on the setting screen (second setting screen), and the volume setting screen is displayed. The state shown in FIG. 31(a) is a state in which an operation to increase the volume by one level has been performed in the volume setting.

In the volume setting of this example, it is possible to adjust the volume of the sound output from the sound output means such as the speakers 272 and 277. While the volume setting screen shown in FIG. 30(f) is displayed, pressing the right button of the cross key 193 (operation means) once will change the volume to the currently set volume (in this example, level 3). ) is raised by one level, and a volume meter indicating the adjusted volume level (level 4 in this example) is displayed as shown in FIG. 31(a).

In addition, in this example, the opening notification sound (sound saying "The door is open") continues to be output even while the volume is being set, but since the volume has been adjusted from level 3 to level 4 by the volume setting, The open notification sound is output from the speakers 272 and 277 at the adjusted level 4 volume.

Although not shown, if the left button of the cross key 193 (operation means) is pressed once while the volume setting screen shown in FIG. 30(e) is displayed, the currently set The volume (for example, level 3) is lowered by one level, and a volume meter indicating the adjusted volume level (for example, level 2) is displayed.

<Various notifications/setting confirmation mode (door open)/end of volume setting>
The state shown in FIG. 31(b) is a state in which the effect button 192 is pressed on the volume setting screen and the volume setting is completed.

In the same state, the volume is determined by pressing the production button 192 and the volume setting is completed, so while changing the volume setting screen to the setting screen (second setting screen), the opening notification sound ("The door is closed") is changed. "Opening" continues to be output.

<Various notification/setting confirmation modes (door open → door closed)>
The state shown in FIG. 31(c) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state while the setting key is kept on after shifting to the setting confirmation mode.

In the slot machine 100, when the set value can be confirmed and the door body changes from the open state to the closed state (second case), a notification sound indicating that the set value can be confirmed is emitted. Start outputting. In addition, if the set value can be checked and the door body changes from the open state to the closed state (second case), if the set value can be checked and the door body changes from the open state, Similarly to (the first case), a display including a display indicating that the set value can be confirmed is displayed in the third display mode.

The state shown in FIG. 31(c) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed in the setting confirmation mode, so the setting confirmation notification sound (in this example, " Confirming the settings!'' is repeatedly output from the speakers 272 and 277.

As explained using FIGS. 30(e) and 31(c), according to this example, when the door is open while the settings are being checked, the notification sound for the settings being checked is not output; When the door is closed, a notification sound is output when the settings are being checked, so the door open and closed states can be linked with the presence or absence of the notification sound when the settings are being checked. can be provided. In addition, when the door is open, a notification sound alerts the gaming parlor that the door is open while the settings are being checked (settings may be being checked or fraudulent activity may be occurring). It is possible to reliably notify the store clerk, etc., and when the door is closed, the notification sound can reliably notify the store clerk, etc. of the game parlor that the setting confirmation is not completed.

In addition, since this state is a state in which the front door 102 is closed in the setting confirmation mode, a setting confirmation display indicating that the setting values can be confirmed (in this example, "Setting confirmation in progress" is displayed) The display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a display including the character string ``Display of the character string ``in the third display mode (in this example, a display mode in which the character string ``Checking settings'' is placed in the upper left of the gray background image). to be displayed.

According to this example, when the door is closed while the settings are being confirmed, a notification sound indicating that the settings are being confirmed is output and a display indicating that the settings are being confirmed is displayed. This can be reliably grasped visually.

<Various notifications/setting confirmation mode (door closed)/error history display>
The state shown in FIG. 31(d) is when the production button 192 is pressed with the error history item provisionally selected on the setting screen (second setting screen), and the state shown in FIG. 31(e) is when the error history item is temporarily selected. The history display is displayed.

In the error history display of this example, it is possible to display history information indicating the past history regarding the gaming machine (in this example, the history of past errors that occurred in the slot machine 100). In the example shown in FIG. 31(e), it is confirmed by the error history display that a hopper error occurred at 10:38 on September 15th, and that a selector error occurred at 23:45 on September 22nd. is possible.

In addition, since the states shown in FIGS. 31(d) and 31(e) are both setting confirmation modes, even when the setting screen or error history display is displayed, the setting confirmation notification sound (in this example, "Settings "Checking!" continues to be output.

<Various notification/setting confirmation mode (front door open)/end of error history display>
The state shown in FIG. 31(f) is a state in which the effect button 192 is pressed during the error history display and the error history display has ended.

In the same state, since the error history display is ended by pressing the production button 192, the error history display is ended and the setting screen (second setting screen) is returned to.However, since it is in the setting confirmation mode, , continues outputting the setting confirmation notification sound (in this example, the sound saying "Settings are being confirmed!").

<Various notification/setting confirmation modes (door closed → door open)>
The state shown in FIG. 32(a) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state in the setting confirmation mode.

In this state, since the front door 102 is open in the setting confirmation mode, the opening notification sound (first sound) indicating that the door body is open. A voice saying "I'm opening" is repeatedly output from the speakers 272, 277, and the upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144 flash in red to notify that the front door 102 is open (open notification).

<Various notifications/setting confirmation mode (door open)/end of setting confirmation>
The state shown in FIG. 32(b) is a state in which a certain operation using the setting key is canceled (the setting key is removed after the setting key is turned from on to off) and the setting confirmation mode has ended.

In this state, the setting confirmation mode (a state where the setting values can be confirmed) has ended and the state has shifted to the normal gaming state where normal games can be played, so the setting screen (second setting screen) is exited and the demo screen is displayed. It is displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. Note that since the front door 102 is in the open state, the output of the open notification sound (sound saying "The door is open") continues.

<Various notifications/Normal game state (door open → door closed)>
The state shown in FIG. 32(c) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state after the setting confirmation mode ends and the normal gaming state is entered.

In this state, the front door 102 is not in the open state and is not in the setting confirmation mode, so the setting confirmation indication is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and the open notification sound and setting confirmation notification sound are output from the speakers 272 and 277. Also, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are not used to notify the opening.

<Various notifications/Normal gaming state (door closed → door open)>
The state shown in FIG. 32(d) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state in the normal gaming state.

When the slot machine 100 is in a state in which the set value can be confirmed and the door body is in the open state (first case), the slot machine 100 emits a notification sound indicating that the door body is in the open state as the first sound (in this example). If the door body changes from the closed state to the open state after the state in which the set value can be confirmed ends, the door body is in the open state. A notification sound indicating this is output as a second sound (in this example, a sound saying "The door is open").

The state shown in FIG. 32(d) is a state in which the setting confirmation mode (in which the setting values can be confirmed) has ended and the front door 102 is open in the normal gaming state, so the door body is in the open state. An open notification sound (second sound, in this example, the voice of person B saying "The door is open") is repeatedly output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144 flashes in red to notify that the front door 102 is open (open notification).

According to this example, when the door body changes from the closed state to the open state after the state where the set value can be confirmed ends, a second sound different from the first sound output when the set value can be confirmed is generated. Since the sound is outputted, it is possible to make the game store clerk or the like recognize again that the setting confirmation has been completed by changing the outputted sound. In addition, there is a risk of forgetting whether or not the settings have been confirmed after making various settings, but the second sound should remind the staff at the game parlor that the settings have been confirmed. Can be done.

<Various notifications/Normal gaming status (door open → door closed → medal insertion)>
The state shown in FIG. 32(e) is the state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state in the normal gaming state, and the state shown in FIG. 32(f) is the state in which the front door 102 is in the closed state and the medals are has been inserted.

In this example, in the normal game state, the front door 102 is closed and medals have been inserted, so the demo screen is ended, the normal game screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the normal game is started. has started.

As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values, and a setting means that can be opened and closed. A door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, a payout number display 127, a stored number display 125, speakers 272, 277, an upper lamp 142, and a side lamp 144). , reel backlight 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), and after turning on the power, a certain operation using a setting key (for example, switching from off to on) When the setting value is confirmed (e.g., setting confirmation mode), the notification means includes sound output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277), The sound output means is configured to output a sound when the setting value can be confirmed and the door body is in an open state (hereinafter referred to as "first case"; for example, in the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 30(e)). When the front door 102 is open), the sound output means does not output a notification sound indicating that the set value is in a confirmable state, and the sound output means is in the first case. When the door body changes from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter referred to as "second case"; for example, when the front door 102 is closed in the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 31(c)), Start (or be able to start) the output of a notification sound (for example, the voice of person A saying "Settings are being confirmed!" shown in FIG. 31(c)) indicating that the setting values can be confirmed. ) is a game machine characterized by the following.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, when the door is open while the settings are being checked, the notification sound indicating that the settings are being checked is not outputted, while when the door is being closed and the settings are being checked, the notification sound is output when the door is being checked. Therefore, the door open and door closed states and the presence or absence of the notification sound during setting confirmation can be linked, and a gaming machine with unique notification means can be provided. In addition, when the door is open, a notification sound alerts the gaming parlor that the door is open while the settings are being checked (settings may be being checked or fraudulent activity may be occurring). It is possible to reliably notify the store clerk, etc., and when the door is closed, the notification sound can reliably notify the store clerk, etc. of the game parlor that the setting confirmation is not completed.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values, and a door body that can be opened and closed ( For example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), and a certain operation using a setting key after the power is turned on (for example, an operation to turn on from off) is performed, the setting value is in a state where it can be confirmed (for example, setting confirmation mode), and the notification means is a means including sound output means (for example, speakers 272, 277), and the sound output When the set value can be confirmed and the door body is in an open state (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), for example, the front door 102 is in the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 30(e). is open), the sound output means does not output a notification sound indicating that the set value is in a checkable state, and the sound output means does not output a notification sound when the set value is in a checkable state When the door body changes from an open state to a closed state (for example, when the front door 102 is closed in the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 31(c)), the set value can be confirmed. means for starting (or capable of starting) the output of a notification sound (for example, the voice of person A saying "Settings are being checked!" as shown in FIG. 31(c)), and the sound output means , in the first case, means for outputting a first sound indicating that the door body is in an open state; , when the door body changes from a closed state to an open state after transitioning to a normal gaming state, the means may output a notification sound indicating that the door body is in an open state as a second sound. The game machine is characterized in that the first sound and the second sound are different sounds.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, when the door is open while the settings are being checked, the notification sound indicating that the settings are being checked is not outputted, while when the door is being closed and the settings are being checked, the notification sound is output when the door is being checked. Therefore, the door open and door closed states and the presence or absence of the notification sound during setting confirmation can be linked, and a gaming machine with unique notification means can be provided. In addition, when the door is open, a notification sound alerts the gaming parlor that the door is open while the settings are being checked (settings may be being checked or fraudulent activity may be occurring). It is possible to reliably notify the store clerk, etc., and when the door is closed, the notification sound can reliably notify the store clerk, etc. of the game parlor that the setting confirmation is not completed.

Also, what is the first sound that is output when the set value can be confirmed when the door body changes from the closed state to the open state after the state where the set value can be confirmed has ended and the state has transitioned to the normal gaming state? Since the release notification sound is output with a different second sound, the clerk at the game parlor can once again recognize that the setting confirmation has been completed by changing the output notification sound.

Further, in the first case, the sound output means may generate a notification sound indicating that the door body is in an open state (for example, the person A who says "The door is open" as shown in FIG. 30(e)) It may also be a means for outputting (audio).

With such a configuration, when the door is opened while the settings are being changed, the notification sound indicating that the door is open is output while the notification sound indicating that the setting is being changed is not output, making it possible to make the notification sound indicating that the door is open stand out. This allows the store clerk at the game parlor to surely know when the door is open.

Further, the notification means includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the display means, in the first case, displays ( For example, in the second case, the display means displays a display indicating that the setting value can be confirmed. It may also be a means for displaying an indication including.

With this configuration, when opening the door to confirm the settings, a notification sound indicating that the settings are being confirmed will not be output, but a display indicating that the settings are being confirmed will be displayed, allowing the store staff at the game parlor to confirm the settings through the display. can be reliably grasped visually.

Further, in the first case, the display means displays a display indicating that the setting values are in a confirmable state in a third display mode (for example, a message "Settings Confirming" is displayed in the upper left corner of a gray background image). (a display mode in which character strings are arranged), and the display means displays, in the second case, a display indicating that the set value is in a confirmable state in the third display mode. The third display mode may be a display mode including a setting screen on which various settings can be made.

With this configuration, various settings can be made even if the door is open while checking the settings, so there is no need to temporarily close the door, which is convenient for game store staff, etc. It can improve performance and work efficiency.

In addition, when the setting value is in a changeable state and the door body is in a closed state (hereinafter referred to as "third case", for example, the display means displays a setting change mode shown in FIG. 28(c)). (when the front door 102 is closed), a display indicating that the setting value can be changed is displayed in the second display mode (for example, in the upper left corner of the green background image shown in FIG. 28(c)). This is a means of displaying a setting screen (display mode that includes a setting screen (operation check setting screen)) that allows you to start an operation check, as well as placing a character string "Settings changing" in the corner. It is equipped with a certain executable performance means (for example, a speaker, an accessory (movable object), a performance button), and the certain performance means checks the operation from the front of the game machine (hereinafter referred to as "operation check"). ), and the second display mode is a display mode including a setting screen on which the operation check can be started, and the second display mode is a display mode including a setting screen on which the operation check can be started. Possible items (for example, operation checks such as speaker check, accessory check, performance button check, etc.) and items that can be set on the setting screen in the first case or the second case (for example, volume setting, setting (change history, error history, time setting, power saving mode setting) may be different.

With such a configuration, items that can be set when changing the settings and items that can be set when confirming the settings can be provided separately, thereby increasing the work efficiency and convenience of the staff at the game parlor.

Furthermore, the item that can be set on the setting screen in the third case may be the operation check.

With this configuration, operation checks can be performed for setting changes that are performed less frequently than setting confirmations, so the number of execution checks does not increase more than necessary, improving the work efficiency of game store staff, etc. can be increased.

In addition, the items that can be set on the setting screen in the first case or the second case include settings that are initialized when the setting value is changed (for example, volume setting, power saving mode). settings) may also be included.

With this configuration, settings can be made with the door body open or closed while checking the settings, so even if the settings are initialized when the setting value is changed, the door body can be set in the open or closed state. There is no need to take the trouble of temporarily closing the store, and it is possible to improve the convenience and work efficiency of game store employees and the like.

Further, in the first case, the sound output means outputs a notification sound indicating that the door body is in an open state (e.g., "The door is open" as shown in FIG. 30(e)). The sound output means is a means for outputting a sound (a voice of a person A saying "I'm going to do this"), and the sound output means is a means for outputting a sound after the state in which the set value can be confirmed has ended and the door body has changed from the closed state to the open state. In this case, a notification sound indicating that the door is open is output as a second sound (for example, the voice of person B saying "The door is open" as shown in FIG. 32(d)). The first sound and the second sound may be different sounds.

With such a configuration, when the door changes from the closed state to the open state after the set value can be confirmed, the first sound output when the set value can be confirmed is different from the first sound output when the set value can be confirmed. Since the second sound is output, it is possible to make the clerk at the game parlor or the like recognize again that the setting confirmation is complete by changing the output sound. In addition, there is a risk of forgetting whether or not the settings have been confirmed after making various settings, but the second sound should remind the staff at the game parlor that the settings have been confirmed. Can be done.

<Variation example 1 of various notifications/notification sounds>
Next, modification example 1 of the notification sound will be described using FIG. 33. FIGS. 33(a) to 33(e) are diagrams chronologically showing modification example 1 of various notifications from the end of the setting change in the setting change mode until the transition to the normal gaming state (demonstration screen). .

The state shown in FIG. 33(a) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened, the setting key is turned on from off, the power is turned on, and the setting change mode is entered. This is the same situation as described using b).

In this state, since the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, a setting change notification sound (for example, a sound saying "Settings are being changed!") indicating that the setting value can be changed is output. The opening notification sound (first sound) that indicates that the door body is in the open state without starting ” (repeated voice) is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The opening notification sound in this example is a pattern sound (repetitive sound) in which a sound (a certain sound) that says "The door is open" is repeatedly output, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may include a certain sound. For example, the sound (certain sound) that says "Please close the door" may be a sound that has a pattern that is repeatedly output ("Please close the door → Close the door"). Please→...→Please close the door"), or a sound pattern that repeatedly outputs "Pingpon (onomatopoeia)" ("Pingpon (onomatopoeia)→Pingpon (onomatopoeia)→...→Pingpon (onomatopoeia)" ) is also acceptable. It may also be a melody or a piece of music, or a sound consisting of audio and a combination of these, for example, "Please close the door → (melody) → Please close the door → (melody)..." Good too.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 33(b) is a state in which the setting value has been determined and the setting change has been completed, and is the same as the state described using FIG. 29(d).

In the same state, the setting value is fixed and the setting change is completed, so the setting change in progress display ends, and the setting change completion display (in this example, the yellow A screen with a character string "Settings change complete" placed in the center of the background image) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and since the front door 102 is open, an open notification sound ("The door is closed") is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. It continues to output the repeated voice (opening → door is opening →... → door is opening).

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 33(c) is a state in which a certain operation using the setting key has been canceled (the setting key is removed after the setting key is turned from on to off) and the setting change mode has ended. , is the same as the state described using FIG. 29(e).

The slot machine 100 is configured to output a certain sound from the beginning at the timing when a certain state (either a state where the set value can be changed or a state where the set value can be confirmed) ends. There is.

In the state shown in FIG. 33(c), the setting change mode (a state in which setting values can be changed) has ended and the state has shifted to the normal game state where normal games can be played, so the setting change completion display is ended and the demo screen is displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and an open notification sound (a repeating sound of "The door is open → The door is open → ... → The door is open") is output from the beginning. .

Here, ``outputting the open notification sound (a repeating sound of ``The door is open → The door is open → ... → The door is open'' from the beginning)'' means ``When the door is open.'' For example, if the settings change mode (in which settings can be changed) ends while outputting the sound "The door is open," for example, immediately after outputting the sound "The door is open," By restarting the opening notification sound, you can output the voice (a certain sound) saying "The door is open" from the beginning without outputting the remaining voice "I'm doing" that is not being output. means.

According to this example, by outputting a certain sound from the beginning (restarting), a certain state (either a state in which the setting value can be changed or a state in which the setting value can be confirmed) is achieved. It is possible to know when the game has ended, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the store staff at the game parlor.

Note that restarting a certain sound may be performed in any manner as long as it can reliably notify the user of the timing at which a setting change or setting confirmation has been completed. Therefore, for example, a certain sound may be played from the middle, and in this case, if the certain sound is a voice saying "The door is open," the playback may be restarted from the voice saying "The door is open." It's okay. In addition, the sound that was output at the timing when the setting change or setting confirmation was completed (for example, the sound of "to" for "door") after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) (for example, the sound for "open"). You may also restart from the sound "ka").

The state shown in FIG. 33(d) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state after the setting change mode ends and the normal gaming state is entered. This is the same situation as described.

In this state, the front door 102 is not in the open state and is not in the setting change mode, so the setting change indication is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and the open notification sound and setting change notification sound are output from the speakers 272 and 277. Also, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are not used to notify the opening.

The state shown in FIG. 33(e) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state after transitioning to the normal gaming state and playing at least one game. This is the same situation as described.

When the slot machine 100 is in a certain state (either a state where the set value can be changed or a state where the set value can be confirmed) and the door body is in the open state (first case), the door is closed. The first sound is the open notification sound that indicates that the body is in an open state (in this example, the repeated sound is "The door is open → The door is open →... → The door is open") After a certain state (either a state in which the set value can be changed or a state in which the set value can be confirmed) is completed, the state is changed to the normal game state, and at least one game has been played, the door is output. When the body changes from the closed state to the open state, an open notification sound is output as a second sound (in this example, a sound saying "The door is open").

In the state shown in FIG. 33(e), the front door 102 is opened after the setting change mode (a state in which setting values can be changed) has ended, the state has shifted to the normal gaming state, and at least one game has been played. From the speakers 272 and 277, an open notification sound (a second sound, in this example, a sound saying "The door is open") indicating that the door body is open is output, and the upper lamp is activated. 142, the side lamp 144 and the effect button 192 are blinked in red to notify that the front door 102 is open (open notification).

According to this example, after a certain state (either a state in which the setting value can be changed or a state in which the setting value can be confirmed) has ended, the state has shifted to the normal gaming state, and at least one game has been played. , when the door body changes from the closed state to the open state, it outputs a second sound that is different from the first sound output during a certain state, so a certain state is completed by changing the output sound. It is possible to make the clerk of the game parlor and the like recognize again that the player is playing the game. In addition, when performing various settings, there is a risk of forgetting whether or not the settings have been changed or confirmed. can be recognized again.

<Variation example 2 of various notifications/notification sounds>
Next, modification example 2 of the notification sound will be described using FIG. 34. FIGS. 34(a) to 34(e) are diagrams chronologically showing modification example 2 of various notifications from when the setting change is completed in the setting change mode until the transition to the normal gaming state (demonstration screen). .

<Various notifications/Notification sound modification example 2/Power on>
The state shown in FIG. 34(a) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened, the setting key is turned on from off, the power is turned on, and the setting change mode is entered. This is the same situation as described using a).

In this state, since it is in the setting change mode, the setting change notification sound (second sound) indicates that the setting value can be changed. A repeating voice saying "In progress → Settings are being changed" is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The settings change notification sound in this example is a sound pattern (repetitive sound) in which the sound (second sound) saying "Settings are being changed" is repeatedly output. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The sound may be a sound pattern that is not repeatedly output, or if the second sound is a pattern sound that is repeatedly output, for example, the voice "Changing settings" (second sound) may be It may be a sound pattern that is repeatedly output (sound such as "Changing settings → Changing settings → ... → Changing settings"), or a sound pattern that repeatedly outputs "Ping-Pong (onomatopoeia)" ("Ping-Pong (onomatopoeia)"). → Ping Pong (onomatopoeia) →…→ Ping Pong (onomatopoeia)"). Furthermore, it may be a melody or a song, or it may be a sound consisting of audio and a combination of these, for example, "Settings are being changed → (melody) → Settings are being changed → (melody)..." .

<Various notification/notification sound modification example 2/setting change completed>
The state shown in FIG. 34(b) is a state in which the setting value has been determined and the setting change has been completed, and is the same as the state described using FIG. 33(b).

In the same state, the setting value is fixed and the setting change is completed, so the setting change in progress display ends, and the setting change completion display (in this example, the yellow A screen with a character string "Settings change completed" placed in the center of the background image of the screen) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and a settings change completion notification sound ("Settings change completed → Settings change completed "The settings change has been completed" (repeated voice) continues to be output.

<Various notification/notification sound modification example 2/Exiting setting change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 34(c) is a state in which a certain operation using the setting key has been canceled (the setting key is removed from the keyhole after the setting key has been turned from on to off) and the setting change mode has ended. This is the same state as described using FIG. 33(c).

In the slot machine 100 of this example, when a certain operation using the setting key (in this example, an operation of turning the setting key from OFF to ON) is being performed (in the first case), a certain operation using the setting key is performed. When the operation is completed (in this example, the setting key is removed from the keyhole after being turned from on to off), the first sound (in this example, the release notification sound) is emitted first. It is configured to output from.

In the state shown in FIG. 34(c), after turning the setting key from on to off, the setting key is removed from the keyhole, the setting change mode (a state in which setting values can be changed) ends, and normal gaming is possible. Since the game has transitioned to the normal gaming state, the setting change completion display is terminated, a demo screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and an open notification sound (“The door is open→The door is not open. "The door is open" (repeated voice) is output from the beginning.

Here, ``outputting the open notification sound (a repeating sound of ``The door is open → The door is open → ... → The door is open'' from the beginning)'' means ``When the door is open.'' For example, if the settings change mode (in which settings can be changed) ends while outputting the sound "The door is open," for example, immediately after outputting the sound "The door is open," By restarting the opening notification sound, you can output the voice (a certain sound) saying "The door is open" from the beginning without outputting the remaining voice "I'm doing" that is not being output. means.

According to this example, the first sound is output from the beginning (restarted), indicating that a certain operation using the setting key has been completed (the setting value can be changed or the setting value can be confirmed). Therefore, it is possible to grasp that any one of the following states has ended, thereby increasing the convenience of store staff at game parlors and the like.

Note that the first sound may be restarted in any manner as long as it can reliably notify by sound the timing at which the setting change or setting confirmation has been completed. Therefore, for example, the first sound may be played from the middle. In this case, if the first sound is "The door is open", the first sound is played from "The door is open". You may start. In addition, the sound that was output at the timing when the setting change or setting confirmation was completed (for example, the sound of "to" for "door") after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) (for example, the sound for "open"). You may also restart from the sound "ka").

<Various notification/notification sound modification example 2/Transfer to normal gaming state, close door body>
The state shown in FIG. 34(d) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state after the setting change mode ends and the normal gaming state is entered. This is the same situation as described.

In this state, the front door 102 is not in the open state and is not in the setting change mode, so the setting change indication is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and the open notification sound and setting change notification sound are output from the speakers 272 and 277. Also, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are not used to notify the opening.

<Various notification/notification sound modification example 2/Opening the door body after completing the game in the normal game state>
The state shown in FIG. 34(e) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state after transitioning to the normal gaming state and playing at least one game.

The slot machine 100 of this example is in a certain state (either a state where the set value can be changed or a state where the set value can be confirmed) and the door body is in the open state (first case). is the first sound to indicate that the door body is open (in this example, "The door is open → The door is open →... → The door is open") (repeated voice) is output, a certain state (either a state in which the setting value can be changed or a state in which the setting value can be confirmed) has ended, the state has transitioned to the normal gaming state, and at least one game has been played. Later, when the door changes from the closed state to the open state, the system is configured to output an opening notification sound as a second sound (in this example, a sound saying "The door is open"). There is.

In the state shown in FIG. 34(e), the front door 102 is opened after the setting change mode (a state in which setting values can be changed) has ended, the state has shifted to the normal gaming state, and at least one game has been played. From the speakers 272 and 277, an open notification sound (a second sound, in this example, a sound saying "The door is open") indicating that the door body is open is output, and the upper lamp is activated. 142, the side lamp 144 and the effect button 192 are blinked in red to notify that the front door 102 is open (open notification).

According to this example, after a certain state (either a state in which the setting value can be changed or a state in which the setting value can be confirmed) has ended, the state has shifted to the normal gaming state, and at least one game has been played. , when the door body changes from the closed state to the open state, it outputs a second sound that is different from the first sound output during a certain state, so a certain state is completed by changing the output sound. It is possible to make the clerk of the game parlor and the like recognize again that the state has shifted to the normal gaming state. In addition, when performing various settings, there is a risk of forgetting whether or not the settings have been changed or confirmed. can be recognized again.

In this example, when a certain operation is being performed using a setting key, the second sound is a notification sound that indicates that the setting value can be changed (in this example, "Settings are being changed"). When a certain operation using the setting key is completed, the first sound is an opening notification sound (in this example, a sound that indicates that the door body is open) is output, indicating that the door body is in the open state. Although an example has been shown in which a voice saying "please close the door" is output, the present invention is not limited to this.

Therefore, for example, when a certain operation is being performed using a setting key, a second sound may be used to indicate that the setting value can be confirmed (for example, a voice saying "Settings are being checked"). ), and in connection with the completion of a certain operation using the setting key, the first sound is an open notification sound indicating that the door is in the open state (for example, "Please close the door"). audio) may also be output.

For example, when a certain operation is being performed using a setting key, a second sound may be used to indicate that the setting value can be changed (e.g., a voice saying "Settings are being changed"). ), and when a certain operation using a setting key is completed, the first sound is a notification sound indicating that the setting value change has been completed (for example, "Setting change has been completed"). (audio) may also be output.

For example, when a certain operation is being performed using a setting key, a second sound may be used to indicate that the setting value can be confirmed (for example, a voice saying "Settings are being checked"). ), and when a certain operation using a setting key is completed, the first sound is a notification sound indicating that the setting value confirmation has been completed (for example, "Setting confirmation has been completed"). (audio) may also be output.

For example, when a certain operation is being performed using a setting key, a second sound may be used to indicate that the setting value can be changed (in this example, "Settings are being changed"). When the setting value has been changed, a third sound will be output, indicating that the setting value has been changed (e.g., ``Setting change has been completed.''). After that, in connection with the completion of a certain operation using the setting key, the first sound is an opening notification sound (for example, "Door is open") indicating that the door is in the open state. ``Please close the door'' may be output. That is, after outputting the second sound, the third sound may be output, and then the first sound may be output.

In addition, at least some of the periods in which the first sound, second sound, and third sound are output overlap, or the first sound, second sound, and third sound It is also possible to output multiple sounds at the same time. For example, by outputting one of the setting value change notification sound and the release notification sound first, and outputting the other with a delay, the setting value change notification sound can be output. and the release notification sound may be outputted in a superimposed manner, or the setting value change notification sound and the release notification sound may be output simultaneously.

<Variation example 3 of various notifications/notification sounds>
Next, modification example 3 of the notification sound will be described using FIG. 35. FIGS. 35(a) to 35(e) are diagrams chronologically showing modification example 3 of various notifications from when the hopper error is resolved until the normal gaming state (demonstration screen) is entered.

<Various notification/Notification sound modification example 3/Error occurrence>
The state shown in FIG. 35(a) is a state in which a hopper error has occurred.

In the same state, since a hopper error has occurred, an error display (in this example, "Hopper In addition to displaying the character string "Error, please call the staff", a hopper error notification sound (second sound) that prompts you to resolve the hopper error is displayed. In this example, "Please call the staff → Please call the staff →...→ "Please call an attendant" is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

<Various notification/notification sound modification example 3/Connection abnormality resolved>
The state shown in FIG. 35(b) is a state in which the connection abnormality due to the hopper error has been resolved.

In the same state, since the connection abnormality caused by the hopper error has been resolved and the front door 102 is open, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 will display a message indicating that the front door 102 is open, instead of displaying an error message. (In this example, the text string "Please close the door.") is displayed, and the opening notification sound (first sound) is displayed instead of the hopper error notification sound (second sound). In this case, the speakers 272 and 277 output a repeating voice "The door is open → The door is open → ... → The door is open."

<Various notification/notification sound modification example 3/Setting change mode ends>
The state shown in FIG. 35(c) is a state in which a certain operation using the setting key is canceled (the setting key is turned back from on to off) and the setting change mode has ended.

In the slot machine 100, when a certain operation using the setting key is being performed (in this example, an operation of turning the setting key from OFF to ON) (in the first case), the certain operation using the setting key ends. The configuration is such that the first sound is output from the beginning in response to a change (in this example, an operation of turning the setting key back from on to off).

In the state shown in FIG. 35(c), the setting key is turned from on to off again, the setting change mode (a state in which setting values can be changed) ends, and the state shifts to a normal game state in which normal games can be played. Therefore, the setting change completion display is terminated, a demo screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and an opening notification sound ("The door is open → The door is open →... → The door is open ” (repeated voice) is output from the beginning.

Here, ``outputting the open notification sound (a repeating sound of ``The door is open → The door is open → ... → The door is open'' from the beginning)'' means ``When the door is open.'' For example, if the settings change mode (in which settings can be changed) ends while outputting the sound "The door is open," for example, immediately after outputting the sound "The door is open," By restarting the opening notification sound, you can output the voice (a certain sound) saying "The door is open" from the beginning without outputting the remaining voice "I'm doing" that is not being output. means.

According to this example, the first sound is output from the beginning (restarted), indicating that a certain operation using the setting key has been completed (the setting value can be changed or the setting value can be confirmed). Therefore, it is possible to grasp that any one of the following states has ended, thereby increasing the convenience of store staff at game parlors and the like.

<Various notification/notification sound modification example 3/Transfer to normal gaming state, close door body>
The state shown in FIG. 35(d) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state after the setting change mode ends and the normal gaming state is entered. This is the same situation as described.

In this state, the front door 102 is not in the open state and is not in the setting change mode, so the setting change indication is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and the open notification sound and setting change notification sound are output from the speakers 272 and 277. Also, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are not used to notify the opening.

<Variation example 3 of various notifications/notification sounds/Opening the door body after completing the game in the normal game state>
The state shown in FIG. 35(e) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state after transitioning to the normal gaming state and playing at least one game. This is the same situation as described.

The slot machine 100 of this example is in a certain state (either a state where the set value can be changed or a state where the set value can be confirmed) and the door body is in the open state (first case). is the first sound to indicate that the door body is open (in this example, "The door is open → The door is open →... → The door is open") (repeated voice) is output, a certain state (either a state in which the setting value can be changed or a state in which the setting value can be confirmed) has ended, the state has transitioned to the normal gaming state, and at least one game has been played. Later, when the door changes from the closed state to the open state, the system is configured to output an opening notification sound as a second sound (in this example, a sound saying "The door is open"). There is.

In the state shown in FIG. 35(e), the front door 102 is opened after the setting change mode (a state in which setting values can be changed) has ended, the state has shifted to the normal gaming state, and at least one game has been played. From the speakers 272 and 277, an open notification sound (a second sound, in this example, a sound saying "The door is open") indicating that the door body is open is output, and the upper lamp is activated. 142, the side lamp 144 and the effect button 192 are blinked in red to notify that the front door 102 is open (open notification).

According to this example, after a certain state (either a state in which the setting value can be changed or a state in which the setting value can be confirmed) has ended, the state has shifted to the normal gaming state, and at least one game has been played. , when the door body changes from the closed state to the open state, it outputs a second sound that is different from the first sound output during a certain state, so a certain state is completed by changing the output sound. It is possible to make the clerk of the game parlor and the like recognize again that the player is playing the game. In addition, when performing various settings, there is a risk of forgetting whether or not the settings have been changed or confirmed. can be recognized again.

In this example, when a certain operation is being performed using a setting key, the second sound is an error notification sound that is output in connection with an error (in this example, the message "Please call the staff member") is output. When a certain operation using a setting key is completed, the first sound is an opening notification sound (in this example, a sound indicating that the door is open) is output. Although an example has been shown in which a voice saying "I'm here" is output, the present invention is not limited to this.

Therefore, for example, when a certain operation is being performed using a setting key, an error notification sound related to the error (for example, a voice saying "Please call the staff") is output as the second sound. Then, in connection with the completion of a certain operation using a setting key, the first sound is a notification sound that is output in connection with the resolution of the error (for example, a voice saying "The error has been resolved"). It's okay.

Also, for example, when a certain operation is being performed using a setting key, an error notification sound related to the error (for example, a sound saying "Please call the staff") is output as a second sound. However, in connection with the resolution of the error, a notification sound that is output in connection with the resolution of the error (for example, a voice saying "The error has been resolved") may be output as the first sound.

Also, for example, when a certain operation is being performed using a setting key, an error notification sound related to the error (for example, a sound saying "Please call the staff") is output as a second sound. Then, in connection with the elimination of the error, a notification sound (for example, a voice saying "The error has been resolved") that is output in connection with the elimination of the error is output as a third sound, and then, In connection with the completion of a certain operation using a setting key, the first sound is an opening notification sound that indicates that the door is in an open state (in this example, the sound that says "The door is open") may be output. That is, after outputting the second sound, the third sound may be output, and then the first sound may be output.

In addition, at least some of the periods in which the first sound, second sound, and third sound are output overlap, or the first sound, second sound, and third sound It is also possible to output multiple sounds at the same time. For example, by outputting one of the error notification sound and the release notification sound first, and outputting the other with a delay, the error notification sound and the release notification sound can be output at the same time. Alternatively, the error notification sound and the release notification sound may be output simultaneously.

As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values, and a setting means that can be opened and closed. A game machine comprising a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) and a sound output means (for example, speakers 272, 277), the sound output means being configured to This means is capable of outputting a certain sound (hereinafter referred to as the "first sound"; for example, a voice saying "please close the door") during a certain period, and the certain state means that the door body is opened. In the certain state, a certain operation using a setting key (for example, an operation to turn on from off) is performed (for example, a state in which a setting value can be changed, or a state in which the set value can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), and in the first case, the sound output means (For example, the setting key is removed from the keyhole after being turned from on to off, or the setting key is turned from on to off.) The game machine is characterized in that the game machine is a means for outputting the first sound from the beginning.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the first sound is output from the beginning (restarted), so that when a certain operation is performed using the setting key with the door in the open state, It is possible to know when a certain operation using a setting key has been completed, and it is possible to improve the convenience of a clerk at a game parlor and the like.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values, and a door body that can be opened and closed ( For example, it is a game machine that includes a front door 102 shown in FIG. It is a means capable of outputting a certain sound (hereinafter referred to as "first sound"; for example, a voice saying "Please close the door"), and the certain state means that the door body is open. The sound output means is a means for outputting the first sound during a period in which a setting value in the certain state can be changed (for example, a setting change mode), There is a case (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") in which a certain operation (for example, an operation from off to on) is being performed using a setting key, and the sound output means is In this case, the certain operation using the setting key is completed (for example, the setting key is removed from the keyhole after turning the setting key from on to off, or the setting key is turned from on to off. The game machine is a means for outputting the first sound from the beginning in relation to the action (played).

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the first sound is output from the beginning (restarted), so that the set value can be changed, and when the door is open and the setting key is pressed. In a state where a certain operation is being performed, it is possible to know that a certain operation using a setting key has been completed, and convenience for a store clerk at a game parlor or the like can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values, and a door body that can be opened and closed ( For example, it is a game machine that includes a front door 102 shown in FIG. It is a means capable of outputting a certain sound (hereinafter referred to as "first sound"; for example, a voice saying "Please close the door"), and the certain state means that the door body is open. The sound output means is a means for outputting the first sound during a period in which setting values in the certain state can be confirmed (for example, a setting confirmation mode), There is a case (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") in which a certain operation (for example, an operation from off to on) is being performed using a setting key, and the sound output means is In this case, the certain operation using the setting key is completed (for example, the setting key is removed from the keyhole after turning the setting key from on to off, or the setting key is turned from on to off. The game machine is a means for outputting the first sound from the beginning in relation to the action (played).

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the first sound is output from the beginning (restarted), so that the setting value can be confirmed and the setting key is pressed when the door body is open. In a state where a certain operation is being performed, it is possible to know that a certain operation using a setting key has been completed, and convenience for a store clerk at a game parlor or the like can be improved.

Note that the first sound is a sound in a pattern in which the first sound is repeatedly output (for example, a repeated voice saying "Please close the door → Please close the door → ... → Please close the door") It may be.

With such a configuration, the first sound of the pattern that is repeatedly output is output from the beginning (restarted), thereby indicating that a certain operation using the setting key is being performed with the door in the open state. In this state, it is possible to know that a certain operation using a setting key has been completed, and convenience for a clerk at a game parlor or the like can be improved.

Further, the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a second sound (for example, a sound saying "Settings are being changed" or a sound saying "Please call an attendant") in the first case, and The first sound and the second sound may be different sounds.

With such a configuration, the second sound, which is different from the first sound, makes it possible to understand that the door body is in the open state and a certain operation is being performed using the setting key, and the game Convenience for store staff, etc. can be improved.

The second sound may be a sound pattern in which the second sound is repeatedly output (for example, a repeated sound such as "Settings are being changed → Settings are being changed → ... → Settings are being changed"), or "Attendant Please call → Please call the staff member → ... → Please call the staff member." (repeated voice) may be used.

With such a configuration, the second sound of the pattern that is repeatedly output allows the player to know that the door is open and a certain operation is being performed using the setting key. It is possible to improve the convenience of store clerks, etc.

Further, the sound output means may be a means capable of outputting the first sound in the first case.

With such a configuration, it is possible to understand from the first sound that the door body is in the open state and a certain operation is being performed using the setting key, and it is convenient for the staff at the game parlor. can be increased.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values, and a door body that can be opened and closed ( For example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), in a state where a certain operation (for example, turning on from off) is performed using a setting key. When the power is turned on, the setting value becomes changeable (for example, setting change mode), and after the power is turned on, the certain operation (for example, turning on from off) using the setting key is performed. If the setting value is confirmed (e.g., setting confirmation mode), the notification means includes sound output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277), and the sound output means is a certain state and the door body is in an open state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case". For example, when the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 33(a) ), which starts outputting an opening notification sound (for example, the voice of person A saying "the door is open" as shown in FIG. 33(a)) indicating that the door is in an open state. (or a means that can be started), the certain state is either a state in which the setting value can be changed or a state in which the setting value can be confirmed, and the opening notification sound is a certain state. A sound (e.g., "The door is open") is output in a pattern (e.g., "Please close the door → Please close the door → ... → Please close the door"). and the sound output means outputs (or is capable of outputting) the certain sound from the beginning at the timing when the certain state ends (for example, the timing when the setting key is pulled out as shown in FIG. 33(c)). This is a game machine characterized by the following:

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, by outputting a certain sound from the beginning (restarting), a certain state (a state in which the setting value can be changed or a state in which the setting value can be confirmed) can be changed. It is possible to know when any one of the states) has ended, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the store staff at the game parlor.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values, and a door body that can be opened and closed ( For example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), in a state where a certain operation (for example, turning on from off) is performed using a setting key. When the power is turned on, the set value is in a state where it can be changed (for example, a setting change mode), and after the power is turned on, the certain operation by the setting key (for example, an operation from off to on) is performed. ) is performed, the setting value is in a state where it can be confirmed (e.g., setting confirmation mode), and the notification means is means including sound output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277). The output means is configured to cause the door body to open when the door body is in an open state in a certain state (for example, when the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 33(a)). It is a means for starting (or a means capable of starting) the output of an open notification sound (for example, the voice of person A saying "The door is open" as shown in FIG. 33(a)) indicating that the door is open. ), the certain state is either a state in which the setting value can be changed or a state in which the setting value can be confirmed, and the opening notification sound is a certain sound (for example, "Door is open"). This is a sound pattern that is repeatedly output (e.g., the sound "Please close the door→Please close the door→...→Please close the door"), and the sound output means is , means for outputting (or being able to output) the certain sound from the beginning at the timing when the certain state ends, and the timing at which the certain state ends is a state in which the setting value can be changed. In this gaming machine, the timing is the timing at which the certain operation using the setting key is completed after the setting value is changed.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, by outputting a certain sound from the beginning (restarting), it is possible to understand that the state in which the setting value can be changed has ended, and the game machine Convenience for store staff, etc. can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values, and a door body that can be opened and closed ( For example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), in a state where a certain operation (for example, turning on from off) is performed using a setting key. When the power is turned on, the set value is in a state where it can be changed (for example, a setting change mode), and after the power is turned on, the certain operation by the setting key (for example, an operation from off to on) is performed. ) is performed, the setting value is in a state where it can be confirmed (e.g., setting confirmation mode), and the notification means is means including sound output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277). The output means is configured to cause the door body to open when the door body is in an open state in a certain state (for example, when the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 33(a)). It is a means for starting (or a means capable of starting) the output of an open notification sound (for example, the voice of person A saying "The door is open" as shown in FIG. 33(a)) indicating that the door is open. ), the certain state is either a state in which the setting value can be changed or a state in which the setting value can be confirmed, and the opening notification sound is a certain sound (for example, "Door is open"). This is a sound pattern that is repeatedly output (e.g., the sound "Please close the door→Please close the door→...→Please close the door"), and the sound output means is , means for outputting (or being able to output) the certain sound from the beginning at the timing when the certain state ends, and the timing at which the certain state ends is a state in which the setting value can be confirmed. This is a game machine characterized in that the timing is when the certain operation using the setting key is finished while the setting value is being displayed.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, by outputting a certain sound from the beginning (restarting), it is possible to understand that the state in which the set value is not confirmed has ended, and the clerk at the game store It is possible to improve the convenience of

Further, the notification means includes a display means (e.g., liquid crystal display device 157), and the sound output means, in the first case, outputs a notification sound (e.g., The display means is a means for not outputting a voice saying "Checking the settings!" or a sound saying "Checking the settings!", and the display means displays a display indicating that the certain state is in the first case. (For example, a display including a character string "Changing settings" or a character string "Checking settings") may be used.

With such a configuration, when the door is opened in a certain state, a notification sound indicating the certain state is not outputted, but a display indicating that the certain state is present is displayed, so that it is easy for the clerk of the game parlor etc. It is possible to visually and reliably grasp that the device is in a certain state (either a state in which the setting value can be changed or a state in which the setting value can be confirmed) by the display.

Further, the sound output means is a means for outputting the opening notification sound as a first sound (for example, the voice of person A saying "the door is open") in the first case, and The output means is configured to convert the open notification sound into a second sound (for example, "The door is open") when the door changes from the closed state to the open state after the certain state ends. The first sound and the second sound may be different sounds.

With this configuration, if the door body changes from the closed state to the open state after a certain state (either a state where the set value can be changed or a state where the set value can be confirmed) In order to output a second sound that is different from the first sound that is output during a certain state, it is necessary to remind the staff at the game parlor that a certain state has been completed by changing the output sound. , can be recognized. In addition, when performing various settings, there is a risk of forgetting whether or not the settings have been changed or confirmed. can be recognized again.

Further, when the set value is changeable and the door body is in the closed state, the first setting screen (for example, the operation check shown in FIG. 28(c)) where the first setting can be set is displayed. If the display of the first setting screen (including the setting screen) is started and the setting value is changeable and the door body is open, the first setting screen does not start to be displayed and the setting value is changed. can be confirmed and the door body is in the closed state or/and open state, a second setting screen where the second settings can be made (for example, the volume setting etc. shown in FIG. 30(e)) is displayed. The first setting and the second setting may be at least partially different settings.

With such a configuration, items that can be set when changing the settings and items that can be set when confirming the settings can be provided separately, thereby increasing the work efficiency and convenience of the staff at the game parlor.

In addition, the above-mentioned "timing when a certain state ends" means "timing when the certain operation using the setting key ends after changing the setting value" in the state where the setting value can be changed. In the state where the setting value can be confirmed, the timing may be "the timing when the certain operation using the setting key is completed while the setting value is displayed."

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values, and a door body that can be opened and closed ( For example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), in a state where a certain operation (for example, turning on from off) is performed using a setting key. When the power is turned on, the setting value becomes changeable (for example, setting change mode), and after the power is turned on, the certain operation (for example, turning on from off) using the setting key is performed. If the setting value is changed, the setting value becomes a state in which it can be confirmed (e.g., setting confirmation mode), and in the state where the setting value can be changed, the first setting (one or more) (e.g., speaker check, When the setting value can be confirmed, the second setting (for example, volume setting, setting change history, error history, time setting, The notification means includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the setting value is changeable and the door body is in an open state. In this case (for example, when the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 28(b)), the display means does not display the display related to the first setting, and the display means does not display the display related to the first setting. cannot be set, the set value is changeable, and the door body is closed (for example, when the front door 102 is closed in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 28(c) ), the display means is capable of displaying a display related to the first setting (for example, a setting screen including an operation check screen shown in FIG. 28(c)), and is capable of setting the first setting; In the state where the setting value can be confirmed, regardless of whether the door body is in the closed state or the open state (for example, the front door 102 is open in the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 30(e) (or when the front door 102 is closed in the setting confirmation mode as shown in FIG. 31(c)), the display means displays the second setting (for example, the volume setting shown in FIG. 30(e)). The gaming machine is characterized in that it can display a setting screen that allows the user to set the second setting, etc.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, changing the settings is an important task that does not allow for mistakes compared to checking the settings, but if the door body is in the open state when changing the settings, the first setting cannot be executed. By making this possible, it is possible to prevent setting errors when changing settings. Also, when the door body is in the closed state, the operating means inside the housing (setting keys, setting switches, etc.) cannot be operated, so when changing settings, the first setting is executed only when the door body is in the closed state. By making this possible, it is possible to prevent mistakes such as erroneously changing settings during the first setting. In addition, while checking the settings, settings can be made with the door body open or closed, so there is no need to temporarily close the door body, which increases the convenience and work efficiency of game store staff. can be increased.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values, and a door body that can be opened and closed ( For example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), in a state where a certain operation (for example, turning on from off) is performed using a setting key. When the power is turned on, the set value is in a state where it can be changed (for example, a setting change mode), and after the power is turned on, the certain operation by the setting key (for example, an operation from off to on) is performed. ), the setting value is in a state where it can be confirmed (for example, setting confirmation mode), and in the state where the setting value can be changed, the first setting (for example, one or more) check, accessory check, production button check), and in a state where the setting values can be confirmed, the second setting (for example, volume setting, setting change history, error history, time setting, power saving mode setting), and the notification means includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the setting value is changeable, and the door body is in an open state (for example, when the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 28(b)), the display means does not display the display related to the first setting, and If one setting cannot be executed, the set value is changeable, and the door body is closed (for example, the front door 102 is closed in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 28(c)). when the display means is capable of displaying a display related to the first setting (for example, a setting screen including an operation check screen shown in FIG. 28(c)), and when the first setting is executed. is possible, and in a state where the set value can be confirmed, the front door 102 is opened in the setting confirmation mode as shown in FIG. (or when the front door 102 is closed in the setting confirmation mode as shown in FIG. 31(c)), the display means displays a display regarding the second setting (for example, as shown in FIG. 30(e), the second setting can be set; the notification means includes an operation means (for example, a production button 192); The setting is a setting that can be executed by operating the operating means, the second setting is a setting that can be executed by operating the operating means, and the operating means is a setting that can be executed by operating the operating means. When the door body is in the open state, the means functions as the notification means capable of issuing an open notification indicating that the door body is in the open state, and the operation means performs an operation based on a certain operation pattern. executable means, the first setting includes checking the operation of the operating means (for example, checking for vibration or light emission), and the operating means is in a state where the set value is changeable. The game machine is characterized in that when the door body is in an open state, no operation is accepted.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, changing the settings is an important task that does not allow for mistakes compared to checking the settings, but if the door body is in the open state when changing the settings, the first setting cannot be executed. By making this possible, it is possible to prevent setting errors when changing settings. Also, when the door body is in the closed state, the operating means inside the housing (setting keys, setting switches, etc.) cannot be operated, so when changing settings, the first setting is executed only when the door body is in the closed state. By making this possible, it is possible to prevent mistakes such as erroneously changing settings during the first setting. In addition, while checking the settings, settings can be made with the door body open or closed, so there is no need to temporarily close the door body, which increases the convenience and work efficiency of game store staff. can be increased. Further, since the operation check of the operating means is included in the first setting, it cannot be performed when the door body is in the open state in the setting change, and the operating means can function as a notification means.

Note that the "first setting" and "second setting" according to the present invention are not limited to the exemplified settings, but include the light intensity setting of the light emitting means such as the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144, and the history of past setting confirmations. (date and time, setting values at the time of setting confirmation, etc.), history of past jackpots, etc.

Further, the first setting and the second setting may be at least partially different settings.

With such a configuration, the first setting that can be set when changing the settings and the second setting that can be set when confirming the settings can be individually set, which increases the work efficiency and convenience of the staff at the game parlor. be able to. Note that at least a portion of the first settings and at least a portion of the second settings may be configured to be interchangeable, for example, among the first settings, the most frequently used settings may be replaced with the second settings. It may also be possible to move it to the settings.

Further, the notification means is a means that includes an operation means (for example, a production button 192), the first setting is a setting that can be executed by an operation using the operation means, and the second setting is a setting that can be executed by an operation using the operation means. The setting is executable by an operation by an operating means, and the operating means is the notification means capable of issuing an open notification indicating that the door is in the open state when the door is in the open state. The operation means is a means capable of executing an operation based on a certain operation pattern, and the first setting includes a check of the operation of the operation means (for example, vibration or light emission). check), and when the door body is in the open state, the operation of the operating means may be disabled.

With such a configuration, since the operation check of the operating means is included in the first setting, it is impossible to change the setting when the door body is in the open state, and it is not possible to make the operating means function as a notification means. Can be done.

Further, it is provided with a certain presentation means (for example, a speaker, an accessory (movable body), a presentation button) capable of executing an action based on a certain action pattern, and the presentation means is a means that includes the operation means, The certain performance means is a performance means arranged at a position where the operation can be checked from the front of the game machine (hereinafter referred to as "operation check"), and the first setting includes the operation It may also include a check.

With this configuration, it is possible to perform an operation check when changing settings, which is more important than checking settings, and also execute the first setting if the door body is in the open state when changing settings. By making it impossible, it is possible to prevent the operation check from being executed in the open state.

In addition, the second settings include history information indicating the past history regarding the gaming machine (for example, a history of setting changes (a history of setting values changed due to a setting change), an error history (a history of errors that occurred in the past), )) and settings related to power saving mode may be included.

With such a configuration, convenience in setting confirmation can be improved.

Further, the second settings may include settings that are not initialized (settings that are not reset to initial values) when the setting values are changed.

With such a configuration, convenience in setting confirmation can be improved.

Further, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) is a game machine equipped with a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values. If the power is turned on with a certain operation performed using the setting key, the setting value becomes changeable (for example, setting change mode), and after the power is turned on, the setting value becomes changeable. When the certain operation is performed, the setting value is in a state where it can be confirmed (for example, setting confirmation mode), and in the state where the setting value can be changed, the (one or more) first setting ( For example, speaker check, accessory check, performance button check) can be set, and when the setting values can be confirmed, the second setting (for example, volume setting, setting change history, error history, time setting, power saving mode setting), and the first setting and the second setting are at least partially different settings.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the first setting that can be set when changing the settings and the second setting that can be set when checking the settings can be individually provided, which improves the work efficiency and convenience of the staff at the game parlor. You can increase your sexuality.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that can be opened and closed, and a notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display). device 157, payout number display 127, stored number display 125, speakers 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), A game machine is equipped with a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values, and when the power is turned on while a certain operation is performed using the setting key, the above-mentioned If the set value is in a state where it can be changed (e.g., setting change mode) and the certain operation using the setting key is performed after the power is turned on, the set value is in a state where it can be confirmed (e.g., When the setting value is changeable (setting confirmation mode), it is possible to execute (one or more) first settings (for example, speaker check, accessory check, performance button check), and the setting value is changeable. In the state where it can be confirmed, it is possible to execute (one or more) second settings (for example, volume settings, setting change history, error history, time settings, and power saving mode settings), and the settings are different from the first settings. The second setting is a setting that is at least partially different, the notification means is a means that includes an operation means (for example, a production button 192), and the first setting is executed by an operation using the operation means. The second setting is a setting that can be executed by an operation by the operating means, and the operating means is configured to set the door body in the open state when the door body is in the open state. The first setting is a means that functions as the notification means that can execute an open notification indicating that the The method includes checking the operation of the means (for example, checking vibration or light emission), and the operating means does not accept an operation when the set value is in a changeable state and the door body is in an open state. This game machine is characterized by:

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the first setting that can be set when changing the settings and the second setting that can be set when checking the settings can be individually provided, which improves the work efficiency and convenience of the staff at the game parlor. You can increase your sexuality. Further, since the operation check of the operating means is included in the first setting, it cannot be performed when the door body is in the open state in the setting change, and the operating means can function as a notification means.

Further, it is provided with a certain presentation means (for example, a speaker, an accessory (movable body), a presentation button) capable of executing an action based on a certain action pattern, and the certain presentation means is configured to move the game machine from the front of the game machine. It is a presentation means arranged at a position where a motion check (hereinafter referred to as "motion check") is possible, and the first setting may include the motion check.

With this configuration, it is possible to perform an operation check when changing settings, which is more important than checking settings, and also execute the first setting if the door body is in the open state when changing settings. By making it impossible, it is possible to prevent the operation check from being executed in the open state.

Further, it is provided with a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that can be opened and closed, and the notification means is a means that includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the setting value is in a state where the setting value can be changed. and when the door body is in an open state (for example, when the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 28(b)), the display means displays a display regarding the first setting. If the first setting is not displayed, the first setting cannot be set, the setting value is changeable, and the door body is in the closed state (for example, in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 28(c)) (when the front door 102 is closed), the display means can display a display regarding the first setting, the first setting can be set, and the setting value can be confirmed, Regardless of whether the door body is in the closed state or the open state (for example, when the front door 102 is open in the setting confirmation mode as shown in FIG. 30(e), or as shown in FIG. 31(c) , when the front door 102 is closed in the setting confirmation mode), the display means can display a display related to the second setting, and the second setting may be settable.

With such a configuration, changing the settings is a more important task than checking the settings, where mistakes cannot be tolerated, but if the door body is in an open state during the setting change, the first setting becomes impossible. This makes it possible to prevent setting errors when changing settings. Also, when the door body is in the closed state, the operating means inside the housing (setting keys, setting switches, etc.) cannot be operated, so when changing settings, the first setting is executed only when the door body is in the closed state. By making this possible, it is possible to prevent mistakes such as erroneously changing settings during the first setting. In addition, while checking the settings, settings can be made with the door body open or closed, so there is no need to temporarily close the door body, which increases the convenience and work efficiency of game store staff. can be increased.

Further, it is provided with a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that can be opened and closed, and the notification means is a means that includes an operation means (for example, a production button 192), and the first setting is a means for controlling the operation. The second setting is a setting that can be executed by an operation by the operating means, and the operating means is a setting that can be executed by an operation by the operating means, and the operating means is a setting that can be executed by an operation by the operating means. means functioning as the notification means capable of issuing an open notification indicating that the is in the open state; the operating means is means capable of executing an operation based on a certain operation pattern; The setting includes checking the operation of the operating means (for example, checking vibration or light emission), and even if the operation of the operating means is invalid when the door body is in the open state. good.

With such a configuration, since the operation check of the operating means is included in the first setting, it is impossible to change the setting when the door body is in the open state, and it is not possible to make the operating means function as a notification means. Can be done.

Further, it is provided with a certain presentation means (for example, a speaker, an accessory (movable body), a presentation button) capable of executing an action based on a certain action pattern, and the presentation means is a means that includes the operation means, The certain performance means is a performance means arranged at a position where the operation can be checked from the front of the game machine (hereinafter referred to as "operation check"), and the first setting includes the operation It may also include a check.

With this configuration, it is possible to perform an operation check when changing settings, which is more important than checking settings, and also execute the first setting if the door body is in the open state when changing settings. By making it impossible, it is possible to prevent the operation check from being executed in the open state.

Further, the second setting includes either confirmation of history information indicating past history regarding the gaming machine (for example, setting change history, error history), and settings regarding a power saving mode. Good too.

With such a configuration, convenience in setting confirmation can be improved.

Further, the second settings may include settings that are not initialized when the setting values are changed.

With such a configuration, convenience in setting confirmation can be improved.

Further, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) is a game machine equipped with a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values. If the power is turned on with a certain operation performed using the setting key, the setting value becomes changeable (for example, setting change mode), and after the power is turned on, the setting value becomes changeable. When the certain operation is performed, the setting value is in a state where it can be confirmed (for example, setting confirmation mode), and in the state where the setting value can be changed, the (one or more) first setting ( For example, speaker check, accessory check, performance button check) can be set, and when the setting values can be confirmed, the second setting (for example, volume setting, setting change history, error history, time setting, power saving mode setting), the first setting and the second setting are at least partially different settings, and the second setting includes the power saving mode. The game machine is characterized in that it includes at least settings related to the game machine.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the first setting that can be set when changing the settings and the second setting that can be set when checking the settings can be individually provided, which improves the work efficiency and convenience of the staff at the game parlor. You can increase your sexuality.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that can be opened and closed, and a notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display). device 157, payout number display 127, stored number display 125, speakers 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), A game machine is equipped with a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values, and when the power is turned on while a certain operation is performed using the setting key, the above-mentioned If the set value is in a state where it can be changed (e.g., setting change mode) and the certain operation using the setting key is performed after the power is turned on, the set value is in a state where it can be confirmed (e.g., When the setting value is changeable (setting confirmation mode), it is possible to execute (one or more) first settings (for example, speaker check, accessory check, performance button check), and the setting value is changeable. In the state where it can be confirmed, it is possible to execute (one or more) second settings (for example, volume settings, setting change history, error history, time settings, and power saving mode settings), and the settings are different from the first settings. The second setting is a different setting at least in part, the second setting includes at least a setting related to a power saving mode, and the notification means includes an operation means (for example, a production button 192). means, the first setting is a setting executable by an operation by the operating means, the second setting is a setting executable by an operation by the operating means, and the operating means is a setting executable by an operation by the operating means. When the door body is in the open state, the means functions as the notification means capable of issuing an open notification indicating that the door body is in the open state, and the operation means is means capable of executing a certain operation. The first setting includes checking the operation of the operating means (for example, checking vibration or light emission), and the operating means is in a state where the set value can be changed and the door is in a state where the setting value is changeable. This game machine is characterized in that it does not accept operations when the body is in an open state.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the first setting that can be set when changing the settings and the second setting that can be set when checking the settings can be individually provided, which improves the work efficiency and convenience of the staff at the game parlor. You can increase your sexuality. Further, since the operation check of the operating means is included in the first setting, it cannot be performed when the door body is in the open state in the setting change, and the operating means can function as a notification means.

Further, it is provided with a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that can be opened and closed, and the notification means is a means that includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the setting value is in a state where the setting value can be changed. and when the door body is in an open state (for example, when the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 28(b)), the display means displays a display regarding the first setting. If the first setting is not displayed, the first setting cannot be set, the setting value is changeable, and the door body is in the closed state (for example, in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 28(c)) (when the front door 102 is closed), the display means can display a display regarding the first setting, the first setting can be set, and the setting value can be confirmed, Regardless of whether the door body is in the closed state or the open state (for example, when the front door 102 is open in the setting confirmation mode as shown in FIG. 30(e), or as shown in FIG. 31(c) , when the front door 102 is closed in the setting confirmation mode), the display means can display a display related to the second setting, and the second setting may be settable.

With such a configuration, changing the settings is a more important task than checking the settings, where mistakes cannot be tolerated, but if the door body is in an open state during the setting change, the first setting becomes impossible. This makes it possible to prevent setting errors when changing settings. Also, when the door body is in the closed state, the operating means inside the housing (setting keys, setting switches, etc.) cannot be operated, so when changing settings, the first setting is executed only when the door body is in the closed state. By making this possible, it is possible to prevent mistakes such as erroneously changing settings during the first setting. In addition, while checking the settings, settings can be made with the door body open or closed, so there is no need to temporarily close the door body, which increases the convenience and work efficiency of game store staff. can be increased.

Further, it is provided with a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that can be opened and closed, and the notification means is a means that includes an operation means (for example, a production button 192), and the first setting is a means for controlling the operation. The second setting is a setting that can be executed by an operation by the operating means, and the operating means is a setting that can be executed by an operation by the operating means, and the operating means is a setting that can be executed by an operation by the operating means. means functioning as the notification means capable of issuing an open notification indicating that the is in the open state; the operating means is means capable of executing an operation based on a certain operation pattern; The setting includes checking the operation of the operating means (for example, checking vibration or light emission), and even if the operation of the operating means is invalid when the door body is in the open state. good.

With such a configuration, since the operation check of the operating means is included in the first setting, it is impossible to change the setting when the door body is in the open state, and it is not possible to make the operating means function as a notification means. Can be done.

Further, it is provided with a certain presentation means (for example, a speaker, an accessory (movable body), a presentation button) capable of executing an action based on a certain action pattern, and the presentation means is a means that includes the operation means, The certain performance means is a performance means arranged at a position where the operation can be checked from the front of the game machine (hereinafter referred to as "operation check"), and the first setting includes the operation It may also include a check.

With this configuration, it is possible to perform an operation check when changing settings, which is more important than checking settings, and also execute the first setting if the door body is in the open state when changing settings. By making it impossible, it is possible to prevent the operation check from being executed in the open state.

Further, the second settings may include settings that are not initialized when the setting values are changed.

With such a configuration, convenience in setting confirmation can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values, and a door body that can be opened and closed ( For example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), and when the power is turned on while a certain operation is performed using the setting key, the above-mentioned The setting value is in a state where it can be changed (for example, setting change mode), and in the state where the setting value can be changed, the first setting (one or more) (for example, speaker check, accessory check, production button check) The notification means is a means including an operation means (for example, a production button 192), and the first setting is a setting that can be executed at least by performing an operation using the operation means. , the operation means is a means that functions as the notification means capable of issuing an open notification indicating that the door body is in the open state when the door body is in the open state, and the operation means is configured to be set in the first setting. includes checking the operation of the operating means (for example, checking vibration or light emission), and when the door body is in an open state, the first setting by operating the operating means is not executed, and the operation is not performed. The game machine is characterized in that the means is provided at a position that is visible from the front of the game machine (for example, at the front of the game machine).

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, while it is possible to check the operation of the operation means, since the operation check of the operation means is included in the first setting, when the door body is in the open state when changing the settings, This is not possible, and the operating means can function as a notification means.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values, and a door body that can be opened and closed ( For example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), and when the power is turned on while a certain operation is performed using the setting key, the above-mentioned The setting value is in a state where it can be changed (for example, setting change mode), and in the state where the setting value can be changed, the first setting (one or more) (for example, speaker check, accessory check, production button check) The notification means is a means including an operation means (for example, a production button 192), and the first setting is a setting that can be executed at least by performing an operation using the operation means. , the operation means is a means that functions as the notification means capable of issuing an open notification indicating that the door body is in the open state when the door body is in the open state, and the operation means is configured to be set in the first setting. includes checking the operation of the operating means (for example, checking vibration or light emission); In the first case, when the first setting is not executed by operating the operating means, it is notified that the setting value can be changed (for example, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, " This game machine is characterized by displaying an image including the character string "Settings are being changed", outputting a voice saying "Settings are being changed" from the speakers 272 and 277, etc.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, while it is possible to check the operation of the operation means, since the operation check of the operation means is included in the first setting, when the door body is in the open state when changing the settings, This is not possible, and the operating means can function as a notification means.

It should be noted that a plurality of presentation means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, speakers 272, 277, an upper lamp 142, a side lamp 144, a reel backlight 148, etc.) are provided, and the presentation means performs an operation based on a certain operation pattern. executable means, the first setting includes checking the operation of the effecting means, and the operating means is usable for determining the effecting means whose operation is to be checked. It may be a means.

With this configuration, it is possible to perform an operation check when changing settings, which is more important than checking settings, and also execute the first setting if the door body is in the open state when changing settings. By making it impossible, it is possible to prevent the operation check from being executed in the open state.

Further, if the certain operation using the setting key is performed after the power is turned on, the set value becomes available for confirmation, and in the state where the set value is available for confirmation, the second setting is changed. The first setting and the second setting may be at least partially different settings, and the second setting may be a setting that is executable by an operation using the operating means.

With such a configuration, the first setting that can be set when changing the settings and the second setting that can be set when confirming the settings can be individually set, which increases the work efficiency and convenience of the staff at the game parlor. be able to.

<Operation of movable body>
Next, the operation of the movable body included in the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIGS. 36 to 44.

FIG. 36(a) is a front view showing a state in which the movable body KT has moved to the upper limit position (second position), and FIG. 36(b) shows a state in which the movable body KT has moved to the lower limit position (first position). FIG.

The movable body KT is a member that can move in the vertical direction in front of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. In this example, the device is driven by a drive means (not shown) and moves in the vertical direction between the upper limit position (second position) shown in FIG. 36(a) and the lower limit position (first position) shown in FIG. 36(b). It is configured to be movable.

Note that the "moving direction" of the movable body according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and for example, the movable body may be a member that is movable in the left-right direction or diagonal direction in front of the front door 102, or may be a member that can move in the left-right direction or diagonal direction, or in the vertical direction. , left-right direction, and diagonal direction, or all of them may be combined.

<Movement of movable body/first position, second position, third position>
Next, the first position, second position, and third position to which the movable body KT can move will be explained.

The lower limit position (first position) shown in FIG. 36(b) is a position where the movable body KT is not exposed (does not protrude) beyond the outer edge (lower end) of the front door 102 (door body), and the slot machine 100, the lower end KTd of the movable body KT and the lower end 102d of the front door 102 are in a position where they substantially overlap (overlap).

In the upper limit position (second position) shown in FIG. 36(a), at least a portion of the movable body KT (in this example, almost the entire movable body KT) is located at the outer edge (upper end) of the front door 102 (door body). This is a position where the lower end KTd of the movable body KT and the upper end 102u of the front door 102 substantially overlap (overlap) when viewed from the front of the slot machine 100.

Note that the "first position" and "second position" of the movable body according to the present invention are not limited to this example, and for example, the upper end of the movable body and the front door 102 are located in the front view of the slot machine 100. The position where the upper ends almost overlap (overlap) may be the first position, and the position where the upper end of the movable body and the lower end of the front door 102 almost overlap (overlap) may be the second position.

Further, for example, if the movable body is a member that can move in the left-right direction in front of the front door 102, the right end of the movable body and the right end of the front door 102 almost overlap when viewed from the front of the slot machine 100. The position where the right end of the movable body and the left end of the front door 102 almost overlap (overlap) may be the second position, and the left end of the movable body may be the second position. The first position is where the left end of the movable body and the left end of the front door 102 almost overlap (overlap), and the second position is where the left end of the movable body and the right end of the front door 102 almost overlap (overlap). There may be.

The third position is a position other than the first position and the second position described above, for example, the position shown in FIG. 36(e) (in this example, the lower limit position (first position) and the upper limit position). (a position intermediate between the second position) and the second position).

<Movement of movable body/first movement (first case)>
Next, the first operation (first case) of the movable body KT will be explained.

36(c) to 36(f) are examples of the first operation of the movable body KT when the movable body KT is located at the lower limit position (first position) before power is turned on (first case). FIG.

The state shown in FIG. 36(c) is the state before the power is turned on, and in this example, the movable body KT is located at the lower limit position (first position) with the front door 102 closed. .

Note that in this state, since the front door 102 is closed, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 will output an open notification (for example, flashing red), and the speakers 272 and 277 will output an open notification sound (for example, ``The door is open'') is not output.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 36(d) is a state in which an employee of the game parlor or the like opens the front door 102 and operates the power switch disposed inside the main body 101 to turn on the power.

In this state, since the front door 102 is open, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 flash in red to notify that the front door 102 is open (open notification). , the speakers 272 and 277 output an open notification sound (in this example, a sound saying "The door is open") indicating that the door body is in the open state.

The movable body KT of the slot machine 100 starts a first operation when the power is turned on with the front door 102 (door body) open (first state). In addition, the first operation differs depending on the position of the movable body KT when the power is turned on, and when the front door 102 (door body) is open (first state), the lower limit position (first position) There is a case (first case) in which the movable body KT is located in and starts the operation of returning to the lower limit position (first position).

In the state shown in FIG. 36(d), when the front door 102 is open, the movable body KT is located at the lower limit position (first position). ), the movable body KT is moved from the lower limit position (first position) to the lower limit position (first position) and upper limit position (second position) as shown in FIGS. 36(d) to 36(e). ) to the middle position (third position), the lower limit position (first position) and upper limit position (second position) are shown in (e) to (f) of the same figure. The lower limit position (first position) is lowered from the intermediate position (third position) to the lower limit position (first position).

According to this example, when the movable body is powered on with the door body open (first state), the movable body starts the first operation. Operation confirmation can be performed reliably and easily, and convenience for game parlor staff and the like can be improved.

In addition, since the first action includes the action of moving the movable body to the first position, whether or not the movable body has moved to the first position depends on whether the movable body can perform the first operation normally. It is possible to reliably determine whether or not the process has been executed.

In addition, when the door body is open (first state), the movable body may be located at the first position (first case), and in the first case, the movable body is located at the first position. As the operation of can confirm that it is working properly.

<Movement of movable body/second movement>
Next, the second operation of the movable body KT will be explained.

FIGS. 36(g) to 37(d) are diagrams showing an example of the second operation of the movable body KT in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 36(g) is a state in which the movable body KT, which has completed the first operation, is located at the lower limit position (first position) and the front door 102 is closed.

In this state, the front door 102 is closed, so the opening notification by the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 are terminated.

The movable body KT of the slot machine 100 starts a second operation when the front door 102 (door body) changes from an open state (first state) to a closed state. This second motion is a motion that includes a certain motion regardless of the position of the movable body KT at the start of the second motion.

Although the mode of a certain operation is not particularly limited, a certain operation in this example includes moving the movable body KT from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position), and then This is an operation of returning to the lower limit position (first position) and moving from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position) again.

In the state shown in FIG. 36(g), since the front door 102 (door body) has changed from the open state (first state) to the closed state, the movable body KT is raised from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position) as shown in FIGS. 36(g) to 37(a). As shown in (c), the lower limit position (second position) is lowered to the lower limit position (first position), and as shown in (c) to (d) in the same figure, the lower limit position (first position) is lowered. position) to the upper limit position (second position).

According to this example, when the door body changes from the open state (first state) to the closed state, the movable body starts the second operation, and is therefore triggered by the door body closing. , the operation of the movable body can be checked reliably and easily, and convenience for store staff at game parlors and the like can be improved.

Furthermore, since the second motion includes a certain motion regardless of the position of the movable body at the time of starting the second motion, it is possible to check the common motion regardless of the position of the movable body. This allows reliable operation confirmation.

<Movement of movable body/Second motion (second state. When the movable body is in the first position)>
Next, the second operation (second state, when the movable body is in the first position) of the movable body KT will be explained.

37(e) to 38(c) show that the movable body KT is located at the lower limit position (first position) when the front door 102 is in the closed state and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state (second state). FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating, in chronological order, an example of the operation of the movable body KT when the power is turned on in a state where the movable body KT is in a state where the movable body KT is turned on.

As described above, in the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) opens when a certain operation is performed regarding the opening/closing sensor (detection means) that can detect the open/close state of the front door 102 (door body). The detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is configured to be in a state of detecting the closing of the door body (open detection state, second state) even when the door body is in the closed state.

Specifically, when the front door 102 is in the open state, a light shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape etc. By blocking the light from the light emitting part of the opening/closing sensor 101, even if the front door 102 is in the open state, the detection state of the opening/closing sensor can be forced into the closed detection state.

The state shown in FIG. 37(e) is the state before the power is turned on, and in this example, the movable body KT is located at the lower limit position (first position) with the front door 102 closed. .

Note that in this state, since the front door 102 is closed, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 will output an open notification (for example, flashing red), and the speakers 272 and 277 will output an open notification sound (for example, ``The door is open'') is not output.

In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 37(f), an employee of the game parlor opens the front door 102, forcibly changes the detection state of the open/close sensor to the closed detection state, and turns on the power switch disposed inside the main body 101. The power has been turned on after operation.

Note that this state is a state in which the front door 102 is open, but since the detection state of the opening/closing sensor is forcibly set to the closed detection state (second state), the upper lamp 142, The side lamp 144 does not output an open notification (for example, flashing red light), and the speakers 272 and 277 do not output an open notification sound (for example, a voice saying "the door is open").

When the movable body KT is powered on in the second state (the front door 102 is closed and the opening/closing sensor is detected as open), the movable body KT first moves to the upper limit position (second position) without starting the first operation. The second operation is configured to initiate a second operation including an operation of moving to.

In the state shown in FIG. 37(f), the power is turned on when the movable body KT is located at the lower limit position (first position) in the second state (the front door 102 is closed and the open/close sensor is detected as open). 37(f) to (h) as shown in FIGS. 37(f) to 37(h). 38(h) to 38(b), the upper limit position (second position) is raised to the lower limit position (first position). ), and as shown in Figures (b) to (c), the movement is performed from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position).

According to this example, the operation of the movable body can be checked even when the door body is in the closed state, and convenience for the store staff at the game parlor can be improved.

<Movement of movable body/first movement (second case)>
Next, the first operation (second case) of the movable body KT will be explained.

38(d) to FIG. 39(f) are examples of the first operation of the movable body KT when the movable body KT is not located at the lower limit position (first position) before power is turned on (second case). FIG.

The state shown in FIG. 38(d) is the state before the power is turned on, and in this example, when the front door 102 is closed, the movable body KT is not located at the lower limit position (first position). First, it is located at an intermediate position (third position) between the lower limit position (first position) and the upper limit position (second position).

Note that in this state, since the front door 102 is closed, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 will output an open notification (for example, flashing red), and the speakers 272 and 277 will output an open notification sound (for example, ``The door is open'') is not output.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 38(e) is when an employee of the game parlor opens the front door 102 and turns on the power accompanied by a setting change (turns the setting key provided inside the main unit 101 from OFF to ON). This is the state in which the power was turned on).

In this state, the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode (a state where the setting values can be changed), so the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 flash in red, and the front door 102 is in the open state. At the same time, the speakers 272 and 277 output an open notification sound (in this example, a sound saying "The door is open"), and then a setting change notification sound (in this example, a sound saying "The door is open") is output. Then, the voice message "Settings are being changed" will be output repeatedly.

In the slot machine 100, the first operation differs depending on the position of the movable body KT when the power is turned on. There is a case (second case) in which the movable body KT is located at a certain position different from the position of The operation of moving from the lower limit position (first position) to the lower limit position (first position) is started.

In the state shown in FIG. 38(e), when the power is turned on, the movable body KT is located at a certain position different from the lower limit position (first position). ), the movable body KT is raised from a certain position to the upper limit position (second position) and then lowered to the lower limit position (first position) as shown in FIG. I do.

In addition, in this example, power-on accompanied by a setting change has been explained, but when the movable body KT is not located at the lower limit position (first position) before power-on (second case), the first position of the movable body KT is The operation is the same even when the power is turned on without changing settings.

According to this example, when the door body is open (first state), there is a case (second case) where the movable body is located at a certain position different from the first position; In the case of , the movable body starts an action of moving from a certain position to the first position via the second position as the first action, so the first action is different from the first case. Based on the difference, the position of the movable body when the power is turned on can be determined.

The state shown in FIG. 38(g) is a state in which a certain operation using the setting key is canceled (the setting key is removed after the setting key is turned from on to off) and the setting change mode has ended.

In this state, since the setting change mode (a state in which setting values can be changed) has ended, the speakers 272 and 277 output a setting change completion notification sound (in this example, a sound saying "Settings change has been completed"). At the same time, since the front door 102 is in the open state, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are blinked in red to notify that the front door 102 is in the open state (open notification).

The state shown in FIG. 39(a) is a state in which the movable body KT, which has completed the first operation, is located at the lower limit position (first position) and the front door 102 is closed.

In this state, the front door 102 is closed, so the opening notification by the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 are terminated.

The movable body KT of the slot machine 100 starts a second operation when the front door 102 (door body) changes from an open state (first state) to a closed state. This second motion is a motion that includes a certain motion regardless of the position of the movable body KT at the start of the second motion.

Note that a certain operation in this example involves moving the movable body KT from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position), returning it to the lower limit position (first position), and moving it again. , is an operation of moving from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position).

In the state shown in FIG. 39(a), since the front door 102 (door body) has changed from the open state (first state) to the closed state, the movable body KT is raised from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position) as shown in FIGS. 39(a) to 39(c), and then As shown in e), the lower limit position (first position) is lowered from the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (first position) as shown in (e) to (f). position) to the upper limit position (second position).

According to this example, when the door body changes from the open state (first state) to the closed state, the movable body starts the second operation, and is therefore triggered by the door body closing. , the operation of the movable body can be checked reliably and easily, and convenience for store staff at game parlors and the like can be improved.

Furthermore, since the second motion includes a certain motion regardless of the position of the movable body at the time of starting the second motion, it is possible to check the common motion regardless of the position of the movable body. This allows reliable operation confirmation.

<Movement of the movable body/Second motion (second state. When the movable body is in the third position)>
Next, the second operation (second state, when the movable body is in the third position) of the movable body KT will be explained.

40(a) to 40(f) show that the movable body KT is at the lower limit position (first position) and the upper limit position ( FIG. 6 is a diagram chronologically showing an example of the operation of the movable body KT when the power is turned on while the movable body KT is located at a position other than the second position (third position).

The state shown in FIG. 40(a) is the state before the power is turned on. In this example, when the front door 102 is closed, the movable body KT is at the lower limit position (first position) and the upper limit position (first position). (2) position (third position).

Note that in this state, since the front door 102 is closed, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 will output an open notification (for example, flashing red), and the speakers 272 and 277 will output an open notification sound (for example, ``The door is open'') is not output.

In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 40(b), an employee of the game parlor opens the front door 102, forcibly changes the detection state of the open/close sensor to the closed detection state, and turns on the power switch disposed inside the main body 101. The power has been turned on after operation.

Note that this state is a state in which the front door 102 is open, but since the detection state of the opening/closing sensor is forcibly set to the closed detection state (second state), the upper lamp 142, The side lamp 144 does not output an open notification (for example, flashing red light), and the speakers 272 and 277 do not output an open notification sound (for example, a voice saying "the door is open").

When the movable body KT is powered on in the second state (the front door 102 is closed and the opening/closing sensor is detected as open), the movable body KT first moves to the upper limit position (second position) without starting the first operation. The second operation is configured to initiate a second operation including an operation of moving to.

The state shown in FIG. 40(b) is a state in which the power is turned on in the second state (the front door 102 is in the closed state and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state). ), the movable body KT is first raised to the upper limit position (second position), as shown in FIGS. 40(b) to 40(c), and then ), the lower limit position (second position) is lowered to the lower limit position (first position). ) to the upper limit position (second position).

According to this example, the operation of the movable body can be checked even when the door body is in the closed state, and convenience for the store staff at the game parlor can be improved.

<Movement of the movable body/Second motion (second state. When the movable body is in the second position)>
Next, the second operation (second state, when the movable body is in the second position) of the movable body KT will be explained.

41(a) to 41(e) show that the movable body KT is located at the upper limit position (second position) when the front door 102 is in the closed state and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state (second state). FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating, in chronological order, an example of the operation of the movable body KT when the power is turned on in a state where the movable body KT is in a state where the movable body KT is turned on.

The state shown in FIG. 41(a) is the state before the power is turned on, and in this example, the movable body KT is located at the upper limit position (second position) with the front door 102 closed. .

Note that in this state, since the front door 102 is closed, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 will output an open notification (for example, flashing red), and the speakers 272 and 277 will output an open notification sound (for example, ``The door is open'') is not output.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 41(b) is a state in which an employee of the game parlor or the like opens the front door 102 and operates the power switch disposed inside the main body 101 to turn on the power.

Note that this state is a state in which the front door 102 is open, but since the detection state of the opening/closing sensor is forcibly set to the closed detection state (second state), the upper lamp 142, The side lamp 144 does not output an open notification (for example, flashing red light), and the speakers 272 and 277 do not output an open notification sound (for example, a voice saying "the door is open").

When the movable body KT is located at the second position in the second state (the front door 102 is in the closed state and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state), the movable body KT moves from the second position as a second operation. The device is configured to initiate movement through the first position and back to the second position.

In the state shown in FIG. 41(b), the power is turned on when the movable body KT is located at the upper limit position (second position) in the second state (the front door 102 is closed and the open/close sensor is detected as open). 41(b) to 41(d). , lower the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (first position). (second position).

According to this example, the operation of the movable body can be checked even when the door body is in the closed state, and convenience for the store staff at the game parlor can be improved.

<Movement of movable body/door opening during normal play>
Next, the operation of the movable body KT when the door body is opened during the normal game will be explained.

FIGS. 42(a) to 42(g) are diagrams showing, in chronological order, an example of the operation of the movable body KT during a normal game.

The movable body KT is located at the upper limit position (second position) in the normal gaming state (certain state), but in the state where the door body is open (first position) in the normal gaming state (certain state). The device is configured to start moving from the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (first position) when it changes from the closed state to the closed state.

The state shown in FIG. 42(a) is a state in which a movable body performance is performed using the movable body KT in a normal game state (the front door 102 is closed), and in this example, a movable body performance is performed in a normal game state. Inside, the movable body KT is configured to move to the upper limit position (second position).

Since this state is a normal game state, in addition to the movable object performance by the movable body KT, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 perform effects, and the speakers 272 and 277 output sound effects.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 42(b) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened by the clerk of the gaming parlor or the like in the state shown in FIG. 42(a), and the normal gaming state is interrupted.

In this state, since the front door 102 is open, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 flash in red to notify that the front door 102 is open (open notification). , the speakers 272 and 277 repeatedly output an open notification sound (in this example, a sound saying "the door is open").

Also, since the front door 102 is opened in the normal gaming state, the movable body KT is moved from the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (second position) as shown in FIGS. 42(b) to 42(d). 1 position).

According to this example, when the movable body is located in the second position (a position exposed outside the outer edge of the door body) and the door body is opened, it moves to the first position (the outer edge of the door body). Since the movable body is moved to a position where it is not exposed to the outside, it is possible to prevent a situation where an employee or a player at a game parlor is injured by touching the movable body, thereby ensuring safety. Can be done.

FIG. 42(e) shows a state in which the opened front door 102 is closed and the normal gaming state is restored again.

In this state, since the front door 102 is closed, the opening notification from the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 and the opening notification sound from the speakers 272 and 277 are terminated, and the normal gaming state is returned to. Therefore, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 produce effects, the speakers 272 and 277 produce effects, and the like.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 42(f) is a state in which the production button 192 or the start lever 135 is operated in the normal gaming state.

In this example, when the production button 192 or the start lever 135 is operated, the movable body KT is moved from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position ( After raising the movable body KT to the second position), the movable body performance by the movable body KT is resumed.

According to this example, the movable body can be moved to the second position (for example, the position where the normal performance is performed) without performing an operation to close the door body, saving the effort of the staff at the game parlor, etc. Convenience can be improved.

<Movement of movable body/door closing during operation>
Next, the operation of the movable body KT when the door body is opened during the operation of the movable body KT will be explained.

FIGS. 43(a) to 44(a) are diagrams showing, in chronological order, an example of the operation of the movable body KT when the door body is opened during the operation of the movable body KT.

The state shown in FIG. 43(a) is the state before the power is turned on, and in this example, the movable body KT is located at the lower limit position (first position) with the front door 102 closed. .

Note that in this state, since the front door 102 is closed, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 will output an open notification (for example, flashing red), and the speakers 272 and 277 will output an open notification sound (for example, ``The door is open'') is not output.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 43(b) is a state in which an employee of the game parlor or the like opens the front door 102 and operates the power switch disposed inside the main body 101 to turn on the power.

In this state, since the front door 102 is open, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 flash in red to notify that the front door 102 is open (open notification). , the speakers 272 and 277 output an open notification sound (in this example, a sound saying "The door is open") indicating that the door body is in the open state.

In addition, in this state, since the movable body KT is located at the lower limit position (first position) when the front door 102 is open, FIGS. As explained above, in the first operation (first case), the movable body KT is moved from the lower limit position (first position) to the lower limit position (first position) and the upper limit position (second position). After raising it to the intermediate position (third position), it moves from the intermediate position (third position) between the lower limit position (first position) and the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (first position). In this example, the front door 102 is closed during the raising operation.

The state shown in FIG. 43(d) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed during the upward movement of the movable body KT.

In this state, the front door 102 is closed, so the opening notification by the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 and the opening notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 are terminated.

Furthermore, the movable body KT of the slot machine 100 is moved from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position) (in the middle of rising) or from the upper limit position (second position). When the front door 102 (door body) changes from the open state (first state) to the closed state while moving to the lower limit position (first position) (during descent), the front door 102 (door body) changes from the open state (first state) to the closed state. The second operation is configured to initiate a second operation.

In the state shown in FIG. 43(d), the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state (first position) while moving from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position). 43(d) to the closed state (second state), the movable body KT is moved to the upper limit as shown in FIGS. 43(d) to 43(f). After raising it to the position (second position), lower it from the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (first position), as shown in (f) to (h) in the same figure. As shown in FIG. 44(h) to FIG. 44(a), the movement is performed from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position).

According to this example, it is possible to check the operation of the movable body even when the movable body is in operation, and it is possible to improve convenience for store staff at the game parlor and the like.

In this example, the operation of the movable body KT when the front door 102 is closed during the upward movement of the movable body KT has been described. The same applies to the operation of the movable body KT when the front door 102 is closed during the movement from the lower limit position (the first position) to the lower limit position (the first position).

<Movement of movable body/modification example>
Next, a modification of the operation of the movable body KT will be explained. FIGS. 44(b) to 44(f) are diagrams showing modified examples of the operation of the movable body KT in chronological order.

In the above embodiment, when the movable body KT is powered on with the front door 102 (door body) open (first state), it starts the first operation, and from the first state the front door opens. Although we have shown an example in which the second operation is started when the door body 102 (door body) changes to the closed state, for example, if the "movable body storage selection" item is selected on the setting screen explained using FIG. 28 etc. The game store clerk or the like operates the production button 192 (operating means) to start the first action or the second action when the "movable body storage selection" item is selected. It may be configured as follows.

In the state shown in FIG. 44(b), the front door 102 is closed and the movable body storage selection item on the setting screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. In this example, the movable body KT is at the upper limit position. (second position).

In the same state, since the item "Movable body storage selection" has been selected on the setting screen, a display prompting the operator to start the operation of the movable body KT is displayed (in this example, "Select the movable body by operating the production button"). The text string "can be stored" is displayed).

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 44(c) is a state in which a display prompting an operation to start the movement of the movable body KT (display of a character string "The movable body can be temporarily stowed by operating the production button") is performed. Since the operation of the production button 192 has been received, the movable body KT is lowered from the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (first position), and the movable body KT is lowered from the outer edge of the front door 102. It is also in a state where it is stored in a position where it is not exposed to the outside.

According to this example, the movable body can be moved to the first position (for example, a position where it is not exposed to the outer edge of the door body) without performing an operation to close the door body, which saves time and effort on the part of the staff of the game parlor. can be omitted, increasing convenience.

Furthermore, when the movable body is located at the first position, the movable body may be configured to be moved to the second position upon operation of a certain operating means.

The state shown in FIG. 44(d) is the state shown in FIG. 44(c) in which the movable body is located at the lower limit position (first position) and the production button 192 or the start lever 135 is operated. It is in a state of

In this example, when the production button 192 or the start lever 135 is operated, the movable body KT is moved from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position ( After raising it to the second position), the performance by the movable body KT is started.

According to this example, the movable body can be moved to the second position (for example, the position where the normal performance is performed) without performing an operation to close the door body, saving the effort of the staff at the game parlor, etc. Convenience can be improved.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a movable body (for example, the movable body KT shown in FIG. 36) and a door body (for example, the movable body KT shown in FIG. For example, the movable body is in a state where the door body is open (hereinafter referred to as a "first state"). When the power is turned on in the state shown in FIG. 36(d), at least the first operation (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36(d) to 36(e), from the lower limit position (first position) to the lower limit position ( After raising it to a position (third position) intermediate between the upper limit position (first position) and the upper limit position (second position), move to the lower limit position (third position) as shown in Figures (e) to (f). 1 position) and an upper limit position (second position) to a lower limit position (first position). When the door changes from the state to the closed state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 36(g)), at least the second operation (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36(g) to 37(a) After raising from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position), as shown in FIGS. 37(a) to 37(c), from the upper limit position (second position) (Operation of lowering it to the lower limit position (first position) and moving it from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position) as shown in (c) to (d) in the same figure) This game machine is characterized by:

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the movable body performs the second operation when the door body changes from the open state (first state) to the closed state (second state). Therefore, it is possible to reliably and easily check the operation of the movable body using the closing of the door body as an opportunity, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the staff of the game parlor and the like.

Furthermore, when the power is turned on in the first state, the first operation and an operation different from the first operation may be started, or the first state may change to the second state. Then, the second operation and an operation different from the second operation may be started.

Further, the first operation differs depending on the position of the movable body when the power is turned on, and the first operation is such that the movable body is moved to the first position (for example, the lower limit position shown in FIG. 36(b)). ).

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably determine whether the movable body has normally executed the first operation based on whether the movable body has moved to the first position. Note that the first operation may be a preliminary operation for the second operation.

Further, in the first state, there is a case where the movable body is located at the first position (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), and in the first case, when the power is turned on, the movable body is located at the first position. As the first operation, the movable body moves from the first position to the third position (for example, a position between the upper limit position and the lower limit position shown in FIG. 36(e)) and returns to the first position. It may also be used to start the operation of returning to .

With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm that the movable body operates normally even when the movable body is located at the first position.

Further, in the first state, there is a case where the movable body is located at a certain position different from the first position (hereinafter referred to as "second case"), and in the second case, When the power is turned on, the movable body moves from the certain position to the first position via the second position (for example, the upper limit position shown in FIG. 36(a)) as the first operation. It may also be something that starts an operation.

With such a configuration, the position of the movable body when the power is turned on can be grasped based on the difference in the first operation from the first case.

Further, the second operation may be performed at a certain operation (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36(g) to 37(a), the lower limit After raising from the upper limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position), as shown in FIGS. 37(a) to 37(c), the lower limit position ( (first position) and moving from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position) as shown in (c) to (d) in the figure. It may be.

With such a configuration, a common operation can be confirmed regardless of the position of the movable body, and the operation can be confirmed reliably.

Further, a detection means (for example, an open/close sensor) capable of detecting an open/close state of the door body is provided, and the power supply can be turned on and off in the first state, and a certain state related to the detection means is provided. By performing an operation (for example, inserting a light shielding piece of a certain length between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101 and fixing it with tape or the like), the first state is reached. Even if there is, the detection state of the detection means is configured to be a state in which closing of the door body is detected (hereinafter referred to as "second state"), and when the power is turned on in the second state, , the movable body may start the second operation including an operation of first moving to the second position without starting the first operation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to check the operation of the movable body even when the door body is in the closed state, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the store staff at the game parlor.

Further, the first position is a position where the movable body is not exposed outside the outer edge of the door body (for example, the lower limit position shown in FIG. 36(b)), and the second position is the At least a portion of the movable body may be at a position exposed outside the outer edge of the door body (for example, the upper limit position shown in FIG. 36(a)).

With such a configuration, by moving the movable body to the first position, it is possible to prevent the movable body from being exposed outside the outer edge of the door body, thereby increasing the safety of the employees of the game parlor. can be secured.

Further, in the third state, when the movable body is located at the second position, the second operation is to move the movable body from the second position to the first position. It may be configured to start an operation of returning to the position.

Further, in a certain state (for example, a normal gaming state), the movable body is located in the second position, but in the certain state, the door body changes from an open state (first state) to a closed state. The movable body may be configured to start an operation of moving from the second position to the first position when the movable body changes to the state in which the movable body is in the position (second state).

Further, while the movable body is moving from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position, the door body may be The second operation may be started when the open state (first state) changes to the closed state (second state).

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a movable body (for example, the movable body KT shown in FIG. 36) and a door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the A game machine comprising a front door 102) shown in FIG. When the power is turned on in the state (hereinafter referred to as the "first state", for example, the state shown in FIG. 36(d)), at least the first operation (for example, the state shown in FIGS. 36(d) to 36(e)) As shown in the figure, after raising from the lower limit position (first position) to the intermediate position (third position) between the lower limit position (first position) and the upper limit position (second position), As shown in (e) to (f) of the same figure, from the intermediate position (third position) between the lower limit position (first position) and the upper limit position (second position), ), and when the movable body changes from the first state to the state where the door body is closed (for example, the state shown in FIG. 36(g)), the movable body starts at least the second operation (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36(g) to 37(a), after raising from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position), As shown in Figure (c), it is lowered from the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (first position). (first position) to the upper limit position (second position), the turning on and off of the power source can be performed in the first state, and a certain operation regarding the detecting means is performed. (For example, inserting a light shielding piece of a certain length between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101 and fixing it with tape etc.) The detection state of the detection means is configured such that the detection state of the detection means becomes a state in which closing of the door body is detected (hereinafter referred to as "second state"), and the power is turned on in the second state. In the gaming machine, the movable body first starts the second action without starting the first action.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the movable body performs the second operation when the door body changes from the open state (first state) to the closed state (second state). Therefore, it is possible to reliably and easily check the operation of the movable body using the closing of the door body as an opportunity, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the staff of the game parlor and the like. Further, even when the door body is in a closed state, the operation of the movable body can be checked, thereby increasing convenience for store staff at the game parlor and the like.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a movable body (for example, the movable body KT shown in FIG. 36) and a door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the A game machine comprising a front door 102) shown in FIG. When the power is turned on in the state (hereinafter referred to as the "first state", for example, the state shown in FIG. 36(d)), at least the first operation (for example, the state shown in FIGS. 36(d) to 36(e)) As shown in the figure, after raising from the lower limit position (first position) to the intermediate position (third position) between the lower limit position (first position) and the upper limit position (second position), As shown in (e) to (f) of the same figure, from the intermediate position (third position) between the lower limit position (first position) and the upper limit position (second position), ), and when the movable body changes from the first state to the state where the door body is closed (for example, the state shown in FIG. 36(g)), the movable body starts at least the second operation (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36(g) to 37(a), after raising from the lower limit position (first position) to the upper limit position (second position), As shown in Figure (c), it is lowered from the upper limit position (second position) to the lower limit position (first position). (first position) to the upper limit position (second position), the turning on and off of the power source can be performed in the first state, and a certain operation regarding the detecting means is performed. (For example, inserting a light shielding piece of a certain length between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101 and fixing it with tape etc.) The detection state of the detection means is configured such that the detection state of the detection means becomes a state in which closing of the door body is detected (hereinafter referred to as "second state"), and the power is turned on in the second state. Then, the movable body starts the second motion without starting the first motion, and the direction of the start of the motion of the movable body in the first motion and the movable body in the second motion are different. This game machine is characterized in that the direction in which the body starts moving is different.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the movable body performs the second operation when the door body changes from the open state (first state) to the closed state (second state). Therefore, it is possible to reliably and easily check the operation of the movable body using the closing of the door body as an opportunity, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the staff of the game parlor and the like. Further, even when the door body is in a closed state, the operation of the movable body can be checked, thereby increasing convenience for store staff at the game parlor and the like. In addition, since the direction in which the movable body starts operating in the first operation is different from the direction in which the movable body starts operating in the second operation, the operation of the movable body can be confirmed reliably and easily. Convenience for store staff, etc. can be improved.

Further, the first operation differs depending on the position of the movable body when the power is turned on, and the first operation moves the movable body to a first position (for example, a lower limit shown in FIG. 36(b)). The operation may include an operation of moving the object to a position).

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably determine whether the movable body has normally executed the first operation based on whether the movable body has moved to the first position. Note that the first operation may be a preliminary operation for the second operation.

In addition, in the first state, there is a case where the movable body is located at the first position (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), and in the first case, when the power is turned on, , the movable body moves from the first position to the third position (for example, the position between the upper limit position and the lower limit position shown in FIG. 36(e)) as the first operation. It may also start the operation of returning to the position.

With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm that the movable body operates normally even when the movable body is located at the first position.

<Error notification>
Next, error notification that can be executed by the slot machine 100 will be explained.

Here, the errors that may occur in the slot machine 100 include door open error (door open error), hopper empty error, hopper error, medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow error, RAM failure, Examples include prize winning abnormalities.

The door open error (door open error) is an error that notifies the opening of the door of the game machine, occurs when the front door 102 is opened, and is resolved when the front door 102 is closed.

The hopper empty error is a dispensing error related to dispensing medals, and occurs when the number of medals stored in the hopper housed inside the main body 101 falls below the specified number (for example, the medal dispensing sensor remains off for 3000 ms or more). (If the problem does not change), it can be resolved by replenishing the hopper with more than the specified number of medals. A hopper error occurs when a connection abnormality such as a disconnection is detected in the cable (wiring) connected to the hopper, and the first condition is met (in this example, the connection abnormality in the hopper cable is resolved). (in this example, when the reset button is operated or the door is reset), the second condition is satisfied.

Medal insertion error 1 (medal insertion jam) occurs when the inserted medals are stuck (for example, when the input state of the medal detection sensor does not change for more than 150ms), and the error is cleared after the cause of the error is removed. The issue is resolved when the switch, reset button, or door reset operation is accepted. Medal insertion abnormality 2 occurs when the number of inserted medals is equal to or greater than the specified number, and can be resolved by changing the settings or clearing the RAM.

The medal insertion error 3 occurs when either the insertion sensor 1 or the insertion sensor 2 is turned on other than during the medal insertion process, and the medal insertion error 4 occurs when the inserted medals (For example, when the medal detection sensor and proximity sensor detect an abnormal pattern). After removing the cause of the error, operate the error release switch, reset button, or door reset. will be resolved if accepted.

Medal payout abnormality 1 (medal payout jam) occurs when no medals are paid out for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is activated (for example, when the medal detection sensor continues to be on for 200ms or more after changing from on to off). The medal payout abnormality 2 occurs when medals are accumulated when the medal payout device is activated, and the medal payout abnormality 3 (unauthorized payout) occurs when either the payout sensor 1 or the payout sensor 2 is activated other than during the medal payout process. This occurs when the error is turned on, and is resolved when the error release switch, reset button, or door reset operation is accepted after the cause of the error is removed.

An overflow error occurs when the overflow terminal of the medal auxiliary storage is turned on, and is resolved when the error release switch, reset button, or door reset operation is accepted after the cause of the error is removed. A RAM failure (RWM abnormality) occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM or when the number of medals inserted at the time of reception of the start lever 135 is abnormal, and the error release switch, reset button, or The issue will be resolved if the door reset operation is accepted or by changing the settings.

A winning abnormality (winning symbol abnormality) occurs when, after the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, a winning symbol different from the winning symbol confirmed by the internal lottery is won (in the display judgment of symbol combinations, the condition device is not activated on the active line) This error occurs when a prize is won, activated, or a replay is displayed) and is resolved when the error release switch, reset button, or door reset operation is accepted, or by changing the settings. A backup error occurs when the backup data is abnormal or the checksum value of RAM (RWM) is abnormal when the power is turned on, and when the error release switch, reset button, or door reset operation is accepted. Or, it can be resolved by changing the settings.

Note that the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to slot machines, but can also be applied to pachinko machines. Errors that can occur in pachinko machines include, for example, lower tray full error, dispensing device error, overdispensing error, incorrect dispensing error, main control communication error, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, frame opening error, and RAM clear error. , shock sensor error, etc. These errors are also resolved when the error release switch, reset button, or door reset operation is accepted after the cause of the error is removed.

<Error notification/main board display, etc.>
Next, prior to explaining error notification, members arranged inside the slot machine 100 (main board display, etc.) will be explained using FIG. 45.

FIG. 45 is a front view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open. The main body 101 is a box that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and has an opening at the front.

Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores a main control board inside is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the back plate 242. Three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below. Further, a main board display device (main board 7 segments) 190 consisting of a 7 segment display is disposed on the main control board. The main board display 190 will be described later with reference to FIG. It is.

On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 260, a sub control board storage case 220 that stores a sub control board therein is disposed. Furthermore, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side as viewed from the outside, which is connected to the main control board and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device.

A medal payout device 180 (a device that pays out medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the bottom plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided in front of the power supply device 252. The power supply device 252 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and each device, such as a main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., which will be described later. do. Furthermore, it is equipped with a power storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to predetermined components (e.g., RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after external power is cut off. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is provided on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is provided behind this storage (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion to which a power cord 264 is connected, and the power cord 264 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 formed in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the symbol display window 113 is provided with a presentation device 160 and a presentation control board for controlling this presentation device 160. (not shown), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. At the bottom of the symbol display window 113, there is provided a medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, a passage 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals, etc. into the medal tray 161. There is. Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 181.

<Error notification/notification means (display means)>
Next, the notification means included in the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 46(a). FIG. 46(a) is a schematic diagram (front view) of the main parts of the notification means included in the slot machine 100.

The slot machine 100 includes a display means that can display information as one of the notification means. Examples of display means included in the slot machine 100 include the liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 described using FIG. 1, the payout number display 127, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the Examples include the main board display device 190 described using the above, and these display means are comprised of a liquid crystal display device, an LED, a segment display device, etc. in this example.

FIG. 46(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display by the main board display 190. In this example, the main board display 190 is composed of a 7-segment display, and predetermined game information is announced by lighting one, more, or all of the seven segments a to g. It is possible.

Note that the main board display 190 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and other display means such as an LED may be applied. Furthermore, it goes without saying that the game information that can be broadcast is not limited to seven types.

In this example, segment a of the main board display 190 is lit while the reset button is being operated, and segments b, c, and d are lit respectively for stop button 137 (left stop button) and stop button 138 (middle reel stop button). ), is lit when the stop button 139 (right reel stop button) is operated. Furthermore, segment e is lit when the front door 102 is open, segment f is lit when a hopper error occurs, and segment g is lit when an error that requires clearing the RAM (for example, medal insertion error 2 described above) occurs. Lights up when an occurrence occurs.

Note that the notification mode by each of the segments a to g is not limited to the lighting of the segment, but may also be such that each status is notified by blinking or extinguishing the segment. The main board display 190 may be any device that can notify information related to games, such as errors other than the exemplified errors (e.g., RAM failure), and information other than the exemplified operation information (e.g., game status, winnings, etc.). It may also be something that notifies you of the winning combination (winning combination, winning combination).

<Various notification/notification means (sound output means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a sound output means capable of outputting sound as one of the notification means. Examples of sound output means included in the slot machine 100 include the speakers 272 and 277 described using FIG. 2.

<Various notification/notification means (light emitting means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a light emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light as one of the notification means. The light emitting means provided in the slot machine 100 includes, for example, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the reel backlight 148 of each reel 110 to 112, the production button 192, the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the start lever described using FIG. 135, etc., and in this example, all of these light emitting means are composed of LEDs.

Note that the performance button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, and start lever 135 also function as operating means that can be operated by the player. The present invention is also applicable to pachinko machines, and examples of light emitting means included in pachinko machines include frame lamps, performance buttons, accessories, and the like.

<Error notification of door opening error>
Next, error notification when a door opening error occurs will be explained. FIGS. 46(c) to 47(a) are diagrams showing an example of error notification when a door opening error occurs.

The state shown in FIG. 46(c) is the state before power is turned on.

In this state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, notifications are provided by display means (liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, etc.), notifications by light emitting means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.), No notification is provided by the sound output means (speakers 277, 278).

The state shown in FIG. 46(d) is a state in which a clerk at the game parlor or the like opens the front door 102 and operates the power switch disposed inside the main body 101 to turn on the power.

In the same state, power is supplied to the slot machine 100 and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 has been opened. 102 is in the open state (open notification), and by lighting segment e of the main board display 190 in red, a door open error notification indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state is issued. Then, the speakers 272 and 277 repeatedly output an open notification sound (in this example, a sound saying "The door is open").

The state shown in FIG. 46(e) is a state in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, and preparations such as initial settings have been completed.

In this state, since preparations such as initial settings have been completed, the storage number display 125 and the payout number display 127 are turned on, and the normal screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, while the front door 102 Since the door continues to be open, the upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, and production button 192 output an open notification (flashing red), and the speakers 272 and 277 output an open notification sound ("The door is open"). The main board display 190 continues to output the door open error (segment e lights up in red).

The state shown in FIG. 47(a) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed by an employee of the game parlor or the like.

In the same state, since the opening/closing sensor detects the closing of the front door 102, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 output an open notification (blinking red), and the speakers 272 and 277 output an open notification sound ("Door While the main board display 190 ends the door open error notification (segment e lights up in red), the number of stored coins display 125 and the number of dispensed coins display 127 light up. While continuing to display the normal screen on the liquid crystal display device 157, the upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, and presentation button 192 are turned on in a presentation mode.

<Error notification of hopper error>
Next, error notification when a hopper error occurs will be explained.

FIGS. 47(b) to 48(f) are diagrams showing an example of error notification when a hopper error occurs.

The states shown in FIGS. 47(b) to 47(c) are almost the same as the states described using FIGS. 46(c) to 46(d), so their explanation will be omitted, but The state shown in FIG. 47(b) differs in that a hopper error (a certain error) has occurred before the power is turned on.

Here, a hopper error (certain error) occurs when a cable connection abnormality occurs due to a disconnection of the cable connected to the hopper, and the first condition is met (in this example, the hopper cable This is an error that is resolved when the second condition is satisfied (in this example, when the reset button is operated) after the connection abnormality has been resolved.

<Hopper error notification/start of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 47(d) is a state in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, and preparations such as initial settings have been completed.

The slot machine 100 is configured to start at least a first notification and a second notification when a hopper error (a certain error) occurs.

In the same state, since a hopper error (a certain error) has occurred before the power is turned on, the error code (in this example, "E4") is displayed using the payout number display 127 (first notification means). By displaying the hopper error notification (first notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred, the segment f (second notification means) of the main board display 190 is lit in red. , performs a hopper error notification (second notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred.

At the same time, an error display indicating that a hopper error has occurred is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 (in this example, a character string displaying "Hopper error. Please call an attendant") is displayed. , Since preparations such as initial settings are completed, the storage number display 125 is turned on.

In addition, in the same state, since the front door 102 continues to be open, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 output an open notification (flashing red), and the speakers 272 and 277 output an open notification sound. (voice saying "The door is open") and the main board display 190 continues to notify the door open error (segment e lights up in red).

<Error notification of hopper error/resolution of connection error → end of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 47(e) is a state in which the connection abnormality due to the hopper error has been resolved (the first condition has been satisfied).

The slot machine 100 provides a second notification after the first notification (in this example, the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) and the second notification (in this example, the hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190). When the first condition is met (in this example, when the connection abnormality due to the hopper error is resolved), the first notification (the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is continued, and the first notification is continued. The second notification (hopper error notification by the main board display 190) is configured to end.

In the same state, since the connection abnormality due to the hopper error has been resolved (the first condition has been met), the first notification (hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is continued, while the second notification is continued. The notification (hopper error notification by segment f of the main board display 190) is ended.

According to this example, the first notification is continued even when a part of the cause of a certain error has been resolved, so it is possible to notify that a certain error has not been completely resolved. , the second notification ends, it is possible to notify that the state has changed in relation to a certain error, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the staff of the game parlor and the like.

In addition, in the same state, since the front door 102 continues to be open, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 output an open notification (flashing red), and the speakers 272 and 277 output an open notification sound. (voice saying "The door is open") and the main board display 190 continues to notify the door open error (segment e lights up in red).

<Hopper error notification/reset button operation → end first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 47(f) is a state in which the reset button is operated in order to eliminate a hopper error (a certain error) (the second condition is satisfied by the first operation).

In the same state, since the reset button was operated to resolve the hopper error (the second condition was met), segment a (third notification means) of the main board display 190 lights up in red. As a result, a reset button operation notification (third notification) indicating that the reset button has been operated is performed, and since the hopper error (a certain error) has been resolved by operating the reset button, the first notification ( Hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is ended.

According to this example, when an operation (reset button operation) is performed using a certain operating means, a certain error (hopper error) is resolved and the third Since the third notification (reset button operation notification by segment a of the main board display 190) is performed by the notification means (segment a of the main board display 190), the notification inside the casing indicates that a certain error has been resolved. It is possible to notify the operator in an easy-to-understand manner, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the staff at the game parlor.

Note that the "second condition" according to the present invention may be a condition that is satisfied when an operation is performed using at least a certain operating means, and an operation other than the reset button operation, for example, when an operation inside the main body 101 is performed. The operation may be performed using operating means such as a setting switch, setting key, RAM clear button, etc., or may be an operation such as a door reset described later.

In addition, in the same state, since the front door 102 continues to be open, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 are activated to notify the opening (blinking red), and the speakers 272 and 277 are activated to notify the opening of the opening notification sound. (voice saying "The door is open") and the main board display 190 continues to notify the door open error (segment e lights up in red).

<Hopper error notification/hopper error resolution → front door closing>
The state shown in FIG. 48(a) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed by an employee of the game parlor after the hopper error is resolved.

In the same state, since the opening/closing sensor detects the closing of the front door 102, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 output an open notification (blinking red), and the speakers 272 and 277 output an open notification sound ("Door While the main board display 190 ends the door open error notification (segment e lights up in red), the number of stored coins display 125 and the number of dispensed coins display 127 light up. While continuing to display the normal screen on the liquid crystal display device 157, the upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, and presentation button 192 are turned on in a presentation mode.

<Error notification of hopper error/2nd hopper error → Power on>
In the state shown in FIG. 48(b), when the second hopper error has occurred, a clerk at the game parlor opens the front door 102 and operates the power switch located inside the main body 101 to turn on the power. It is in a state where it has been inserted.

This state is almost the same as the state explained using FIG. 47(c), so its explanation will be omitted, but the state shown in FIG. 48(b) in this example is once resolved before the power is turned on. The difference is that the hopper error (a certain error) has occurred again.

The state shown in FIG. 48(c) is a state in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, and preparations such as initial settings have been completed.

The slot machine 100 is configured to start at least a first notification and a second notification when a hopper error (a certain error) occurs.

In the same state, since a hopper error (a certain error) has occurred before the power is turned on, the error code (in this example, "E4") is displayed using the payout number display 127 (first notification means). By displaying the hopper error notification (first notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred, the segment f (second notification means) of the main board display 190 is lit in red. , performs a hopper error notification (second notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred.

At the same time, an error display indicating that a hopper error has occurred is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 (in this example, a character string displaying "Hopper error. Please call an attendant") is displayed. , Since preparations such as initial settings are completed, the storage number display 125 is turned on.

The slot machine 100 starts an audio notification regarding the error when a certain error (in this example, a hopper error) occurs, and continues to issue an audio notification regarding the error until a certain condition is met (in this example, until the reset button is operated). Continue audio notification. Furthermore, if the power is turned on while a certain error (hopper error in this example) has occurred and the door body (in this example, the front door 102) is in the open state, the door body is in the open state. A notification sound (first notification sound, in this example, an open notification sound) is output to indicate that a certain error has occurred, and if the certain error occurs again after the certain error has been resolved, a certain It is configured to output a notification sound (a second notification sound, in this example, a hopper error notification sound) that prompts the resolution of a certain error in connection with the occurrence of an error.

In the same state, after the hopper error (a certain error) was resolved, the certain error occurred again, so the speakers 272 and 277 emitted an open notification sound ( Instead of the first notification sound (the voice saying "The door is open"), the hopper error notification sound (the second notification sound, which prompts the user to resolve the hopper error) will sound "Hopper error. Call the staff." Hopper error notification is performed by outputting a voice saying "Please".

According to this example, a notification sound (first notification sound) indicating that the door body is in an open state and a notification sound (second notification sound) that prompts the resolution of a certain error are generated depending on the situation of the game machine, etc. It is possible to use different sounds (sounds), increasing convenience.

In addition, if the power is turned on while a certain error has occurred and the door body is open, the first alarm sound is output, and after the certain error is resolved, the corresponding or If an error occurs, a second notification sound is output, so when the power is turned on, the first notification sound can be output with priority, and priority is given to the door being in the open state. can be notified.

In addition, in the same state, since the front door 102 continues to be open, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 are used to notify the opening (blinking red), and the main board display 190 indicates that the door is open. Continue error notification (segment e lights up in red).

Furthermore, the hopper error notification sound that prompts the resolution of the hopper error is not limited to a notification sound that includes a sound that can identify the type of error (in this example, "hopper error"); for example, it is not possible to identify the type of error. After outputting a notification sound (e.g., "Please call the staff member"), a notification sound that includes a sound that can identify the type of error (e.g., "Hopper error. Please call the staff member") may be output.

<Error notification of hopper error/resolution of connection error → end of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 48(d) is a state in which the connection abnormality due to the hopper error has been resolved (the first condition has been satisfied).

The slot machine 100 provides a second notification after the first notification (in this example, the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) and the second notification (in this example, the hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190). When the first condition is met (in this example, when the connection abnormality due to the hopper error is resolved), the first notification (the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is continued, and the first notification is continued. The second notification (hopper error notification by the main board display 190) is configured to end.

In the same state, since the connection abnormality due to the hopper error has been resolved (the first condition has been met), the first notification (hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is continued, while the second notification is continued. The notification (hopper error notification by segment f of the main board display 190) is ended.

In addition, in the same state, since the second hopper error (certain error) continues, the speakers 272 and 277 emit a hopper error notification sound (second notification) to prompt the resolution of the hopper error (certain error). In addition to continuing to output the sound "Hopper error. Please call the staff", the front door 102 continues to be open, so the upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, and production button 192 are activated. The door open notification (blinking red) and the door open error notification (red lighting of segment e) by the main board display 190 are continued.

The state shown in FIG. 48(e) is a state in which the reset button is operated (the second condition is met) to resolve the hopper error (certain error), and the state shown in FIG. 48(f) is the state shown in FIG. 48(f). 47(f) and 48(a) are the same as those described using FIG. 47(f) and FIG. 48(a). The explanation will be omitted.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that can be opened and closed, and a notification means ( For example, liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, stored number display 125, speakers 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135 etc.), the notifying means is a means capable of notifying at least a certain error, and the notifying means includes a sound output means (for example, speakers 272, 277). , the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a notification sound (hereinafter referred to as "first notification sound"; for example, a sound saying "the door is open") indicating that the door body is in an open state. The sound output means is configured to generate a notification sound (hereinafter referred to as "second notification sound") that prompts the resolution of the certain error in connection with the occurrence of the certain error. For example, "Hopper error. Staff The sound output means is capable of outputting the first notification sound and the second notification sound when the certain error occurs. This game machine is characterized in that the means may output a notification sound.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, depending on the situation of the game machine, a notification sound indicating that the door body is in an open state (first notification sound) and a notification sound urging resolution of a certain error are generated. (second notification sound) can be used selectively, increasing convenience.

The display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157) is provided, and the display means displays a display indicating that the certain error has occurred (for example, "hopper") in a state where the certain error has occurred. It may be possible to start displaying a character string "Error. Please call an attendant."

Further, the sound output means outputs the second notification sound without outputting the first notification sound when the door body is in a closed state in a state where the certain error occurs. The sound output means outputs the first notification sound and the second notification sound when the door body is in the open state in a state where the certain error occurs. It may also be a means that may output.

With such a configuration, when the door body is in the open state, depending on the situation, a notification sound (first notification sound) indicating that the door body is in the open state and a certain error correction sound will be emitted. The notification sound (second notification sound) that prompts the user can be used for different purposes, increasing convenience.

Further, if the power is cut off when the certain error occurs and the door body is in the open state when the power is turned on, the sound output means detects whether the door body is in the open state. The first notification sound may be output even when the certain error is resolved, and if the certain error occurs again, the second notification sound may be output. .

With such a configuration, when the power is turned on, the first notification sound can be output with priority, and the fact that the door body is in the open state can be notified with priority.

In addition, it is equipped with a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values, and when the power is turned on with a certain operation (for example, turning on from off) performed using the setting key, is, the power is turned off in a state in which the set value can be changed (for example, a setting change mode), the certain error has occurred, and the power is turned on in the state in which the certain operation is performed; If the certain error has not been resolved and the door body is in the open state, priority is given to changing the setting value over the certain error, and the sound output means is configured to change the setting value. The first notification sound is output without outputting a notification sound indicating that the value can be changed, and after the change of the setting value is completed, the second notification is output as a notification of the certain error. It may also be one that outputs sound.

With such a configuration, setting changes are given priority over notification of a certain error, so setting changes can be completed reliably, and forgetting to change settings can be prevented. Furthermore, since the first notification sound is output after the setting change is completed, it is possible to reliably deal with errors after the setting change is completed.

Further, if the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on in a state where the certain error occurs and the door body is in the open state, the setting value is higher than the certain error. While prioritizing confirmation, the sound output means outputs the first notification sound without outputting a notification sound indicating that the setting value can be confirmed, and the confirmation of the setting value is completed. Later, the second notification sound may be output as a notification of the certain error.

Further, if the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on in a state where the certain error occurs and the door body is in the closed state, the above-mentioned operation is performed without outputting the first notification sound. The sound output means outputs a second notification sound, when the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on in a state where the certain error has occurred and the door body is in the open state. The first notification sound may be outputted, and the second notification sound may be outputted.

The display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157) is provided, and when the power is turned on when the certain operation is performed in the state where the certain error occurs, the door body is in the open state. In this case, priority is given to changing the set value over the certain error, and the display means displays a setting changing display (e.g. "Settings changing") indicating that the setting value can be changed. ``Hopper error. Please call an attendant.'' display indicating that a certain error has occurred (for example, displaying the string ``Hopper error. Please call an attendant'') can be started. It may be something.

Further, the sound output means always starts outputting the first notification sound when the door body is in the open state when the power is turned on, regardless of the presence or absence of the certain error. There may be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably notify the clerk of the game parlor that the door body is in the open state.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that can be opened and closed, and a notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display). device 157, payout number display 127, stored number display 125, speakers 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), The notifying means is a means capable of notifying at least a certain error, and the notifying means includes sound outputting means (for example, speakers 272, 277), The means is capable of outputting a notification sound (hereinafter referred to as "first notification sound"; for example, a sound saying "the door is open") indicating that the door body is in an open state, and The output means is a notification sound (hereinafter referred to as "second notification sound") that prompts the resolution of the certain error in connection with the occurrence of the certain error. For example, "Hopper error. Please call the staff. '' sound), and the sound output means outputs the first notification sound and the second notification sound when the certain error occurs. When the power is cut off when the certain error occurs and the door body is in an open state when the power is turned on, the sound output means Means for outputting a notification sound and outputting the second notification sound even if the door body is in the open state if the certain error occurs again after the certain error is resolved. This game machine is characterized by the following.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, depending on the situation of the game machine, a notification sound indicating that the door body is in an open state (first notification sound) and a notification sound urging resolution of a certain error are generated. (second notification sound) can be used selectively, increasing convenience. Further, when the power is turned on, the first notification sound can be outputted with priority, and it is possible to give priority to notification that the door body is in the open state.

<Modification example 1 of error notification of hopper error>
Next, a first modification of error notification when a hopper error occurs will be described.

FIGS. 49(a) to 50(i) are diagrams showing a first modification of error notification when a hopper error occurs.

The states shown in FIGS. 49(a) to 49(b) are the same as the states described using FIGS. 47(a) to 47(b), and the hopper error (a certain ) has occurred, and a hopper error (certain error) remains when the power is turned on.

<Variation example 1 of error notification of hopper error/Start of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 49(c) is a state in which a predetermined period of time has passed since the power was turned on, and restoration processing such as initial settings has been completed.

The slot machine 100 of this example is configured to start at least a first notification and a second notification when a certain error (for example, a hopper error) occurs.

In the same state, since a hopper error (a certain error) has occurred before the power is turned on, the error code (in this example, "E4") is displayed using the payout number display 127 (first notification means). By displaying the hopper error notification (first notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred, the segment f (second notification means) of the main board display 190 is lit in red. , performs a hopper error notification (second notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred.

At the same time, an error display indicating that a hopper error has occurred is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 (in this example, a character string displaying "Hopper error. Please call an attendant") is displayed. , Since preparations such as initial settings are completed, the storage number display 125 is turned on.

Further, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277 in this example) of the slot machine 100 of this example outputs the first notification sound (the actual sound) when a certain error (hopper error in this example) occurs. In this example, we will output an open notification sound (a sound that says "The door is open") and a second notification sound (in this example, an error notification sound (a sound that says "Hopper error. Please call the staff")). It is configured so that it may output audio)).

The state shown in FIG. 49(c) is a state in which a hopper error has occurred and the front door 102 is in an open state, so the speakers 272 and 277 emit an open notification sound (first notification sound. In the example, the voice "The door is open" is output, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 are used to notify the opening (blinking red), and the main board display 190 is used to notify the door opening error ( (lighting of segment e in red).

Note that the "first notification sound" according to the present invention may be "a notification sound that includes at least a notification sound indicating that the door body is open", for example, a sound saying "the door is open". and other voices (e.g., an error message such as "Hopper error", a message urging the door to close such as "Please close the door"), and other sounds (e.g., "The door is open"). → "Hopper error" → "The door is open" → "Hopper error" →...etc.), or in addition to the voice "The door is open", other voices (for example, It may also be a notification sound (for example, ``The door is open. Please close the door'') that further includes a notification ``Please close the door'' to prompt the closing of the door body.

In addition, in this example, if the power is cut off while a certain error occurs and the door body is open when the power is turned on (first case), the first notification sound (main In the example, the configuration is configured to output the open notification sound), but if the door body is in the open state when the power is turned on, the first notification sound (for example, The output of the opening notification sound may always be started.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give priority to notification that the door body is in an open state, regardless of whether a certain error has occurred, thereby increasing the convenience of the staff at the game parlor. can.

<Modified example of error notification of hopper error 1/Resolving connection abnormality → End of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 49(d) is a state in which the connection abnormality due to the hopper error has been resolved (the first condition is satisfied).

The slot machine 100 provides a second notification after the first notification (in this example, the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) and the second notification (in this example, the hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190). When the first condition is met (in this example, when the connection abnormality due to the hopper error is resolved), the first notification (the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is continued, and the first notification is continued. The second notification (hopper error notification by the main board display 190) is configured to end.

In the same state, since the connection abnormality due to the hopper error has been resolved (the first condition has been met), the first notification (hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is continued, while the second notification is continued. The notification (hopper error notification by segment f of the main board display 190) is ended.

According to this example, the first notification is continued even when a part of the cause of a certain error has been resolved, so it is possible to notify that a certain error has not been completely resolved. , the second notification ends, it is possible to notify that the state has changed in relation to a certain error, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the staff of the game parlor and the like.

In addition, in the same state, since the front door 102 continues to be open, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 output an open notification (flashing red), and the speakers 272 and 277 output an open notification sound. (first notification sound; in this example, the sound "The door is open") and the main board display 190 continues to notify the door open error (segment e lights up in red).

<Modified example of hopper error notification 1/Resolving connection abnormality → closing front door>
The state shown in FIG. 49(e) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed by a clerk at the gaming parlor after the connection abnormality due to the hopper error is resolved.

In the slot machine 100 of this example, the power is cut off when a certain error (hopper error in this example) occurs, and the door body (front door 102 in this example) opens when the power is turned on. To resolve a certain error while outputting the first notification sound (in this example, the open notification sound (sound saying "The door is open") in the case of the state (first case). When the door body changes from the open state to the closed state, the first notification sound changes to the second notification sound (in this example, the error notification sound ("Hopper error. Please call the staff") The system is configured to switch to audio) for notification.

In the state shown in Figure 49(e), the hopper error connection abnormality has been resolved (the first condition has been met), but the reset button has not been operated (the second condition has not been met). ), because the front door 102 changed from the open state to the closed state without resolving the hopper error, the error notification sound ( The notification is executed by switching to the second notification sound (the sound saying "Hopper error. Please call the staff").

According to this example, when the door changes from the open state to the closed state without resolving a certain error while the first notification sound is being output, the second notification sound is output from the first notification sound. Since the notification is made by switching to the notification sound, it is possible to reliably notify that a certain error has not been resolved.

Note that the "second notification sound" according to the present invention may be "a notification sound related to the occurrence of a certain error, which is at least partially different from the first notification sound". , for example, alternately repeating the sound "The door is open" and other sounds (for example, an error notification "Hopper error", a notification urging the door to close "Please close the door", etc.) It may be a notification sound (for example, "The door is open" → "Hopper error" → "The door is open" → "Hopper error" →... etc.), or a voice saying "Hopper error" In addition to this, the notification sound (e.g., "Hopper error. Please call the staff member") further includes other sounds (e.g., "Please call the staff member", which prompts the user to resolve the error). Good too.

Further, the "second notification sound" according to the present invention is not limited to a notification sound that includes a sound that can specify the type of error (in this example, "hopper error"), but for example, the "second notification sound" that does not specify the type of error. After outputting a possible notification sound (e.g., "Please call the staff member"), output a notification sound that includes a sound that can identify the type of error (e.g., "Hopper error. Please call the staff member"). ) may be output.

Further, the "second notification sound" according to the present invention is a display that can identify the type of error by including the name of the error such as "medal error" or "door is open". Alternatively, the display may include an error code such as "E4" so that the type of error can be specified.

<Modified example of error notification of hopper error 1/Front door closing → opening>
The state shown in FIG. 49(f) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened after the connection abnormality due to the hopper error has been resolved and the front door 102 has been closed by the clerk of the game parlor.

In the same state, since the front door 102 has changed from the closed state to the open state, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 output an open notification (flashing red), and the speakers 272 and 277 output an open notification sound (" The door open error notification (segment e lights up in red) is resumed.

<Modified example of error notification of hopper error 1/Reset button operation → end first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 50(g) is a state in which the reset button is operated in order to eliminate a hopper error (a certain error) (the second condition is satisfied by the first operation).

In the same state, since the reset button was operated to resolve the hopper error (the second condition was met), segment a (third notification means) of the main board display 190 lights up in red. As a result, a reset button operation notification (third notification) indicating that the reset button has been operated is performed, and since the hopper error (a certain error) has been resolved by operating the reset button, the first notification ( Hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is ended.

According to this example, when an operation (reset button operation) is performed using a certain operating means, a certain error (hopper error) is resolved and the third Since the third notification (reset button operation notification by segment a of the main board display 190) is performed by the notification means (segment a of the main board display 190), the notification inside the casing indicates that a certain error has been resolved. It is possible to notify the operator in an easy-to-understand manner, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the staff at the game parlor.

In addition, in the same state, since the front door 102 continues to be open, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 are activated to notify the opening (blinking red), and the speakers 272 and 277 are activated to notify the opening of the opening notification sound. (voice saying "The door is open") and the main board display 190 continues to notify the door open error (segment e lights up in red).

In addition, the slot machine 100 determines the timing in relation to the timing at which the setting value change is completed (the timing at which a certain operation using the setting key is completed (in this example, the timing at which the setting key is turned back from on to off)). The display is configured to switch to the first display (in this example, the error display shown in FIG. 49(f)) and display the second display (in this example, the demo screen shown in FIG. 50(g)). There is.

In the state shown in FIG. 50(g), since the setting key has been turned back from on to off, the error display (first display) shown in FIG. 49(f) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. In this example, the image containing the string "Hopper error. Please call the staff.") is switched to the error display (second display) shown in Figure 50(g). display the demo screen).

According to this example, since the first display is switched to and the second display is displayed in relation to the timing when the setting value change is completed, it is possible to reliably notify that a certain error has been resolved. .

Furthermore, in the same state, since the reset button was operated to resolve the hopper error (the second condition was met), an error display (in this example, "Hopper Error. Please call an attendant." Display the demo screen instead.

<Modification of hopper error notification 1/Hopper error resolution → front door closing>
The state shown in FIG. 50(h) is a state in which the clerk of the gaming parlor or the like closes the front door 102 after the hopper error has been resolved.

In the same state, since the opening/closing sensor detects the closing of the front door 102, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 output an open notification (blinking red), and the speakers 272 and 277 output an open notification sound ("Door While the main board display 190 ends the door open error notification (segment e lights up in red), the number of stored coins display 125 and the number of dispensed coins display 127 light up. The demonstration screen continues to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and the upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, and performance button 192 are turned on in a performance mode.

<Modified example of error notification of hopper error 1/Hopper error 2nd → Opening of front door>
The state shown in FIG. 50(i) is a state in which the clerk of the gaming parlor or the like opens the front door 102 while the second hopper error has occurred.

In the slot machine 100, when a certain error (in this example, a hopper error) occurs again after it has been resolved, the door body (in this example, the front door 102) is opened in the open state. Even if there is a second notification sound (in this example, an error notification sound (a sound saying "Hopper error. Please call an attendant")), it is configured to be output.

In the state shown in FIG. 50(i), the front door 102 is in an open state because the hopper error (certain error) has occurred again after it has been resolved, but it is not necessary to resolve the hopper error. Audio notification regarding the hopper error is performed by outputting a prompting hopper error notification sound (second notification sound; in this example, a sound saying "Hopper error. Please call the staff").

According to this example, a notification sound (first notification sound) indicating that the door body is in an open state and a notification sound (second notification sound) that prompts the resolution of a certain error are generated depending on the situation of the game machine, etc. It is possible to use different sounds (sounds), increasing convenience.

Note that the hopper error notification sound that prompts the resolution of the hopper error is not limited to notification sounds that include sounds that can identify the type of error (in this example, "hopper error"); for example, sounds that include sounds that can identify the type of error. After outputting a notification sound (e.g., "Please call the staff member"), a notification sound that includes a sound that can identify the type of error (e.g., "Hopper error. Please call the staff member") may be output.

<Modified example 2 of error notification of hopper error>
Next, a second modification of error notification when a hopper error occurs will be described.

FIGS. 50(a) to 51(i) are diagrams showing a second modification of error notification when a hopper error occurs.

The states shown in FIGS. 50(a) to 50(b) are the same as the states described using FIGS. 47(a) to 47(b), and a hopper error (a certain ) has occurred, and a hopper error (certain error) remains when the power is turned on.

<Modified example 2 of error notification of hopper error/Start of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 50(c) is a state in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on and restoration processing such as initial settings has been completed.

The slot machine 100 is configured to start at least a first notification and a second notification when a hopper error (a certain error) occurs.

In the same state, since a hopper error (a certain error) has occurred before the power is turned on, the error code (in this example, "E4") is displayed using the payout number display 127 (first notification means). By displaying the hopper error notification (first notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred, the segment f (second notification means) of the main board display 190 is lit in red. , performs a hopper error notification (second notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred.

At the same time, an error display indicating that a hopper error has occurred is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 (in this example, a character string displaying "Hopper error. Please call an attendant") is displayed. , Since preparations such as initial settings are completed, the storage number display 125 is turned on.

In addition, since the front door 102 is in the open state, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are used to notify the user of the opening (blinking red), and the speakers 272 and 277 are used to notify the user of the open hopper error notification (flashing red). The output of the first notification sound (in this example, a sound that alternately repeats "The door is open" and "Hopper error. Please call the staff") and the output of the main board display 190. Door open error notification (segment e lights up in red).

Note that the first notification sound according to the present invention may be any notification sound that includes at least a notification sound indicating that the door body is in an open state; A notification sound that alternately repeats a voice (e.g., an error notification saying "Hopper error", a notification prompting the door to close "Please close the door", etc.) (e.g. "The door is open" → "Hopper error") ” → “The door is open” → “Hopper error” → etc.), or in addition to the voice “The door is open”, another voice (for example, “The door is open” → “Hopper error” → etc.) It may also be a notification sound (for example, ``The door is open. Please close the door.'') that further includes a notification prompting the user to close the door.

In addition, in this example, if the power is cut off while a certain error occurs and the door body is open when the power is turned on (first case), the first notification sound is output. However, if the door body is in an open state when the power is turned on, the output of the first notification sound may always be started regardless of the presence or absence of a certain error. .

With such a configuration, it is possible to give priority to notification that the door body is in the open state, regardless of whether a certain error has occurred.

<Modified example 2 of error notification of hopper error/Resolution of connection error → End of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 51(d) is a state in which the connection abnormality due to the hopper error has been resolved (the first condition has been satisfied).

The slot machine 100 provides a second notification after the first notification (in this example, the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) and the second notification (in this example, the hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190). When the first condition is met (in this example, when the connection abnormality due to the hopper error is resolved), the first notification (the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is continued, and the first notification is continued. The second notification (hopper error notification by the main board display 190) is configured to end.

In the same state, since the connection abnormality due to the hopper error has been resolved (the first condition has been met), the first notification (hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is continued, while the second notification is continued. The notification (hopper error notification by segment f of the main board display 190) is ended.

According to this example, the first notification is continued even when a part of the cause of a certain error has been resolved, so it is possible to notify that a certain error has not been completely resolved. , the second notification ends, it is possible to notify that the state has changed in relation to a certain error, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the staff of the game parlor and the like.

In addition, in this state, since the front door 102 continues to be open, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 are used to notify the opening (blinking red), and the speakers 272 and 277 output an open hopper error. The output of the notification sound (the first notification sound. In this example, the sound that repeats "The door is open" and the sound that says "Hopper error. Please call the staff") and the main board. The door open error notification (segment e lights up in red) continues on the display 190.

<Modified example of hopper error notification 2/Resolving connection abnormality → Closing the front door>
The state shown in FIG. 51(e) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed by an employee of the gaming parlor after the connection abnormality due to the hopper error is resolved.

In the slot machine 100, the power is cut off while a certain error (in this example, a hopper error) occurs, and when the power is turned on, the door body (in this example, the front door 102) is in an open state. (in the first case), the first notification sound (in this example, a sound that alternately repeats "The door is open" and "Hopper error. Please call the attendant"). The first notification sound changes to the second notification sound (in this example, the error notification sound (A voice saying "Hopper error. Please call the staff.")) is configured to switch to notify the user.

In the state shown in Figure 51(e), the hopper error connection abnormality has been resolved (the first condition has been met), but the reset button has not been operated (the second condition has not been met). ), because the front door 102 changed from the open state to the closed state without resolving the hopper error, the first notification sound (in this example, the sound "The door is open" and the sound "Hopper error. The system switches from the voice that repeats "Please call the staff" to the second notification sound (in this example, the error notification sound (the sound that says "Hopper error. Please call the staff")). is running.

According to this example, when the door changes from the open state to the closed state without resolving a certain error while the first notification sound is being output, the second notification sound is output from the first notification sound. Since the notification is made by switching to the notification sound, it is possible to reliably notify that a certain error has not been resolved.

<Variation example 2 of error notification of hopper error/Front door closing → opening>
The state shown in FIG. 51(f) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened after the connection abnormality due to the hopper error has been resolved and the front door 102 has been closed by the clerk of the gaming parlor.

In the same state, since the front door 102 has changed from the closed state to the open state, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 generate an open notification (blinking red), and the speakers 272 and 277 output an open hopper error notification sound. (The first notification sound. In this example, the sound that repeats "The door is open" and the sound that says "Hopper error. Please call the staff") and the main board display. The door open error notification (red lighting of segment e) by 190 is resumed.

<Modified example 2 of error notification of hopper error/Reset button operation → end first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 51(g) is a state in which the reset button is operated in order to eliminate a hopper error (a certain error) (the second condition is satisfied by the first operation).

In the same state, since the reset button was operated to resolve the hopper error (the second condition was met), segment a (third notification means) of the main board display 190 lights up in red. As a result, a reset button operation notification (third notification) indicating that the reset button has been operated is performed, and since the hopper error (a certain error) has been resolved by operating the reset button, the first notification ( Hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is ended.

According to this example, when an operation (reset button operation) is performed using a certain operating means, a certain error (hopper error) is resolved and the third Since the third notification (reset button operation notification by segment a of the main board display 190) is performed by the notification means (segment a of the main board display 190), the notification inside the casing indicates that a certain error has been resolved. It is possible to notify the operator in an easy-to-understand manner, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the staff at the game parlor.

In addition, the slot machine 100 alternately emits the first notification sound (in this example, the open hopper error notification sound ("The door is open") and the sound "Hopper error. Please call the staff." After a certain error (in this example, a hopper error) has been resolved, if the certain error occurs again (in the second case), the certain error is cleared. (the timing at which the operating means (in this example, the reset button) is operated), the first notification sound changes to the third notification sound (in this example, the open notification sound (“door is open”) It is configured so that the output is switched to (audio)).

According to this example, when a certain error occurs again after a certain error is cleared, the first notification sound is switched to the third notification sound at the timing when the certain error is cleared. Since a certain error that has occurred again is outputted, it is possible to reliably notify that a certain error that has occurred again has been resolved.

In addition, in the same state, since the front door 102 continues to be open, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 are used to notify the opening (blinking red), and the main board display 190 is used to notify the opening of the door. Continue error notification (segment e lights up in red).

Furthermore, in the same state, since the reset button was operated to resolve the hopper error (the second condition was met), an error display (in this example, "Hopper Error. Please call an attendant." Display the demo screen instead.

<Modified example of hopper error notification 2/Resolving hopper error → Closing the front door>
The state shown in FIG. 51(h) is a state in which the clerk of the gaming parlor or the like closes the front door 102 after the hopper error has been resolved.

In the same state, since the opening/closing sensor detects the closing of the front door 102, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 output an open notification (blinking red), and the speakers 272 and 277 output an open notification sound ("Door While the main board display 190 ends the door open error notification (segment e lights up in red), the number of stored coins display 125 and the number of dispensed coins display 127 light up. The demonstration screen continues to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and the upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, and performance button 192 are turned on in a performance mode.

<Modified example 2 of error notification of hopper error/2nd hopper error → Opening of front door>
The state shown in FIG. 51(i) is a state in which the clerk of the game parlor or the like opens the front door 102 while the second hopper error has occurred.

In the slot machine 100, when a certain error (in this example, a hopper error) occurs again after it has been resolved, the door body (in this example, the front door 102) is opened in the open state. Even if there is a second notification sound (in this example, an error notification sound (a sound saying "Hopper error. Please call an attendant")), it is configured to be output.

In the state shown in FIG. 51(i), after the hopper error (certain error) has been resolved, the error has occurred again, so the front door 102 is in an open state. Audio notification regarding the hopper error is performed by outputting a prompting hopper error notification sound (second notification sound; in this example, a sound saying "Hopper error. Please call the staff").

According to this example, a notification sound (first notification sound) indicating that the door body is in an open state and a notification sound (second notification sound) that prompts the resolution of a certain error are generated depending on the situation of the game machine, etc. It is possible to use different sounds (sounds), increasing convenience.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that can be opened and closed, and a notification means ( For example, liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, stored number display 125, speakers 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135 etc.), the notifying means is a means capable of notifying at least a certain error (for example, a hopper error), and the notifying means is a means for executing a notification regarding at least a certain error (for example, a hopper error), and the notifying means is a means for executing sound output means (for example, a speaker). 272, 277), the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a first notification sound, the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a second notification sound, and the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a second notification sound, and the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a second notification sound, and the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a second notification sound. The sound and the second notification sound are at least partially different notification sounds, and the first notification sound is a notification sound indicating that the door body is open (for example, "The door is open. ”), and the second notification sound is a notification sound related to the certain error (for example, a sound saying “Hopper error. Please call an attendant”), The sound output means is a means that may output the first notification sound and the second notification sound in a state where the certain error occurs, and the sound output means may output the first notification sound and the second notification sound. , when the door body is in an open state (for example, the open state shown in FIG. 49(c)) when the power is turned on after the power is cut off while the certain error is occurring (hereinafter referred to as "the open state shown in FIG. 49(c)"). 1), the first notification sound is output, and if the error occurs again after the error is resolved, the door body returns to the open state. (For example, in the open state shown in FIG. 50(i)), the sound output means outputs the second notification sound, and in the first case, the sound output means outputs the first notification sound. The door body changes from the open state to the closed state (for example, if the certain error is not resolved during the output state (for example, the connection abnormality of the hopper error has been resolved, but the reset button has not been operated)) means for switching from the first notification sound to the second notification sound in connection with the change to the closed state shown in FIG. 49(e) (or may provide notification); This is a game machine that features:

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, depending on the situation of the game machine, the notification sound (first notification sound) including at least the notification sound indicating that the door body is in an open state, and the notification sound of a certain error. It is possible to use different notification sounds (second notification sounds) to encourage resolution, which increases convenience. Further, when the power is turned on, the first notification sound can be outputted with priority, and it is possible to give priority to notification that the door body is in the open state. In addition, in connection with the door body changing from an open state to a closed state without resolving a certain error while outputting the first notification sound, the first notification sound changes to the second notification sound. Since the output is switched and output, it is possible to reliably notify that a certain error has not been resolved.

Note that, if the door body is in an open state when the power is turned on, the sound output means always starts outputting the first notification sound regardless of the presence or absence of the certain error. There may be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give priority to notification that the door body is in the open state, regardless of whether a certain error has occurred.

Furthermore, "switching from the first notification sound to the second notification sound for notification" means that after switching the first notification sound to a certain notification sound, the certain notification sound is switched to the second notification sound. For example, after switching the notification sound notifying that the setting value is being changed to the setting change completion notification sound indicating that the setting value change has been completed, The setting change completion notification sound may be switched to a notification sound related to the occurrence of a certain error.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that can be opened and closed, and a notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display). device 157, payout number display 127, stored number display 125, speakers 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), An operating means (for example, a reset button); 272, 277), the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a first notification sound, the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a second notification sound, and the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a second notification sound. , a means capable of outputting a third notification sound (for example, a voice saying "the door is open"), and the first notification sound and the second notification sound are at least partially different notification sounds. Yes, the first notification sound is a notification sound indicating that the door body is open (for example, a sound saying "The door is open" and a sound saying "Hopper error. Please call the staff"). the second notification sound is a notification sound related to the certain error (for example, a sound saying "Hopper error. Please call an attendant"); The sound output means may output the first notification sound and the second notification sound when the certain error occurs, and the sound output means may output the first notification sound and the second notification sound. In the case where the door body is in an open state (for example, the open state shown in FIG. 50(c)) when the power is turned on after the power is cut off while the certain error occurs (hereinafter referred to as " (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the first notification sound is output, and after the certain error is resolved, the certain error occurs again (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"). ) is a means for outputting (or may output) the second notification sound even when the door body is in the open state (for example, the open state shown in FIG. 51(i)). The sound output means is means for switching and outputting the first notification sound to the third notification sound in connection with the elimination of the certain error in the second case, and The gaming machine is characterized in that a certain error is resolved by operating the operating means.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, depending on the situation of the game machine, the notification sound (first notification sound) including at least the notification sound indicating that the door body is in an open state, and the notification sound of a certain error. It is possible to use different notification sounds (second notification sounds) to encourage resolution, which increases convenience. Further, when the power is turned on, the first notification sound can be outputted with priority, and it is possible to give priority to notification that the door body is in the open state. In addition, in the event that a certain error occurs again after a certain error has been resolved, the first notification sound is switched to the third notification sound and output at the timing when the certain error is cleared. , it is possible to reliably notify that a certain error that has occurred again has been resolved.

Further, in the first case, the sound output means detects that the door body changes from an open state to a closed state without resolving the certain error while outputting the first notification sound. In connection with this, the first notification sound may be switched to the second notification sound (for example, a sound saying "Hopper error. Please call an attendant") and outputted.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably notify that a certain error has not been resolved.

Note that, if the door body is in an open state when the power is turned on, the sound output means always starts outputting the first notification sound regardless of the presence or absence of the certain error. There may be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give priority to notification that the door body is in the open state, regardless of whether a certain error has occurred.

Further, the first notification sound and the third notification sound may be the same notification sound, or the first notification sound and the third notification sound may be different notification sounds (or at least one The third notification sound may be a notification sound including at least a notification sound indicating that the door body is in an open state.

Furthermore, "switching from the first notification sound to the third notification sound and outputting it" means that after switching the first notification sound to a certain notification sound, the certain notification sound is switched to the third notification sound. For example, after switching the notification sound notifying that the setting value is being changed to the setting change completion notification sound indicating that the setting value change has been completed, The setting change completion notification sound may be switched to a third notification sound.

<Hopper error notification/resolved by door reset>
Next, we will explain how to resolve a hopper error by resetting the door.

FIGS. 52(a) to 52(f) are diagrams chronologically showing an example of resolving a hopper error by resetting the door. Note that the states shown in FIGS. 52(a) to 52(d) are the same as the states described using FIGS. 47(b) to 47(e), so their explanation will be omitted and e) The subsequent drawings will be explained.

The state shown in FIG. 52(e) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed in order to eliminate a hopper error (a certain error) by resetting the door.

In the same state, since the hopper error (certain error) continues with the front door 102 closed, the output of the open notification sound (sound saying "The door is open") from the speakers 272 and 277 is stopped. At the same time, by outputting a hopper error notification sound (in this example, a sound saying "Hopper error. Please call the staff") that prompts the resolution of the hopper error (certain error), the audio notification regarding the hopper error can be made. Is going.

The state shown in FIG. 52(f) is a state in which the door reset has been performed (the second condition is satisfied by the second operation).

Here, the door reset is an operation of inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 into the door key hole 140 described using FIG. Now, in addition to the operation using the reset button described above (first operation), it is also possible to eliminate the hopper error by resetting the door (second operation).

In this state, since the hopper error (certain error) has been resolved by resetting the door, the first notification (hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is ended.

According to this example, in connection with the execution of the second operation (door reset) that can be executed when the door body (front door 102) is closed, the Since the first notification by the first notification means (the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is completed, it is possible to notify that a certain error has been resolved even if the door is closed. It is possible to notify the operator in an easy-to-understand manner, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the staff at the game parlor.

As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a first notification means (for example, display 127) and a second notification means (for example, segment f of the main board display 190 shown in FIG. 47(d)), wherein the first notification means includes a During at least part of the period in which an error (for example, a hopper error) is occurring (or the entire period in which a certain error is occurring), the first notification (for example, the number of coins to be paid out 127), and the second notification means is a means capable of starting a hopper error notification (via 127), and the second notification means is a means capable of starting a hopper error notification (via 127), and the second notification means is a means capable of starting a hopper error notification according to (all periods), the second notification (for example, hopper error notification by segment f of the main board display 190) can be started, and the certain error is determined when the first condition is satisfied. An error that is cleared when the second condition is met (for example, the reset button is operated or a door reset is performed) after (for example, the connection abnormality of the hopper error is cleared). If the certain error occurs, at least the first notification and the second notification are started, and if the first condition is subsequently satisfied, the first notification is continued, The gaming machine is characterized in that the second notification is terminated.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a first notification means (for example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 47(d) and (e)). and a second notification means (for example, segment f of the main board display 190 shown in FIG. , hopper error) is occurring (or the entire period in which a certain error is occurring), the first notification (for example, a hopper error by the number of dispensed coins display 127) The second notification means is a means capable of starting a notification for at least a part of the period in which the certain error is occurring (or for all of the period in which the certain error is occurring). period), the second notification (for example, hopper error notification by segment f of the main board display 190) can be started, and the certain error is a means that can start a second notification (for example, hopper error notification by segment This is an error that is resolved when the second condition is satisfied (for example, a reset button is operated or a door reset is performed) after the error connection abnormality is resolved. When an error occurs, at least the first notification and the second notification are started, and if the first condition is subsequently met, the first notification is continued while the second notification is started. The gaming machine is characterized in that the certain error is an error related to the provision of gaming value (for example, the payout of game media or the provision of points that allow a game to be played).

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the first notification is continued even when a part of the cause of a certain error has been resolved, so that it is possible to notify that a certain error has not been completely resolved. At the same time, since the second notification is terminated, it is possible to notify that the state has changed in relation to a certain error, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the staff at the game parlor. .

Further, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a first notification means (for example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 45(d) and 45(e)). and a second notification means (for example, segment f of the main board display 190 shown in FIG. , hopper error) during at least part of the period during which the error occurs (or during the entire period during which a certain error occurs), the first error indicating that the certain error occurs. The second notification means is a means that can start notification (for example, hopper error notification by the payout number display 127), and the second notification means is a means that can start a notification (for example, a hopper error notification by the payout number display 127), and the second notification means A second notification indicating that a certain error has occurred (for example, hopper error notification by segment f of the main board display 190) is started during the entire period in which a certain error is occurring. This is a possible means, and the above-mentioned certain error can be solved by performing a certain operation (for example, when the reset button is not operated When the certain error occurs, at least the first notification and the second notification are started, and then the certain error This gaming machine is characterized in that when the cause of the problem is resolved and the certain operation is not performed, the first notification is continued while the second notification is ended.

Further, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a first notification means (for example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 45(d) and 45(e)). and a second notification means (for example, segment f of the main board display 190 shown in FIG. , hopper error) during at least part of the period during which the error occurs (or during the entire period during which a certain error occurs), the first error indicating that the certain error occurs. The second notification means is a means that can start notification (for example, hopper error notification by the payout number display 127), and the second notification means is a means that can start a notification (for example, a hopper error notification by the payout number display 127), and the second notification means A second notification indicating that a certain error has occurred (for example, hopper error notification by segment f of the main board display 190) is started during the entire period in which a certain error is occurring. This is a possible means, and the above-mentioned certain error can be solved by performing a certain operation (for example, when the reset button is not operated When the certain error occurs, at least the first notification and the second notification are started, and then the certain error If the cause of the error is resolved and the certain operation is not performed, the first notification is continued while the second notification is terminated, and the certain error is an error related to the payout of game media. It is a game machine that is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even if the cause of a certain error is eliminated, if a certain operation that can eliminate the certain error is not performed, the certain error will not occur. While continuing the first notification indicating that an error has occurred, the second notification indicating that a certain error has occurred is terminated. It is possible to notify that the cause has been resolved and the state has changed in relation to a certain error, and by continuing the first notification, it is possible to notify that a certain operation that can resolve the certain error has been performed. First, it is possible to notify that a certain error has not been completely resolved, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the staff at the game parlor.

Note that the third notification means (for example, segment a of the main board display 190 shown in FIG. 45(f)) and a certain operation means (for example, a reset button) are provided, and the second notification means and The third notification means is disposed inside the casing of the game machine on the same board, and the certain operation is an operation of the certain operation means (for example, an operation of a reset button). When the certain operation is performed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the third notification means sends a third notification indicating that the certain operation is being performed. It is a means that can start notification (for example, reset button operation notification by segment a of the main board display 190), and in the first case, the certain error is resolved and the first notification ends. There may be.

The display means starts displaying an error when the certain error occurs, and displays the error display until the cause of the certain error is eliminated and the certain operation is performed. It may be a means to do so.

Further, the sound output means is provided with a sound output means, and when the certain error occurs, the sound output means starts sound notification regarding the certain error, and when the cause of the certain error is eliminated and the certain operation is performed. It may also be a means for continuing the audio notification until the notification is received.

It also includes a third notification means (for example, segment a of the main board display 190 shown in FIG. 47(f)) and a certain operation means (for example, a reset button), and the second notification means and The third notification means is disposed inside the casing of the game machine, and the second condition is such that at least an operation by the certain operation means (hereinafter referred to as "first operation"), for example, a reset button is pressed. operation) is performed, and the third notification means is a condition that is satisfied when the first operation is performed (for example, by segment a of the main board display 190). It may also be a means that can start a reset button operation notification).

With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify inside the casing that a certain error has been resolved, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the staff at the game parlor. Further, the third notification may be performed while the second notification is not being performed.

The game machine also includes a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that can be opened and closed, the first notification means is arranged on the front side of the game machine, and the second condition is the first notification means. This condition can also be satisfied by performing a second operation (for example, door reset) that is different from the operation, and the second operation is an operation that can be performed with the door body closed, and the second operation is an operation that can be performed with the door body closed. The first notification may end in connection with the execution of the second operation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the front of the gaming parlor that a certain error has been resolved, even when the door is closed, thereby reducing the work of the gaming parlor staff. Efficiency and convenience can be improved.

The display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the display means starts displaying an error when the certain error occurs, and when the first condition and the second condition are The error display may be displayed until the condition is satisfied (for example, until a reset button is operated).

With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify by the display means that a certain error has been resolved, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the staff of the game parlor and the like.

The sound output means (for example, speakers 272, 277 shown in FIG. 2) is provided, and when the certain error occurs, the sound output means starts sound notification regarding the certain error, and The voice notification may be continued until the condition and the second condition are satisfied (for example, until a reset button is operated).

With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify by the sound output means that a certain error has been resolved, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the staff of the game parlor and the like.

In addition, in order to satisfy the first condition and the second condition, it is necessary to perform operations that can be performed with the door body opened (for example, operation means installed inside the main body 101 (setting key, setting switch). , reset button, etc.) may be required. Further, the first notifying means, the second notifying means, or the third notifying means may be a display means such as a liquid crystal display device, and the first notifying means or the third notifying means may be a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. The second notification means may be arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, or may be arranged inside the casing of the gaming machine.

Further, the first condition or the second condition is a condition that is satisfied when an operation is performed by a certain operating means, a condition that is satisfied when a certain gaming state is entered, and a condition that is satisfied when a reset operation is performed. It may be a condition that is satisfied when the power is cut off and the power is restored, or the like. Further, the reset button may also be used as a setting switch (switch for changing settings). Further, the first notification or the second notification is not limited to a case where a certain error occurs when the power is turned on, but may be a case where a certain error occurs in a normal gaming state. Further, the certain error may be an error related to energization (hopper error), an error related to medals (medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal dispensing errors 1 to 3, overflow error), or the like.

<Hopper error notification/setting change mode>
Next, error notification of a hopper error when transitioning to the setting change mode will be explained.

FIGS. 53(a) to 54(e) are diagrams showing, in chronological order, an example of error notification of a hopper error when transitioning to the setting change mode.

<Power on with hopper error notification/setting change>
The state shown in FIG. 53(a) is a state in which a hopper error (a certain error) has occurred before the power is turned on.

In this state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, notifications are provided by display means (liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, etc.), notifications by light emitting means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.), No notification is provided by the sound output means (speakers 277, 278).

The state shown in FIG. 53(b) is a state in which an employee of the game parlor or the like opens the front door 102, turns the setting key from off to on, and then turns on the power.

In the same state, power is supplied to the slot machine 100 and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 has been opened. 102 is in the open state (open notification), and by lighting segment e of the main board display 190 in red, a door open error notification indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state is issued. Then, the speakers 272 and 277 repeatedly output an open notification sound (in this example, a sound saying "The door is open").

<Go to error notification/setting change mode for hopper error>
The state shown in FIG. 53(c) is a state in which a hopper error (a certain error) has occurred and the setting change mode has been entered.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on after a certain operation (from OFF to ON) has been performed using the setting key (or before a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the power has been turned on), the control unit If you turn the setting key from off to on before checking the on/off status of the Even if an error) has occurred, the state in which the set value can be changed is maintained, and after the state in which the set value can be changed ends, the first notification (in this example, the payout number display 127 Hopper error notification) and a second notification (in this example, hopper error notification by segment f of main board display 190) are started.

In the same state, the hopper error (certain error) continues, but in this example, even if the hopper error (certain error) occurs, the setting change mode (setting value can be changed) is selected. status) is maintained (setting changes have priority over notification of a certain error), a setting changing display (in this example, a setting changing display indicating that setting values can be changed) is maintained. The display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a display including a character string "Change Settings" in the first display mode (in this example, a display mode in which a character string "Settings Changing" is placed in the center of a yellow background image). to be displayed.

According to this example, since setting changes are given priority over notification of a certain error, setting changes can be completed reliably, and forgetting to change settings can be prevented. Further, since the first notification and the second notification are performed after the setting change is completed, it is possible to reliably deal with errors after the setting change is completed.

In addition, since the first notification continues even if a part of the cause of an error has been resolved, it is possible to notify that a certain error has not been completely resolved, and the second notification can be made. Since the notification is terminated, it is possible to notify that the state has changed in relation to a certain error, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the store staff at the game parlor.

Furthermore, in the slot machine 100, when the set value is changeable and the door body is open (first case), a notification sound indicating that the set value is changeable is output. It does not start, but starts outputting a notification sound indicating that the door body is in the open state.

The state shown in FIG. 53(c) is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, so the setting change notification sound (in this example, " The speaker 272, 277 outputs an opening notification sound (in this example, a sound saying "The door is open") indicating that the door is open without starting to output the sound "Settings are being changed." Output from.

According to this example, when the door is opened during the setting change, the notification sound indicating the door opening is output while the notification sound indicating the setting change is not output, so the notification sound indicating the door opening can be highlighted. A clerk at a game parlor or the like can reliably know that the door is open.

Additionally, when the door is opened while the settings are being changed, a notification sound indicating that the settings are being changed is not outputted, but a display indicating that the settings are being changed is displayed, so store staff at game parlors can visually ensure that the settings are being changed through the display. can be grasped.

<Hopper error notification/setting change mode (door open → door closed)>
The state shown in FIG. 53(d) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state while the setting key is kept on after shifting to the setting change mode.

In the same state, the hopper error (certain error) continues, but in this example, even if the hopper error (certain error) occurs, the setting change mode (setting value can be changed) is selected. status) is maintained (setting changes have priority over notification of a certain error), a setting changing display (in this example, a setting changing display indicating that setting values can be changed) is maintained. The second display mode (in this example, the text string "Changing Settings" is placed in the upper left of the green background image), and the setting screen (displaying the character string "Change Settings") that allows you to start the operation check is displayed. It is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in a display mode (including an operation check setting screen).

In addition, in the same state, since the front door 102 is closed in the setting change mode, a setting change notification sound (in this example, "Settings are being changed") indicates that the setting value can be changed. !” is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

As explained using FIGS. 53(c) and (d), according to this example, when the door is open during the setting change, the notification sound during the setting change is not output, but when the door is closed during the setting change. In the state, a notification sound is output when the settings are being changed, so the door open and door closed states can be linked with the presence or absence of the notification sound when the settings are being changed, providing a game machine with unique notification means. can do. In addition, when the door is open, a notification sound alerts the gaming parlor that the door is open while settings are being changed (settings may have been changed or fraudulent activity may have occurred). It is possible to reliably notify the store clerk, etc., and when the door is closed, the notification sound can reliably notify the store clerk, etc. of the game parlor that the setting change has not been completed.

Further, in the setting change mode of this example, a setting screen (operation check setting screen) on which an operation check can be started is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. By operating the cross key 193 (operating means), a clerk at the game parlor or the like can arbitrarily select any one of the speaker check, accessory check, and performance button check on the setting screen. Note that it goes without saying that the items that can be selected in the setting change mode are not limited to this example.

<Hopper error notification/setting change mode (door closed → door open)>
The state shown in FIG. 53(e) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state while the setting key is kept on after shifting to the setting change mode.

In this state, since the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, a setting change notification sound (in this example, "Settings are being changed") indicates that the setting values can be changed. The speaker 272, 277 outputs an opening notification sound (in this example, the sound "The door is open") indicating that the door body is open, without starting to output the sound. A lamp 142, a side lamp 144, and a performance button 192 are blinked in red to notify that the front door 102 is in an open state (open notification).

Note that the production button 192 is a means that functions as an operation means for various settings, etc., and also a means that functions as a notification means that can make notifications. operation will be disabled.

In addition, since this state is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the settings change mode, the display including the setting change in progress display (in this example, the display of the character string "Settings changing") is It is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in one display mode (in this example, a display mode in which a character string "settings changing" is placed in the center of a yellow background image).

<Hopper error notification/setting change mode (door open)/setting change operation>
The state shown in FIG. 53(f) is a state in which the setting value is being changed, and the state shown in FIG. 54(a) is a state in which the setting value has been determined and the setting change has been completed.

In the state shown in FIG. 53(f), while displaying the set value on the payout number display 127, each time a press operation by the operating means (setting switch) is detected, the currently set set value 1 to 6 is displayed. The setting value is changed from setting 1 to setting 6 by adding 1 to the setting value, and when a push operation by the operating means (in this example, the start lever 135) is received, the setting value is fixed to setting 6. do.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 54(a), since the setting value has been finalized and the setting change has been completed, the setting changing display is terminated, and the setting change indicating that the setting value has been finalized and the setting change has been completed. A completion display (in this example, a screen in which a character string "setting change completed" is placed in the center of a yellow background image) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

<Hopper error notification/setting change mode (door open)/end of setting change>
The state shown in FIG. 54(b) is a state in which a certain operation using the setting key is canceled (the setting key is removed after the setting key is turned from on to off) and the setting change mode has ended.

In this state, the hopper error (certain error) continues and the setting change mode (state where the setting value can be changed) has ended, so the first notification (in this example, the number of dispensed coins display) 127) and a second notification (in this example, the hopper error notification using segment f of the main board display 190).

The subsequent states shown in FIGS. 54(b) to 54(d) are the same as the states described using FIGS. 47(d) to 48(a), so a detailed explanation will be omitted. In the state shown in 54(b), the hopper error (certain error) that occurred before the power was turned on continues, so the error code (in this example) is displayed using the payout number display 127 (first notification means). In this case, by displaying "E4"), a hopper error notification (first notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred is performed, and at the same time, segment f (second notification means) of the main board display 190 is displayed. By lighting up in red, a hopper error notification (second notification) is performed to indicate that a hopper error has occurred.

At the same time, an error display indicating that a hopper error has occurred is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 (in this example, a character string displaying "Hopper error. Please call an attendant") is displayed. , Since preparations such as initial settings are completed, the storage number display 125 is turned on.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 54(c), since the connection abnormality due to the hopper error has been resolved (the first condition has been met), the first notification (hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is performed. While continuing, the second notification (hopper error notification by segment f of the main board display 190) is ended.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 54(d), since the reset button was operated to eliminate the hopper error (the second condition was met), segment a (third The reset button operation notification (third notification) is performed by lighting up the reset button (notification means) in red to indicate that the reset button has been operated, and the hopper error (certain error) has been resolved by operating the reset button. Therefore, the first notification (hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is ended.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 54(e), since the opening/closing sensor detects the closing of the front door 102, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the production button 192 output an open notification (flashing red), and the speaker 272, 277 and the main board display 190 terminates the door open error notification (segment e lights up in red), while the storage number display 125, In addition to continuing to light up the payout number display 127 and displaying the normal screen on the liquid crystal display device 157, the upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, and performance button 192 are lit in a performance mode to indicate that the normal game can be started. Make announcements.

As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a first notification means (for example, display 127), a second notification means (for example, segment f of the main board display 190 shown in FIG. 47(d)), and a setting means capable of setting one of the plurality of setting values. , when the power is turned on with a certain operation performed using a setting key, the setting value shifts to a changeable state, and the first notification means: During at least part of the period in which a certain error (for example, a hopper error) is occurring (or the entire period in which a certain error is occurring), the first notification (for example, the number of coins to be paid out is displayed) hopper error notification by the device 127), and the second notification means is capable of starting a hopper error notification by the device 127 for at least a part of the period during which the certain error occurs (or during the period during which the certain error occurs). The means is capable of starting a second notification (for example, hopper error notification by segment f of the main board display 190) during all periods during which the first condition is satisfied. An error that is resolved when the second condition is met (for example, the reset button is operated or a door reset is performed) after the hopper error connection error is resolved. and when the certain error occurs, at least the first notification and the second notification are started, and if the first condition is subsequently satisfied, the first notification is continued. , when the second notification is finished, the power is cut off while the certain error is occurring, and the power is turned on while the certain operation is performed using the setting key, the setting value is The gaming machine is characterized in that the first notification and the second notification are started after the setting value is changed to a changeable state and the set value is changed.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, setting changes are given priority over notification of a certain error, so that setting changes can be completed reliably, and forgetting to change settings can be prevented. Further, since the first notification and the second notification are performed after the setting change is completed, it is possible to reliably deal with errors after the setting change is completed.

In addition, since the first notification continues even if a part of the cause of an error has been resolved, it is possible to notify that a certain error has not been completely resolved, and the second notification can be made. Since the notification is terminated, it is possible to notify that the state has changed in relation to a certain error, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the store staff at the game parlor.

Further, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a first notification means (for example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 45(d) and 45(e)). , a second notification means (for example, segment f of the main board display 190 shown in FIG. 45(d)), and a setting means capable of setting one of the plurality of setting values. When the game machine is powered on while an operation using a setting key (hereinafter referred to as a "setting operation") is performed, the setting value is changed to a state where the setting value can be changed, and the first setting value is changed. The notification means indicates that a certain error (for example, a hopper error) is occurring during at least a part of the period (or the entire period during which the certain error is occurring). It is a means that can start a first notification indicating that a certain error has occurred (for example, a hopper error notification by the payout number display 127), and the second notification means is a means that can start a hopper error notification indicating that a certain error has occurred. (or the entire period during which the certain error is occurring), a second notification indicating that the certain error has occurred (for example, the main board display 190 hopper error notification by segment f), and the certain error is a means that can start a certain operation after the cause of the certain error has been resolved (for example, the connection abnormality of the hopper error has been resolved). This is an error that is resolved when a certain error is performed (for example, a reset button is operated), and when the certain error occurs, at least the first notification and the second notification are started, and then the first notification and the second notification are started. If the cause of the error is resolved and the certain operation is not performed, the first notification is continued, the second notification is ended, and the certain operation is not performed. When the power is turned off and the power is turned on with the setting operation performed, the setting value is changed to a state where the setting value can be changed, and at least the second notification is started after the setting value is changed. This game machine is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, setting changes are given priority over notification of a certain error, so that setting changes can be completed reliably, and forgetting to change settings can be prevented. Further, since the first notification and the second notification are performed after the setting change is completed, it is possible to reliably deal with errors after the setting change is completed.

Furthermore, even if the cause of a certain error has been resolved, if a certain operation that could have resolved the certain error has not been performed, the first indication that the certain error has occurred will be displayed. While continuing the notification, the second notification indicating that a certain error has occurred is terminated. It is possible to notify that a related state has changed, and by continuing the first notification, a certain operation that can eliminate a certain error has not been performed, and a certain error has been completely resolved. It is possible to notify that something is not being done, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of store staff at the game parlor.

Note that the third notification means (for example, segment a of the main board display 190 shown in FIG. 45(f)) and a certain operation means (for example, a reset button) are provided, and the second notification means and The third notification means is disposed inside the casing of the game machine on the same board, and the certain operation is an operation of the certain operation means (for example, an operation of a reset button). When the certain operation is performed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the third notification means sends a third notification indicating that the certain operation is being performed. It is a means that can start notification (for example, reset button operation notification by segment a of the main board display 190), and in the first case, the certain error is resolved and the first notification ends. There may be.

The display means starts displaying an error when the certain error occurs, and displays the error display until the cause of the certain error is eliminated and the certain operation is performed. It may be a means to do so.

Further, the sound output means is provided with a sound output means, and when the certain error occurs, the sound output means starts sound notification regarding the certain error, and when the cause of the certain error is eliminated and the certain operation is performed. It may also be a means for continuing the audio notification until the notification is received.

<Modified example of error notification of hopper error/setting change mode>
Next, error notification of a hopper error when transitioning to the setting change mode will be explained.

FIGS. 55(a) to 56(e) are diagrams chronologically showing modified examples of error notification of a hopper error when transitioning to the setting change mode.

<Modified example of error notification of hopper error/Power on with setting change>
The state shown in FIG. 55(a) is a state in which a hopper error (a certain error) occurs before the power is turned on, and the hopper error (a certain error) remains when the power is turned on.

In this state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, notifications are provided by display means (liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, etc.), notifications by light emitting means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.), No notification is provided by the sound output means (speakers 277, 278).

The state shown in FIG. 55(b) is a state in which the store clerk or the like at the game parlor opens the front door 102, turns the setting key from off to on, and then turns on the power.

In the same state, power is supplied to the slot machine 100 and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 has been opened. 102 is in the open state (open notification), and by lighting segment e of the main board display 190 in red, a door open error notification indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state is issued. Then, the speakers 272 and 277 repeatedly output an open notification sound (first notification sound, in this example, a sound saying "The door is open").

Note that the first notification sound according to the present invention may be any notification sound that includes at least a notification sound indicating that the door body is in an open state; A notification sound that alternately repeats a voice (e.g., an error notification saying "Hopper error", a notification prompting the door to close "Please close the door", etc.) (e.g. "The door is open" → "Hopper error") ” → “The door is open” → “Hopper error” → etc.), or in addition to the voice “The door is open”, another voice (for example, “The door is open” → “Hopper error” → etc.) It may also be a notification sound (for example, ``The door is open. Please close the door.'') that further includes a notification prompting the user to close the door.

In addition, in this example, if the power is cut off while a certain error occurs and the door body is open when the power is turned on (first case), the first notification sound is output. However, if the door body is in an open state when the power is turned on, the output of the first notification sound may always be started regardless of the presence or absence of a certain error. .

With such a configuration, it is possible to give priority to notification that the door body is in the open state, regardless of whether a certain error has occurred.

<Modified example of error notification of hopper error/Move to setting change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 55(c) is a state in which a hopper error (certain error) has occurred and the setting change mode has been entered.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on after a certain operation (from OFF to ON) has been performed using the setting key (or before a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the power has been turned on), the control unit If you turn the setting key from off to on before checking the on/off status of the Even if an error) has occurred, the state in which the set value can be changed is maintained, and after the state in which the set value can be changed ends, the first notification (in this example, the payout number display 127 Hopper error notification) and a second notification (in this example, hopper error notification by segment f of main board display 190) are started.

In the same state, the hopper error (certain error) continues, but in this example, even if the hopper error (certain error) occurs, the setting change mode (setting value can be changed) is selected. status) is maintained (setting changes have priority over notification of a certain error), a setting changing display (in this example, a setting changing display indicating that setting values can be changed) is maintained. The display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a display including a character string "Change Settings" in the first display mode (in this example, a display mode in which a character string "Settings Changing" is placed in the center of a yellow background image). to be displayed.

According to this example, since setting changes are given priority over notification of a certain error, setting changes can be completed reliably, and forgetting to change settings can be prevented. Further, since the first notification and the second notification are performed after the setting change is completed, it is possible to reliably deal with errors after the setting change is completed.

In addition, since the first notification continues even if a part of the cause of an error has been resolved, it is possible to notify that a certain error has not been completely resolved, and the second notification can be made. Since the notification is terminated, it is possible to notify that the state has changed in relation to a certain error, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the store staff at the game parlor.

Furthermore, in the slot machine 100, when the set value is changeable and the door body is open (first case), a notification sound indicating that the set value is changeable is output. It does not start, but starts outputting a notification sound indicating that the door body is in the open state.

The state shown in FIG. 55(c) is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, so the setting change notification sound (in this example, " The opening notification sound (the first notification sound, which indicates that the door is open) without starting the output of the sound "Settings are being changed." In this example, the sound "The door is open." ) is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

According to this example, when the door is opened during the setting change, the notification sound indicating the door opening is output while the notification sound indicating the setting change is not output, so the notification sound indicating the door opening can be highlighted. A clerk at a game parlor or the like can reliably know that the door is open.

Additionally, when the door is opened while the settings are being changed, a notification sound indicating that the settings are being changed is not outputted, but a display indicating that the settings are being changed is displayed, so store staff at game parlors can visually ensure that the settings are being changed through the display. can be grasped.

<Modified example of error notification of hopper error/setting change mode (door open → door closed)>
The state shown in FIG. 55(d) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state while the setting key is kept on after shifting to the setting change mode.

In the same state, the hopper error (certain error) continues, but in this example, even if the hopper error (certain error) occurs, the setting change mode (setting value can be changed) is selected. status) is maintained (setting changes have priority over notification of a certain error), a setting changing display (in this example, a setting changing display indicating that setting values can be changed) is maintained. The second display mode (in this example, the text string "Changing Settings" is placed in the upper left of the green background image), and the setting screen (displaying the character string "Change Settings") that allows you to start the operation check is displayed. It is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in a display mode (including an operation check setting screen).

In addition, in the same state, since the front door 102 is closed in the setting change mode, a setting change notification sound (in this example, "Settings are being changed") indicates that the setting value can be changed. !” is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

As explained using FIGS. 55(c) and 55(d), according to this example, when the door is open during the setting change, the notification sound during the setting change is not output, but when the door is closed during the setting change. In the state, a notification sound is output when the settings are being changed, so the door open and door closed states can be linked with the presence or absence of the notification sound when the settings are being changed, providing a game machine with unique notification means. can do. In addition, when the door is open, a notification sound alerts the gaming parlor that the door is open while settings are being changed (settings may have been changed or fraudulent activity may have occurred). It is possible to reliably notify the store clerk, etc., and when the door is closed, the notification sound can reliably notify the store clerk, etc. of the game parlor that the setting change has not been completed.

Further, in the setting change mode of this example, a setting screen (operation check setting screen) on which an operation check can be started is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. By operating the cross key 193 (operating means), a clerk at the game parlor or the like can arbitrarily select any one of the speaker check, accessory check, and performance button check on the setting screen. Note that it goes without saying that the items that can be selected in the setting change mode are not limited to this example.

<Modified example of error notification of hopper error/setting change mode (door closed → door open)>
The state shown in FIG. 55(e) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state while the setting key is kept on after shifting to the setting change mode.

In this state, since the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, a setting change notification sound (in this example, "Settings are being changed") indicates that the setting value can be changed. The speaker 272, 277 outputs an opening notification sound (the first notification sound, in this example, the sound "The door is open") indicating that the door body is in the open state without starting to output the sound (audio). At the same time, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 flash in red to notify that the front door 102 is open (open notification).

Note that the production button 192 is a means that functions as an operation means for various settings, etc., and also a means that functions as a notification means that can make notifications. operation will be disabled.

In addition, since this state is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the settings change mode, the display including the setting change in progress display (in this example, the display of the character string "Settings changing") is It is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in one display mode (in this example, a display mode in which a character string "settings changing" is placed in the center of a yellow background image).

<Modified example of error notification of hopper error/setting change mode/setting change operation>
The state shown in FIG. 55(f) is a state in which the setting value is being changed, and the state shown in FIG. 56(a) is a state in which the setting value has been determined and the setting change has been completed.

In the state shown in FIG. 55(f), while displaying the set value on the payout number display 127, each time a press operation by the operating means (setting switch) is detected, the currently set set value 1 to 6 is displayed. The setting value is changed from setting 1 to setting 6 by adding 1 to the setting value, and when a push operation by the operating means (in this example, the start lever 135) is received, the setting value is fixed to setting 6. do.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 56(a), since the setting value has been finalized and the setting change has been completed, the setting change in progress display is terminated, and the setting change indicating that the setting value has been finalized and the setting change has been completed. A completion display (a first display; in this example, a screen in which a character string "setting change completed" is placed in the center of a yellow background image) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

In addition, when the change of the setting value is completed (in the first case), the slot machine 100 generates a second notification sound (in this example, "The door is closed") as a notification of a certain error (in this example, a hopper error). In the first case, the notification that the setting value change has been completed is not executed. It is configured as follows.

According to this example, when the setting value change is completed, the second notification sound is output as a notification of a certain error without notifying that the setting value change has been completed. It is possible to reliably notify that the issue has not been resolved.

Note that the "second notification sound" according to the present invention may be "a notification sound related to the occurrence of a certain error, which is at least partially different from the first notification sound". , for example, alternately repeating the sound "The door is open" and other sounds (for example, an error notification "Hopper error", a notification urging the door to close "Please close the door", etc.) It may be a notification sound (for example, "The door is open" → "Hopper error" → "The door is open" → "Hopper error" →... etc.), or a voice saying "Hopper error" In addition to this, the notification sound (e.g., "Hopper error. Please call the staff member") further includes other sounds (e.g., "Please call the staff member", which prompts the user to resolve the error). Good too.

Further, the "second notification sound" according to the present invention is not limited to a notification sound that includes a sound that can specify the type of error (in this example, "hopper error"), but for example, the "second notification sound" that does not specify the type of error. After outputting a possible notification sound (e.g., "Please call the staff member"), output a notification sound that includes a sound that can identify the type of error (e.g., "Hopper error. Please call the staff member"). ) may be output.

Further, the "second notification sound" according to the present invention is a display that can identify the type of error by including the name of the error such as "medal error" or "door is open". Alternatively, the display may include an error code such as "E4" so that the type of error can be specified.

<Modified example of error notification of hopper error/setting change mode/end of setting change>
The state shown in FIG. 56(b) is a state in which a certain operation using the setting key has been completed (the setting key has been turned back from on to off) and the setting change mode has ended.

The subsequent states shown in FIGS. 56(b) to 56(d) are the same as those described using FIGS. 47(d) to 48(a), so a detailed explanation will be omitted, but In the state shown in 56(b), since the hopper error (certain error) that occurred before the power was turned on continues, the error code (in this example) is displayed using the payout number display 127 (first notification means). In this case, by displaying "E4"), a hopper error notification (first notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred is performed, and at the same time, segment f (second notification means) of the main board display 190 is displayed. By lighting up in red, a hopper error notification (second notification) is performed to indicate that a hopper error has occurred.

At the same time, an error display indicating that a hopper error has occurred is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 (in this example, a character string displaying "Hopper error. Please call an attendant") is displayed. , Since preparations such as initial settings are completed, the storage number display 125 is turned on.

In addition, the slot machine 100 detects a certain error at the timing when the setting value change is completed and a certain operation using the setting key is completed (in this example, when the setting key is turned back from on to off). The system is configured to output a second notification sound (in this example, a sound that alternates between "The door is open" and "Hopper error. Please call the attendant") is output as a notification. has been done.

In the state shown in FIG. 56(b), the setting value has been changed and the setting key has been turned back from on to off, so the second notification sound (in this example, Outputs a voice that alternately repeats "The door is open" and "Hopper error. Please call the attendant."

According to this example, when the change of the setting value is completed, the notification that the change of the setting value is completed is not executed, and the notification of a certain error is issued at the timing when a certain operation using the setting key is completed. Since the second notification sound is output, it is possible to reliably notify that a certain error has not been resolved at the timing when a certain operation using a setting key is completed.

Note that the "timing at which a certain operation using a setting key ends" according to the present invention is not limited to the timing at which the setting key is turned back from on to off; for example, when the setting key is turned back from on to off. The timing may be the timing when the setting key is later removed from the keyhole, or the timing when the control means detects that the setting key has been turned from on to off.

In addition, the slot machine 100 determines the timing in relation to the timing at which the setting value change is completed (the timing at which a certain operation using the setting key is completed (in this example, the timing at which the setting key is turned back from on to off)). The screen is configured to switch to the first display (the setting change completion display shown in FIG. 56(a)) and display the second display (the error display shown in FIG. 56(b)).

In the state shown in FIG. 56(b), since the setting key has been turned back from on to off, the setting change completion display (the first display (in this example, an image containing the character string "Settings change complete"), and the error display shown in Figure 56(b) (second display; in this example, "Hopper error. Please call staff. .”) is displayed.

According to this example, since the first display is switched to and the second display is displayed in relation to the timing at which the setting value change is completed, it is possible to reliably notify that the setting value change has been completed. .

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 56(c), since the connection abnormality due to the hopper error has been resolved (the first condition has been met), the first notification (hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is performed. While continuing, the second notification (hopper error notification by segment f of the main board display 190) is ended.

In addition, in this state, since the front door 102 continues to be open, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 are used to notify the opening (blinking red), and the speakers 272 and 277 output an open hopper error. The output of the notification sound (the first notification sound. In this example, the sound that repeats "The door is open" and the sound that says "Hopper error. Please call the staff") and the main board. The door open error notification (segment e lights up in red) continues on the display 190.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 56(d), since the reset button was operated to eliminate the hopper error (the second condition was met), segment a (third The reset button operation notification (third notification) is performed by lighting up the reset button (notification means) in red to indicate that the reset button has been operated, and the hopper error (certain error) has been resolved by operating the reset button. Therefore, the first notification (hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is ended.

In addition, the slot machine 100 alternately emits the first notification sound (in this example, the open hopper error notification sound ("The door is open") and the sound "Hopper error. Please call the staff." When a certain error (in this example, a hopper error) is resolved (at the timing when the operating means (in this example, the reset button) is operated), the first notification sound is output. It is configured to switch to and output a third notification sound (in this example, an open notification sound (a sound saying "the door is open")).

According to this example, since the first notification sound is switched to the third notification sound and output at the timing when a certain error is resolved, it is possible to reliably notify that a certain error that has occurred again has been resolved. Can be done.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 56(e), since the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the effect button 192 output an open notification (flashing red), and the speaker 272, 277 and the main board display 190 terminates the door open error notification (segment e lights up in red), while the storage number display 125, In addition to continuing to light up the payout number display 127 and displaying the normal screen on the liquid crystal display device 157, the upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, and performance button 192 are lit in a performance mode to indicate that the normal game can be started. Make announcements.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that can be opened and closed, and a notification means ( For example, liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, stored number display 125, speakers 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135 etc.) and a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values, the notifying means being a means capable of notifying at least a certain error. , the notification means includes a sound output means (for example, speakers 272, 277), the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a first notification sound, and the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a second notification sound. the first notification sound and the second notification sound are at least partially different notification sounds, and the first notification sound indicates that the door body is in an open state. The second notification sound includes at least a notification sound indicating the certain error (for example, a sound saying "The door is open"), and the second notification sound is a notification sound related to the certain error (for example, "Hopper error"). Please call the staff member), and the sound output means outputs the first notification sound and outputs the second notification sound when the certain error occurs. If the power is turned on with a certain operation performed using the setting key, the setting value can be changed, and the setting value can be changed even if the certain error has occurred. If the power is turned on after the power is turned off and the certain operation is performed, and the certain error is not resolved and the door is in an open state, the setting value cannot be changed. is executed, the sound output means outputs the first notification sound, and the sound output means outputs the second notification sound when the change of the setting value is completed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"). The game machine is a means for outputting a notification sound, and the sound output means is a means that does not notify that the change of the setting value has been completed in the first case.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, depending on the situation of the game machine, the notification sound (first notification sound) including at least the notification sound indicating that the door body is in an open state, and the notification sound of a certain error. It is possible to use different notification sounds (second notification sounds) to encourage resolution, which increases convenience. In addition, if the power is turned on while a certain operation is being performed, a certain error has not been resolved, and the door body is in an open state, it is recommended to change the setting value rather than the certain error. Therefore, it is possible to give priority to changing the setting value over an error, but when the change of the setting value is completed, it is not notified that the change of the setting value has been completed. Since the second notification sound is output as an error notification, it is possible to reliably notify that a certain error has not been resolved.

Note that, if the door body is in an open state when the power is turned on, the sound output means always starts outputting the first notification sound regardless of the presence or absence of the certain error. There may be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give priority to notification that the door body is in the open state, regardless of whether a certain error has occurred.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that can be opened and closed, and a notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display). device 157, payout number display 127, stored number display 125, speakers 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values, the notifying means being a means capable of notifying at least a certain error, and the notifying means includes a sound output means (for example, speakers 272, 277), the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a first notification sound, and the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a second notification sound. and the first notification sound and the second notification sound are notification sounds that are at least partially different, and the first notification sound is a notification sound indicating that the door body is in an open state. The second notification sound is a notification sound that includes at least a sound related to the certain error (for example, a sound that says "The door is open." The sound output means may output the first notification sound or the second notification sound when the certain error occurs. means, when the power is turned on with a certain operation performed by a setting key, the setting value becomes changeable, and the power is cut off in a state where the certain error occurs, If the power is turned on while the certain operation has been performed, the certain error has not been resolved, and the door body is in an open state, the setting value is changed and the setting value is changed. The sound output means outputs the first notification sound, and the sound output means outputs the first notification sound in connection with the completion of changing the setting value and the completion of the certain operation using the setting key (for example, when the setting key The second notification sound is output at a timing when the setting key is removed from the keyhole after the setting key is operated from on to off, or at a timing when the setting key is operated from on to off. It is a stand.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, depending on the situation of the game machine, the notification sound (first notification sound) including at least the notification sound indicating that the door body is in an open state, and the notification sound of a certain error. It is possible to use different notification sounds (second notification sounds) to encourage resolution, which increases convenience. In addition, if the power is turned on while a certain operation is being performed, a certain error has not been resolved, and the door body is in an open state, it is recommended to change the setting value rather than the certain error. Therefore, it is possible to execute setting value changes with priority over errors, but when the setting value change is completed, it is not notified that the setting value change is completed, and the setting key Since a second notification sound is output as a notification of a certain error at the timing when a certain operation using the setting key is completed, it is possible to make sure that a certain error has not been resolved at the timing when a certain operation using the setting key is completed. Can be notified.

Note that, if the door body is in an open state when the power is turned on, the sound output means always starts outputting the first notification sound regardless of the presence or absence of the certain error. There may be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give priority to notification that the door body is in the open state, regardless of whether a certain error has occurred.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that can be opened and closed, and a notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display). device 157, payout number display 127, stored number display 125, speakers 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), A game machine comprising a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values, and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), wherein the notification means is configured to display information regarding at least a certain error. The notification means includes a sound output means (for example, speakers 272, 277), the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a first notification sound, and the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a first notification sound. The means is a means capable of outputting a second notification sound, the first notification sound and the second notification sound are notification sounds that are at least partially different, and the first notification sound is different from the second notification sound. The notification sound includes at least a notification sound indicating that the door body is in an open state (for example, a sound saying "The door is open"), and the second notification sound is a notification sound related to the certain error. (For example, a voice saying "Hopper error. Please call an attendant"), and the sound output means outputs the first notification sound in a state where the certain error occurs; It is a means that may output the second notification sound, and when the power is turned on with a certain operation using the setting key, the setting value becomes changeable, and the second notification sound is output. If the power is turned off while an error has occurred, the power is turned on while the certain operation is being performed, the certain error has not been resolved, and the door body is in an open state ( (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the change in the set value is executed and the sound output means outputs the first notification sound, and the display means outputs the first notification sound in the first case. means for displaying (or may display) one display (for example, the setting change completion display shown in FIG. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is means for switching to the first display and displaying (or may display) a second display (for example, the error display shown in FIG. 56(b)). .

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, depending on the situation of the game machine, the notification sound (first notification sound) including at least the notification sound indicating that the door body is in an open state, and the notification sound of a certain error. It is possible to use different notification sounds (second notification sounds) to encourage resolution, which increases convenience. In addition, if the power is turned on while a certain operation is being performed, a certain error has not been resolved, and the door body is in an open state, it is recommended to change the setting value rather than the certain error. In order to prioritize, it is possible to execute setting value changes with priority over errors, while switching to the first display and displaying the second display in relation to the timing when the setting value change is completed. , it is possible to reliably notify that the setting value change has been completed.

In addition, in connection with the completion of the certain operation using the setting key (for example, at the timing when the setting key is removed from the keyhole after operating the setting key from on to off, or when the setting key is turned from on to off) The change of the setting value may be completed at the timing of the operation. Further, the first display may be a display suggesting that the setting value is being changed (for example, the setting change completion display shown in FIG. 56(a)), and the second display may be The display may be related to the certain error (for example, the error display shown in FIG. 56(b)).

Further, the sound output means always starts outputting the first notification sound when the door body is in an open state when the power is turned on, regardless of the presence or absence of the certain error. There may be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give priority to notification that the door body is in the open state, regardless of whether a certain error has occurred.

Furthermore, "switching to the first display and displaying a second display" means that after switching the first display to a certain display, the certain display is switched to the second display. For example, after switching a display indicating that the setting value is being changed to a setting change completion display indicating that the setting value change has been completed, the setting change completion display may be changed to a setting change completion display indicating that the setting value has been changed. You may switch to display.

<Hopper error notification/setting confirmation mode>
Next, error notification of a hopper error when transitioning to the setting confirmation mode will be explained.

FIGS. 57(a) to 58(a) are diagrams showing, in chronological order, an example of error notification of a hopper error when transitioning to the setting confirmation mode.

<Hopper error notification/power on>
The state shown in FIG. 57(a) is a state in which a hopper error (a certain error) has occurred before the power is turned on.

In this state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, notifications are provided by display means (liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, etc.), notifications by light emitting means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.), No notification is provided by the sound output means (speakers 277, 278).

The state shown in FIG. 57(b) is a state in which an employee of the game parlor or the like opens the front door 102 and operates the power switch disposed inside the main body 101 to turn on the power.

In the same state, power is supplied to the slot machine 100 and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 has been opened. 102 is in the open state (open notification), and by lighting segment e of the main board display 190 in red, a door open error notification indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state is issued. Then, the speakers 272 and 277 repeatedly output an open notification sound (in this example, a sound saying "The door is open").

<Hopper error notification/start of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 57(c) is a state in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, and preparations such as initial settings have been completed.

The state shown in FIG. 57(c) is the same as the state explained using FIG. 47(d), so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Error) continues, so by displaying an error code (in this example, "E4") using the payout number display 127 (first notification means), it is possible to confirm that a hopper error has occurred. A hopper error notification (first notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred is performed, and segment f (second notification means) of the main board display 190 is lit in red to indicate that a hopper error has occurred. Make a notification (second notification).

At the same time, an error display indicating that a hopper error has occurred is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 (in this example, a character string displaying "Hopper error. Please call an attendant") is displayed. , Since preparations such as initial settings are completed, the storage number display 125 is turned on.

<Hopper error notification/door opening → Operate setting key after power is turned on>
The state shown in FIG. 57(d) is a state in which the setting key is turned on from off while the hopper error (a certain error) that occurred before the power was turned on continues.

In the slot machine 100, if a certain error (in this example, a hopper error) occurs when a certain operation is performed using a setting key (operation to turn on from off) after the power is turned on, The certain error is prioritized and the first notification (in this example, the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) and the second notification (in this example, the hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190). is executed and a certain error is resolved, it is possible to shift to a state where the setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode).

In the state shown in FIG. 57(d), a certain operation (turning from off to on) was performed using the setting key, but in this example, a certain operation (turning from off to on) using the setting key was performed. If a hopper error (certain error) occurs when the hopper error (certain error) occurs, the hopper error (certain error) is prioritized, so the setting value can be confirmed without changing to the state (setting confirmation mode). , Hopper error notification (first notification) by the payout number display 127 and hopper error notification (second notification) by the segment f of the main board display 190 are performed (continued).

According to this example, notification of a certain error is given priority over setting confirmation, so it is possible to deal with the error quickly, and it is also possible to take time to check the settings after dealing with the error. This can prevent situations such as forgetting to check settings or forgetting set values.

<Error notification of hopper error/resolution of connection error → end of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 57(e) is a state in which the connection abnormality due to the hopper error has been resolved (the first condition has been satisfied).

The state shown in FIG. 57(e) is the same as the state described using FIG. 47(e), so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Since the first condition is met), the first notification (hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is continued, while the second notification (hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190) is continued. end.

According to this example, the first notification is continued even when a part of the cause of a certain error has been resolved, so it is possible to notify that a certain error has not been completely resolved. , the second notification ends, it is possible to notify that the state has changed in relation to a certain error, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the staff of the game parlor and the like.

In this state, the setting key continues to be on, but since the hopper error has not been resolved, the setting value cannot be checked (setting confirmation mode).

<Operation of hopper error error notification/reset button → End first notification → Shift to setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 57(f) is a state in which the reset button is operated in order to eliminate a hopper error (a certain error) (the second condition is satisfied by the first operation).

In the same state, since the reset button was operated to resolve the hopper error (the second condition was met), segment a (third notification means) of the main board display 190 lights up in red. As a result, a reset button operation notification (third notification) indicating that the reset button has been operated is performed, and since the hopper error (a certain error) has been resolved by operating the reset button, the first notification ( Hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is ended.

In addition, in the same state, when the setting key is on, the hopper error (certain error) has been resolved, so the state shifts to a state where the setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode), but the front door 102 is opened. Therefore, the door body does not start outputting the settings confirmation notification sound (in this example, the sound "Settings are being checked") indicating that the settings can be confirmed. The speakers 272 and 277 output an open notification sound (in this example, a sound saying "The door is open") indicating that the door is in the open state.

According to this example, when the door is opened during setting confirmation, the notification sound indicating the door opening is output while the notification sound indicating the setting confirmation is not output, so the notification sound indicating the door opening can be highlighted. A clerk at a game parlor or the like can reliably know that the door is open.

In addition, in the same state, the display including the setting confirmation display (in this example, the display of the character string "Setting confirmation") indicating that the setting values can be confirmed is changed to the third display mode (the main display mode). In the example, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed in a display mode in which a character string "Settings Checking" is placed at the upper left of a gray background image.

According to this example, when the door is opened while the settings are being checked, a notification sound indicating that the settings are being checked is not outputted, but a display indicating that the settings are being checked is displayed, so the clerk at the game parlor etc. can be informed by the display that the settings are being checked. can be reliably grasped visually.

In addition, since this state is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the setting confirmation mode, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamps 144 flash in red, and a notification ( Open announcement).

According to this example, the light emitting means alerts the game store clerk that the door body is open while the settings are being checked (indicating that the settings are being checked or that there is a possibility of fraudulent activity, etc.). etc. can be reliably informed.

<Hopper error notification/hopper error resolution → front door closing>
The state shown in FIG. 58(a) is a state in which the clerk of the game parlor or the like closes the front door 102 after the hopper error has been resolved.

The state shown in FIG. 58(a) is the same as the state described using FIG. 48(a), so detailed explanation will be omitted. In this state, the opening/closing sensor detects the closing of the front door 102. Therefore, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 output an opening notification (flashing red), the speakers 272 and 277 output an opening notification sound (sound saying "The door is open"), and the main board display. While the door opening error notification (red lighting of segment e) by the device 190 is terminated, the storage number display 125 and the payout number display 127 continue to light up, and the liquid crystal display 157 continues to display the normal screen. The lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the performance button 192 are lit in a performance mode to notify that the normal game can be started.

As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a first notification means (for example, display 127), a second notification means (for example, segment f of the main board display 190 shown in FIG. 47(d)), and a setting means capable of setting one of the plurality of setting values. , if a certain operation is performed using a setting key after the power is turned on, the setting value shifts to a state where the setting value can be confirmed, and the first notification means During at least part of the period in which an error (for example, a hopper error) is occurring (or the entire period in which a certain error is occurring), the first notification (for example, the payout number display 127 hopper error notification), and the second notification means is a means capable of starting a hopper error notification) during at least a part of the period during which the certain error occurs (or during the period during which the certain error occurs). ), the second notification (for example, hopper error notification by segment f of the main board display 190) can be started, and the certain error is detected when the first condition is satisfied ( This is an error that is resolved when the second condition is met (for example, the reset button is operated or a door reset is performed) after the connection abnormality of the hopper error is resolved. , when the certain error occurs, at least the first notification and the second notification are started, and if the first condition is satisfied thereafter, the first notification is continued while the first notification is started. If the second notification is completed, the power is cut off with the certain error occurring, and the certain operation is performed using the setting key after the power is turned on, the first notification and After the second notification is executed and the certain error is resolved (for example, after all errors have been resolved in the case where multiple errors have occurred, or after multiple errors have occurred) The gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible (or it is always possible to shift) to a state in which the set value can be confirmed (after some errors are resolved in the case where the set value is corrected).

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, since notification of a certain error is given priority over setting confirmation, it is possible to quickly deal with the error, and it is also possible to take time after dealing with the error. This allows you to check the settings, thereby preventing situations where you forget to check the settings or forget the set values.

In addition, since the first notification continues even if a part of the cause of an error has been resolved, it is possible to notify that a certain error has not been completely resolved, and the second notification can be made. Since the notification is terminated, it is possible to notify that the state has changed in relation to a certain error, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of the store staff at the game parlor.

Further, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a first notification means (for example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 45(d) and 45(e)). , a second notification means (for example, segment f of the main board display 190 shown in FIG. 45(d)), and a setting means capable of setting one of the plurality of setting values. If the game machine is operated with a setting key after the power is turned on (hereinafter referred to as "setting operation"), the setting value will be changed to a state where it can be confirmed, and the first notification will be sent. The means is configured to prevent the error (for example, a hopper error) from occurring during at least a portion of the period during which the error occurs (or for the entire period during which the error occurs). The second notification means is a means that can start a first notification (for example, a hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) indicating that a certain error has occurred. A second notification (for example, a segment of the main board display 190) indicating that a certain error has occurred during a part of the period (or the entire period during which the certain error is occurring) hopper error notification), and the certain error is caused by a certain operation being performed after the cause of the certain error has been resolved (for example, the connection abnormality of the hopper error has been resolved). When the certain error occurs, at least the first notification and the second notification are started, and then the certain error occurs. If the cause of the error is resolved and the certain operation is not performed, the first notification is continued, the second notification is terminated, and the power is cut off while the certain error is occurring. However, if the setting operation is performed after the power is turned on, at least the second notification is started, and after the certain error is resolved, the setting value can be confirmed. This is a game machine that is characterized by the fact that:

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, since notification of a certain error is given priority over setting confirmation, it is possible to quickly deal with the error, and it is also possible to take time after dealing with the error. This allows you to check the settings, thereby preventing situations where you forget to check the settings or forget the set values.

Furthermore, even if the cause of a certain error has been resolved, if a certain operation that could have resolved the certain error has not been performed, the first indication that the certain error has occurred will be displayed. While continuing the notification, the second notification indicating that a certain error has occurred is terminated. It is possible to notify that a related state has changed, and by continuing the first notification, a certain operation that can eliminate a certain error has not been performed, and a certain error has been completely resolved. It is possible to notify that something is not being done, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of store staff at the game parlor.

Note that the third notification means (for example, segment a of the main board display 190 shown in FIG. 45(f)) and a certain operation means (for example, a reset button) are provided, and the second notification means and The third notification means is disposed inside the casing of the game machine on the same board, and the certain operation is an operation of the certain operation means (for example, an operation of a reset button). When the certain operation is performed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the third notification means sends a third notification indicating that the certain operation is being performed. It is a means that can start notification (for example, reset button operation notification by segment a of the main board display 190), and in the first case, the certain error is resolved and the first notification ends. There may be.

The display means starts displaying an error when the certain error occurs, and displays the error display until the cause of the certain error is eliminated and the certain operation is performed. It may be a means to do so.

Further, the sound output means is provided with a sound output means, and when the certain error occurs, the sound output means starts sound notification regarding the certain error, and when the cause of the certain error is eliminated and the certain operation is performed. It may also be a means for continuing the audio notification until the notification is received.

<Modified example of setting change mode/setting change mode>
Next, before explaining a modification of the setting change mode, a normal setting change mode will be explained.

FIGS. 59(a) to 60(b) are diagrams chronologically showing examples of setting change operations in the normal setting change mode.

<Modified example of setting change mode/Power on with setting change>
The state shown in FIG. 59(a) is a state in which a certain error (eg, hopper error) has not occurred before the power is turned on.

In this state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, notifications are provided by display means (liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, etc.), notifications by light emitting means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.), No notification is provided by the sound output means (speakers 277, 278).

The state shown in FIG. 59(b) is a state in which an employee of the game parlor or the like opens the front door 102, turns the setting key from off to on, and then turns on the power.

In the same state, power is supplied to the slot machine 100 and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 has been opened. 102 is in the open state (open notification), and by lighting segment e of the main board display 190 in red, a door open error notification indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state is issued. Then, the speakers 272 and 277 repeatedly output an open notification sound (in this example, a sound saying "The door is open").

<Modified example of setting change mode/Moving to setting change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 59(c) is a state in which the setting change mode has been entered in a state in which a certain error (for example, a hopper error) has not occurred.

In the same state, since the mode has shifted to setting change mode, the display including the setting changing display (in this example, the display of the character string "Settings changing") indicating that the setting value can be changed. It is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in a first display mode (in this example, a display mode in which a character string "settings changing" is placed in the center of a yellow background image).

In addition, since this state is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, a setting change notification sound indicating that the setting value can be changed (in this example, "Settings are being changed. ”), the speakers 272 and 277 output an open notification sound (in this example, the sound “The door is open”) indicating that the door body is in the open state.

<Modified example of setting change mode/Setting change mode (door open → door closed)>
The state shown in FIG. 59(d) is a state in which, after shifting to the setting change mode, the front door 102 is changed from the open state to the closed state while the setting key is kept on.

In the same state, the second display mode (in this example, the display including the setting changing display (in this example, the display of the character string "Settings changing") indicating that the setting value can be changed) is displayed. , a character string "Changing Settings" is placed in the upper left of the green background image, and the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 is indicate.

In addition, in the same state, since the front door 102 is closed in the setting change mode, a setting change notification sound (in this example, "Settings are being changed") indicates that the setting value can be changed. !” is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

As explained using FIGS. 59(c) and (d), according to this example, when the door is open during the setting change, the notification sound during the setting change is not output, while when the door is closed during the setting change. In the state, a notification sound is output when the settings are being changed, so the door open and door closed states can be linked with the presence or absence of the notification sound when the settings are being changed, providing a game machine with unique notification means. can do. In addition, when the door is open, a notification sound alerts the gaming parlor that the door is open while settings are being changed (settings may have been changed or fraudulent activity may have occurred). It is possible to reliably notify the store clerk, etc., and when the door is closed, the notification sound can reliably notify the store clerk, etc. of the game parlor that the setting change has not been completed.

Further, in the setting change mode of this example, a setting screen (operation check setting screen) on which an operation check can be started is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. By operating the cross key 193 (operating means), a clerk at the game parlor or the like can arbitrarily select any one of the speaker check, accessory check, and performance button check on the setting screen.

<Modified example of setting change mode/Setting change mode (door closed → door open)>
The state shown in FIG. 59(e) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state while the setting key is kept on after shifting to the setting change mode.

In this state, since the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, a setting change notification sound (in this example, "Settings are being changed") indicates that the setting values can be changed. The speaker 272, 277 outputs an opening notification sound (in this example, the sound "The door is open") indicating that the door body is open, without starting to output the sound. A lamp 142, a side lamp 144, and a performance button 192 are blinked in red to notify that the front door 102 is in an open state (open notification).

In addition, since this state is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the settings change mode, the display including the setting change in progress display (in this example, the display of the character string "Settings changing") is It is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in one display mode (in this example, a display mode in which a character string "settings changing" is placed in the center of a yellow background image).

<Modified example of setting change mode/setting change operation>
The state shown in FIG. 59(f) is a state in which the setting value is being changed, and the state shown in FIG. 60(a) is a state in which the setting value has been determined and the setting change has been completed.

In the state shown in FIG. 59(f), while displaying the set value on the payout number display 127, each time a press operation by the operating means (setting switch) is detected, the currently set set value 1 to 6 is displayed. The setting value is changed from setting 1 to setting 6 by adding 1 to the setting value, and when a push operation by the operating means (in this example, the start lever 135) is received, the setting value is fixed to setting 6. do.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 60(a), since the setting value has been determined and the setting change has been completed, the setting changing display is terminated, and the setting change indicating that the setting value has been determined and the setting change has been completed. A completion display (in this example, a screen in which a character string "setting change completed" is placed in the center of a yellow background image) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

<Modified example of setting change mode/Exiting setting change mode>
In the state shown in FIG. 60(b), a certain operation using the setting key is canceled (the setting key is removed after the setting key is turned from on to off), the setting change mode ends, and the front door is closed. 102 is changed from a closed state to an open state.

In the same state, since the opening/closing sensor detects the closing of the front door 102, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 output an open notification (blinking red), and the speakers 272 and 277 output an open notification sound ("Door While the main board display 190 ends the door open error notification (segment e lights up in red), the number of stored coins display 125 and the number of dispensed coins display 127 light up. While continuing to display the normal screen on the liquid crystal display device 157, the upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, and performance button 192 are lit in a performance mode to notify that the normal game can be started.

<Modified example of setting change mode/setting confirmation mode>
Next, before explaining a modification of the setting change mode, a normal setting confirmation mode will be explained.

FIGS. 60(c) to 61(b) are diagrams chronologically showing examples of setting confirmation operations in the normal setting confirmation mode.

<Modified example of setting change mode/Operating the setting key after turning on the power>
The state shown in FIG. 60(c) is a state in which a certain error (for example, a hopper error) has not occurred before the power is turned on.

In this state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, notifications are provided by display means (liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, etc.), notifications by light emitting means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.), No notification is provided by the sound output means (speakers 277, 278).

The state shown in FIG. 60(d) is a state in which an employee of the game parlor or the like opens the front door 102 and operates the power switch disposed inside the main body 101 to turn on the power.

In the same state, power is supplied to the slot machine 100 and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 has been opened. 102 is in the open state (open notification), and by lighting segment e of the main board display 190 in red, a door open error notification indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state is issued. Then, the speakers 272 and 277 repeatedly output an open notification sound (in this example, a sound saying "The door is open").

<Modified example of setting change mode/Moving to setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 60(e) is a state in which the setting confirmation mode has been entered.

In this state, since the front door 102 is open, a setting confirmation notification sound (in this example, a sound saying "Settings are being confirmed") indicating that the setting values can be confirmed is output. The speakers 272 and 277 output an open notification sound (in this example, a sound saying "The door is open") indicating that the door body is in an open state without starting the process.

According to this example, when the door is opened during setting confirmation, the notification sound indicating the door opening is output while the notification sound indicating the setting confirmation is not output, so the notification sound indicating the door opening can be highlighted. A clerk at a game parlor or the like can reliably know that the door is open.

In addition, in the same state, the display including the setting confirmation display (in this example, the display of the character string "Setting confirmation") indicating that the setting values can be confirmed is changed to the third display mode (the main display mode). In the example, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed in a display mode in which a character string "Settings Checking" is placed at the upper left of a gray background image.

According to this example, when the door is opened while the settings are being checked, a notification sound indicating that the settings are being checked is not outputted, but a display indicating that the settings are being checked is displayed, so the clerk at the game parlor etc. can be informed by the display that the settings are being checked. can be reliably grasped visually.

In addition, since this state is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the setting confirmation mode, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamps 144 flash in red, and a notification ( Open announcement).

According to this example, the light emitting means alerts the game store clerk that the door body is open while the settings are being checked (indicating that the settings are being checked or that there is a possibility of fraudulent activity, etc.). etc. can be reliably informed.

<Modified example of setting change mode/Exiting setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 61(a) is a state in which a certain operation using the setting key is canceled (the setting key is removed after the setting key is turned from on to off) and the setting confirmation mode has ended. The state shown in FIG. 3B is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from a closed state to an open state.

In the state shown in FIG. 61(a), since the setting confirmation mode has ended, the storage number display 125 and the payout number display 127 are turned on and the normal screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, while the front door 102 is turned on. Since the door is open, an open notification sound (in this example, a sound saying "The door is open") is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, and production button are output. 192 flashes in red to notify that the front door 102 is open (open notification).

In the state shown in FIG. 61(b), since the opening/closing sensor detects the closing of the front door 102, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 are used to notify the opening (blinking red), and the speakers 272 and 277 are used to notify the opening. While the output of the open notification sound (voice saying "The door is open") and the door open error notification (red lighting of segment e) by the main board display 190 are terminated, the number of stored coins display 125 and the number of coins to be paid out are terminated. In addition to continuing to light the display 127 and display the normal screen on the liquid crystal display device 157, the upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, and performance button 192 are lit in a performance mode to notify that the normal game can be started. conduct.

<Modified example of setting change mode/Setting change mode by operating setting keys after power-on>
Next, the setting change mode by operating the setting keys after the power is turned on will be explained.

FIGS. 61(c) to 62(f) are diagrams showing, in chronological order, examples of setting change modes by operating setting keys after power is turned on.

<Setting change mode by setting key operation after power-on>
The state shown in FIG. 61(c) is a state in which a hopper error (a certain error) has occurred before the power is turned on.

In this state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, notifications are provided by display means (liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, etc.), notifications by light emitting means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.), No notification is provided by the sound output means (speakers 277, 278).

The state shown in FIG. 61(d) is a state in which the clerk of the game parlor opens the front door 102 and turns on the power, and the state shown in FIG. 61(e) is the state shown in FIG. , the setting key has been turned from off to on.

In the case where the power is cut off while the slot machine 100 is experiencing a certain error (hopper error in this example), and the certain error is not resolved when the power is turned on (first case), After the power is turned on and before the first notification indicating that a certain error has occurred (in this example, the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127), a certain operation (main In the example, the configuration is such that when the setting key is turned on (from off to on), the setting value shifts to a changeable state (setting change mode).

In the state shown in FIG. 61(d), power is supplied to the slot machine 100 and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 has been opened, so the upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, and production button 192 flash in red. By doing so, a notification indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state is provided (open notification), and by lighting segment e of the main board display 190 in red, it is indicated that the front door 102 is in the open state. The door open error notification shown in FIG.

Moreover, in the state shown in FIG. 61(e), the setting key is turned on from off before the error notification of the hopper error is started, so the setting change mode is entered.

According to this example, it is possible to change the set value even after the power is turned on, so it is possible to improve the convenience of the store staff at the game parlor and the like.

The subsequent states shown in FIGS. 62(a) to 62(f) are almost the same as the states described using FIGS. 53(e) to 54(d), so a detailed explanation will be omitted. The state shown in FIG. 62(a) is a state in which the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the open state while the setting key is kept on after transitioning to the setting change mode.

In this state, since the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, a setting change notification sound (in this example, "Settings are being changed") indicates that the setting values can be changed. The speaker 272, 277 outputs an opening notification sound (in this example, the sound "The door is open") indicating that the door body is open, without starting to output the sound. A lamp 142, a side lamp 144, and a performance button 192 are blinked in red to notify that the front door 102 is in an open state (open notification).

In addition, since this state is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the settings change mode, the display including the setting change in progress display (in this example, the display of the character string "Settings changing") is It is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in one display mode (in this example, a display mode in which a character string "settings changing" is placed in the center of a yellow background image).

The state shown in FIG. 62(b) is a state in which the setting value is being changed, and the state shown in FIG. 62(c) is a state in which the setting value has been determined and the setting change has been completed.

In the state shown in FIG. 62(b), while displaying the set value on the payout number display 127, each time a press operation by the operating means (setting switch) is detected, the currently set set value 1 to 6 is displayed. The setting value is changed from setting 1 to setting 6 by adding 1 to the setting value, and when a push operation by the operating means (in this example, the start lever 135) is received, the setting value is fixed to setting 6. do.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 62(c), since the setting value has been determined and the setting change has been completed, the setting change in progress display is ended, and the setting change indicating that the setting value has been determined and the setting change has been completed. A completion display (in this example, a screen in which a character string "setting change completed" is placed in the center of a yellow background image) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

The state shown in FIG. 62(d) is a state in which a certain operation using the setting key has been canceled (the setting key is removed after the setting key is turned off from on) and the setting change mode has ended.

In this state, the hopper error (certain error) continues and the setting change mode (state where the setting value can be changed) has ended, so the first notification (in this example, the number of dispensed coins display) 127) and a second notification (in this example, the hopper error notification using segment f of the main board display 190).

At the same time, an error display indicating that a hopper error has occurred is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 (in this example, a character string displaying "Hopper error. Please call an attendant") is displayed. , Since preparations such as initial settings are completed, the storage number display 125 is turned on.

According to this example, since the state shifts to the error state after the setting change operation is completed, it is possible to prevent the user from forgetting to deal with the error due to the work of changing the setting, and to ensure that the error is resolved before starting the game. be able to.

In the state shown in FIG. 62(e), the hopper error connection abnormality has been resolved (the first condition has been met), so the first notification (hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) is continued. On the other hand, the second notification (hopper error notification by segment f of the main board display 190) is ended.

In the state shown in FIG. 62(f), the reset button is operated to eliminate the hopper error (the second condition is met), and the hopper error (certain error) is resolved, so the first notification is issued. (Hopper error notification by payout number display 127) ends.

In addition, in the same state, since the opening/closing sensor detected the closing of the front door 102, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 issued an opening notification (flashing red), and the speakers 272 and 277 issued an opening notification sound ( The main board display 190 outputs a voice saying "The door is open") and the door open error notification (segment e lights up in red). In addition to continuing the lighting and display of the normal screen on the liquid crystal display device 157, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the performance button 192 are lit in a performance mode to notify that the normal game can be started.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. , speakers 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.) and one of a plurality of setting values can be set. and a setting means, wherein the notification means is configured to provide a first notification (for example, by a payout number display 127) indicating that at least a certain error (for example, a hopper error) has occurred. Hopper error notification, hopper error notification by segment f of the main board display 190). may not be resolved (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), and if the power is turned on while a certain operation using the setting key (for example, turning on from off) is performed. is in a state where the setting value can be changed (e.g., setting change mode), and if the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on, the setting value is in a state where it can be confirmed (e.g., setting confirmation mode). mode), and in the first case, if the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on and before the first notification starts, the set value becomes changeable. This is a game machine characterized by being able to transfer (or be transferable).

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change the set value even after the power is turned on, so it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk and the like.

Further, in the first case, if the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on and the first notification is started, the set value is also changed to a changeable state. It is also possible that the set value does not shift to a state where it can be confirmed, but instead enters an error state, and when the error state is resolved, the set value shifts to a state where it can be confirmed.

With such a configuration, since the game cannot be started unless the error is resolved, the error can be reliably resolved and the setting values can be confirmed before starting the game.

Further, in the first case, if the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on and before the first notification is started, the set value changes to a changeable state. , the error state may be entered after the setting change operation is completed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent errors from being forgotten due to the work of changing settings, and it is possible to reliably eliminate errors before starting the game.

Further, in the first case, if the power is turned on while the certain operation is being performed, the setting value transitions to a changeable state, and after the setting change operation is completed, an error state occurs. It may be something that migrates.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent errors from being forgotten due to the work of changing settings, and it is possible to reliably eliminate errors before starting the game.

Further, if the power is cut off while an error other than the above-mentioned error (for example, an error that can be resolved by changing settings (medal insertion error 2, etc.)) is occurring, and the power is turned on, the above-mentioned If the certain operation is performed before the first notification starts, the setting value will be changed to a changeable state, and after the setting change operation is completed (or the setting value will be changed to a changeable state). (after the end of the game), the state may be changed to a state in which the game can be played without the state being changed to an error state.

With this configuration, if a minor error or an error that can be resolved by changing the settings occurs, the game can be continued without entering the error state, increasing the operating rate of the gaming machine. can.

In addition, when the power is turned on, an error other than the above-mentioned certain error (for example, an error that can be resolved by changing the settings (medal insertion error 2, etc.)) occurs, and the power is turned off, and the certain operation is performed. When the power is turned on in a state in which the setting value is changed, the setting value shifts to a changeable state and after the setting change operation is completed (or after the setting value changeable state ends) It may be possible to shift to a state where a game can be played without shifting to an error state.

With this configuration, if a minor error or an error that can be resolved by changing the settings occurs, the game can be continued without entering the error state, increasing the operating rate of the gaming machine. can.

Note that the above-mentioned certain errors are errors that cannot be resolved by changing the settings or checking the settings (for example, hopper empty error, hopper error, medal insertion error 1 (medal insertion jam), medal dispensing error 1 (medal dispensing jam), medal dispensing error 3 (unauthorized payout), overflow abnormality). Further, the other error may be an error that can be resolved by changing settings (for example, RAM failure (RWM abnormality), winning abnormality (winning symbol abnormality), backup abnormality). Furthermore, the other error may be an error that cannot be resolved by checking the settings.

Here, settings can be changed when the power is turned on after a certain operation using the setting key (for example, turning it on from off) is performed, and when a certain error occurs after the power is turned on. This includes both cases where a certain operation is performed before the first notification indicating that an error has occurred, and errors that are resolved by changing the settings will move to a state where the setting value can be changed. This is an error that is resolved when the setting value is changed (or the setting value is not changed) and the setting value is no longer changeable (when a certain operation is canceled). be.

<Various processing after power is turned on when a certain error remains>
Next, various processes after power-on in a state where a certain error has occurred will be explained using FIG. 63.

FIG. 63(a) is a diagram showing in chronological order the flow of various processes when the power is turned on with a certain error occurring and the setting change mode is entered before the error notification. Figure (b) shows the flow of various processes in chronological order when an error notification is executed without transitioning to setting change mode after the power is turned on while a certain error has occurred. It is a diagram.

<Various processing after power-on/power-off processing when a certain error remains>
The timing indicated by the symbol T1 in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b) is when, for example, a power switch disposed inside the main body 101 is activated when a certain error (for example, a hopper error) has occurred in the slot machine 100. This is the timing at which the power to the slot machine 100 is cut off (stopped) by an operation to turn off the slot machine 100 . Note that the cause of the power cutoff is not limited to the operation of turning off the power switch, but may also be caused by a power outage, a momentary interruption of the power supply, or the like.

As explained using FIG. 5, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 determines whether the low voltage signal is on (if the monitored voltage is less than 9V) in step S209 of the main control unit timer interrupt processing. If the low voltage signal is on (if a power cutoff is detected), in step S211, specific variables and stack pointers are set to return to the state at power cutoff when power is restored. is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as recovery data, and after performing power-off processing such as initialization of input/output ports, the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 4 is returned.

At the timing indicated by the symbol T1 in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), the power to the slot machine 100 is cut off, and the main control unit 300 detects the cut-off of the power, so after executing the power cut processing, the main Return to control unit main processing.

<Various processing/initial setting processing after power-on when a certain error remains>
In FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), the timing indicated by the symbol T2 is the timing when the power is turned on to the slot machine 100, and the subsequent timing indicated by the symbol T3 is the timing when the voltage value of the power supply of the main control unit 300 is turned on. This is the timing when the value is reached and the main control unit 300 is activated.

For example, when an operation is performed to turn on the power switch, the power is turned on to the slot machine 100, and then, when the voltage value of the power supply of the main control unit 300 reaches a predetermined value (for example, 4.5V), the slot machine 100 is turned on. In the example, at the timing indicated by the symbol T3), the main control unit 300 (main CPU) is started, and the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 4 is started, and in step S101 of the same processing, various initial setting processing Begins.

In this initial setting process, first, power is supplied to peripheral devices such as the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, and after various initial settings are performed, the state is returned to the state at the time of power outage. Until then, a predetermined standby period (for example, 200ms) is performed, and at the timing when the standby time has elapsed and it is determined that the low voltage signal is off (the monitored voltage is 9V or more) (in this example, , at the timing shown by reference numeral T5 in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b)), it is determined whether a certain operation by the setting key (in this example, an operation of turning the setting key from OFF to ON) is detected.

<Various processing after power-on with a certain error remaining/initial setting processing → Setting change>
The slot machine 100 operates at least for a period of time after the power is turned on and before the first notification indicating that a certain error has occurred (for example, hopper error notification) is started. The system determines whether a certain operation using the setting key (for example, turning the setting key from on to off) is performed, and when a certain operation using the setting key is performed, the setting value can be changed. (e.g., a configuration change mode).

In the example shown in FIG. 63(a), the timing shown by reference numeral T4 in FIG. Because a certain operation using the setting key (for example, turning the setting key from on to off) was performed during at least a part of the period before the hopper error notification (hopper error notification) was started, the waiting time indicated by the symbol T5 At the timing when T6 is completed, it is determined that a certain operation using the setting key has been performed, and after executing processing for transitioning to the setting change mode, the transition to the setting change mode is made at the timing indicated by reference numeral T6.

Note that the timing of a certain operation using a setting key that is a condition for transitioning to the setting change mode is not limited to the standby period of the main control unit 300 (period from code T3 to code T5) in this example, 100) after the power is turned on and before the first notification indicating that a certain error has occurred starts. Therefore, for example, the timing after the standby period (period from symbol T3 to symbol T5) of the main control unit 300 in this example has elapsed, for example, the timing indicated by symbol T4' in FIG. The notification may be at a certain timing during at least a part of the period after the standby time of the unit 300 has elapsed and before the first notification indicating that a certain error has occurred is started.

<Various processing/initial setting processing after power-on with a certain error remaining → Error notification>
On the other hand, in the slot machine 100, "at least a portion of the time after the power is turned on and before the first notification (for example, hopper error notification) indicating that a certain error has occurred is started." If a certain operation using the setting key (for example, turning the setting key from on to off) is not performed during the "period", the setting value will not be changed to a state where it can be changed (for example, setting change mode). It is configured.

In the example shown in FIG. 63(b), since a certain operation using the setting key was not performed during the standby period of the main control unit 300 (the period from code T3 to code T5), the main control unit 300 When it is determined that the voltage signal is off (the monitored voltage is 9V or more), the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupts are disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, and the RAM 308 is set. It performs restoration processing such as initial setting of various variables stored in the controller, operation permission for the WDT 314, and setting of initial values. Then, as a result of the main control unit 300 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the slot machine 100 returns to the state at power-off.

For example, if a certain operation using the setting key (for example, turning the setting key from on to off) is not performed while a certain error (for example, hopper error) remains, the main control unit 300, after executing the recovery process when the power is cut off, the first notification (for example, the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127) and the second notification are made at the timing shown by the symbol T7 in FIG. Notification (for example, hopper error notification by segment f of main board display 190) is started, and an error display indicating that a hopper error has occurred is displayed in the display area of liquid crystal display device 157 (for example, in this example, " Hopper error. Please call staff." is displayed.

It should be noted that the error notification is started during a period including the timing indicated by the symbol T8 in FIG. In this example, if a certain operation is performed using a setting key during the "period of Although error notification is started without transitioning to confirmation mode, if priority is given to transition to setting confirmation mode over error notification, it may be configured to transition to setting confirmation mode. Further, in the case of such a configuration, the error notification may be started when the confirmation of the set value is completed.

<Changing settings when a certain error remains (Modification 1)>
Next, using FIGS. 64 and 65, a description will be given of a setting change (modification 1) when a certain error remains.

FIGS. 64(a) to 65(j) are diagrams chronologically showing setting changes (modification 1) when a certain error remains. In this example, if a certain operation is performed using the setting key after the power is turned on and error notification is started, the setting value does not change to a state where it can be checked.

<Changing settings when a certain error remains (Modification 1)/Before turning on the power (error remaining)>
The state shown in FIG. 64(a) is a state in which a hopper error (a certain error) has occurred (remains) before the power is turned on.

In this state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, notifications are provided by display means (liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, etc.), notifications by light emitting means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.), No notification is provided by the sound output means (speakers 277, 278).

<Changing settings while a certain error remains (Modification 1)/Turning on the power>
The state shown in FIG. 64(b) is a state in which an employee of the game parlor or the like opens the front door 102 and operates the power switch disposed inside the main body 101 to turn on the power.

In the same state, power is supplied to the slot machine 100 and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 has been opened. 102 is in the open state (open notification), and by lighting segment e of the main board display 190 in red, a door open error notification indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state is issued. conduct.

In addition, in the same state, since the power has been turned on to the slot machine 100, a power-on display (first display; At the same time, since the restoration process such as initial setting has been completed, the storage number display 125 is turned on.

<Setting change when a certain error remains (Modification 1)/Error notification>
The state shown in FIG. 64(c) is a state in which a predetermined period of time has passed since the power was turned on, and restoration processing such as initial settings has been completed.

In this state, since the hopper error (certain error) that occurred before the power was turned on continues, the payout number display 127 (first notification means) is used to display an error code (in this example, "E4"). ) to perform a hopper error notification (first notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred, and also to light up segment f (second notification means) of the main board display 190 in red. As a result, a hopper error notification (first notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred is performed.

At the same time, a hopper error display (first notification or second display) indicating that a hopper error has occurred is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. In this example, "Hopper error. Please call staff. '') is displayed, and the speakers 272 and 277 repeatedly output an open notification sound (in this example, a voice saying ``The door is open'').

<Setting change when a certain error remains (Modification 1)/Setting key operation>
The state shown in FIG. 64(d) is a state in which the setting key is turned on from off while the hopper error (certain error) that occurred before the power was turned on continues.

In the slot machine 100 of this example, if the power is cut off while a certain error (hopper error in this example) has occurred, and the certain error has not been resolved when the power is turned on (first ), after the power is turned on, the first notification (in this example, the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127, the hopper error notification by the main board display 190, and the hopper error notification by the liquid crystal display device 157) If a certain operation using the setting key (in this example, turning the setting key from off to on) is performed after the display (display) has started (in the second case), the setting value can be checked. (In this example, the configuration is such that the mode does not shift to setting confirmation mode).

In the state shown in FIG. 65(d), a certain operation was performed using the setting key (turning the setting key from OFF to ON), but in this example, when the power was turned on, a hopper error (a certain error occurred). ) has not been resolved (first case), the hopper error (certain error) is given priority.

Therefore, in the same state, even if a certain operation using the setting key is performed after the hopper error notification (first notification) has started (second case), the setting value can be checked. state (setting confirmation mode), the hopper error notification (first notification) from the payout number display 127, the hopper error notification (first notification) from the segment f of the main board display 190, and the liquid crystal display. The display device 157 continues to display the hopper error (first notification or second display), and since the front door 102 is open, the speakers 272 and 277 repeatedly output an open notification sound.

According to this example, notification of a certain error is prioritized over checking the settings, so it is possible to deal with the error quickly, and it is also possible to take sufficient time to check the settings after dealing with the error. This makes it possible to prevent situations such as forgetting to check settings or forgetting set values.

Note that the "first notification" according to the present invention is not limited to the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127, the hopper error notification by the main board display 190, and the hopper error display by the liquid crystal display device 157. Instead of (or in addition to) these notifications, notifications by sound output means (for example, speakers 272, 277) (for example, ``Hopper error It is also possible to apply notifications (e.g., flashing red light, etc.) by means of a voice (e.g., "I'm here") or light output means (e.g., upper lamp 142, side lamp 144) (the same applies to other embodiments).

Further, the "first notification" according to the present invention may be "a notification indicating that at least a certain error has occurred", and for example, an open notification indicating that the door body is in an open state (e.g. , a sound or display such as "The door is open"), or a setting change notification indicating that the setting value can be changed (for example, a sound or display such as "Settings are being changed"), etc. (The same applies to other embodiments).

In addition, in this specification, "first notification," "second notification," "third notification," etc., "first", "second", "second notification", etc. Numbers such as "3" are for convenience to distinguish between multiple "notifications", and the content of the invention is not limited by these numbers, and any number may be assigned. The same applies to numbers added before characters such as "notification means", "display", and "case".

<Changing settings when a certain error remains (Modification 1)/Returning setting keys>
The state shown in FIG. 64(e) is a state in which the setting key has been turned back from on to off.

In the same state, since the setting key has only been turned back from on to off, the hopper error notification (first notification) is sent by the payout number display 127, and the hopper error notification (first notification) is sent by the segment f of the main board display 190. In addition to continuing the error notification (first notification) and hopper error display (first notification or second display) on the liquid crystal display device 157, since the front door 102 is in the open state, the speakers 272 and 277 , repeatedly outputs the release notification sound.

<Changing settings when a certain error remains (Modification 1)/Resolving connection abnormality>
The state shown in FIG. 64(f) is a state in which the connection abnormality due to the hopper error has been resolved (the first condition has been satisfied).

In the same state, since the connection abnormality of the hopper error has been resolved (the first condition is met), the hopper error notification (first notification) is continued by the payout number display 127, while the main board display The hopper error notification (first notification) by segment f of 190 is ended.

According to this example, even if a part of the cause of a certain error is eliminated, the hopper error notification (first notification) by the payout number display 127 is continued, so that a certain error is completely eliminated. In order to notify that the error has not been resolved and to terminate the hopper error notification (first notification) by segment f of the main board display 190, it is possible to notify that the state has changed in relation to a certain error. This makes it possible to improve the work efficiency and convenience of game store clerks and the like.

<Setting change when a certain error remains (Modification 1)/Reset button operation>
The state shown in FIG. 65(g) is when the reset button is operated to resolve a hopper error (a certain error) (the second condition is satisfied by the first operation), and the hopper error that occurred before the power was turned on. (certain error) has been resolved.

In the same state, since the hopper error (certain error) has been resolved by operating the reset button, the hopper error notification (first notification) by the payout number display 127 is terminated, and the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 is , a demonstration screen is displayed instead of the hopper error display (first notification or second display).

In the slot machine 100 of this example, after the power is turned on, the first notification (in this example, a hopper error notification by the payout number display 127, a hopper error notification by the main board display 190, and a hopper error notification by the liquid crystal display 157) If a certain operation is performed using the setting key (in the second case) after the hopper error display (hopper error display) has started, an error state will occur, and when the error state is resolved, the setting value will be able to be confirmed. is configured to do so.

In the state shown in FIG. 65(g), since the hopper error (certain error) that occurred before the power was turned on has been resolved, it becomes possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode (a state in which the setting values can be confirmed).

Although this example shows an example in which a certain error is resolved by operating the reset button, the present invention is not limited to this, and operation by one or more operating means other than the reset button (for example, Certain errors can be resolved by operating the setting increment button, pressing the reset button and a certain operating device at the same time, pressing or repeatedly pressing a certain operating device, operating a touch panel, operating a DIP switch, etc.) There may be.

<Setting change when a certain error remains (Modification 1)/Setting key operation>
The state shown in FIG. 65(h) is a state in which the setting key is turned on from off and the setting confirmation mode is entered.

In this state, when the hopper error (certain error) has been resolved, a certain operation using the setting key (turning from off to on) is performed, so the mode shifts to setting confirmation mode and the number of stored sheets is displayed. While displaying the set value using the device 125 (in this example, the number "03" indicating that the current set value is setting 3), the front door 102 is opened. Therefore, the door body must be in an open state without starting to output the settings confirmation notification sound (in this example, the sound "Settings are being confirmed") indicating that the settings can be confirmed. The speakers 272 and 277 output an open notification sound indicating that the door is open (in this example, a sound saying "the door is open").

According to this example, when the door is opened during setting confirmation, the notification sound indicating the door opening is output while the notification sound indicating the setting confirmation is not output, so the notification sound indicating the door opening can be highlighted. A clerk at a game parlor or the like can reliably know that the door is open.

In addition, in the same state, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, instead of displaying the demo screen, a setting confirmation display (in this example, "Setting confirmation") indicating that the setting values can be confirmed is displayed. Display images (including displaying text strings).

According to this example, when the door is opened while the settings are being checked, a notification sound indicating that the settings are being checked is not outputted, but a display indicating that the settings are being checked is displayed, so the clerk at the game parlor etc. can be informed by the display that the settings are being checked. can be reliably grasped visually.

In addition, since this state is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the setting confirmation mode, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamps 144 flash in red, and a notification ( Open announcement).

According to this example, the light emitting means alerts the game store clerk that the door body is open while the settings are being checked (indicating that the settings are being checked or that there is a possibility of fraudulent activity, etc.). etc. can be reliably informed.

<Changing settings when a certain error remains (Modification 1)/Returning setting keys>
The state shown in FIG. 65(i) is a state in which the setting key has been turned from on to off, and the setting confirmation mode has ended.

In the same state, since the setting confirmation mode has ended, the storage number display 125 finishes displaying the setting value, and the display area of the liquid crystal display 157 displays a demo screen instead of the setting confirmation display. .

<Changing settings when a certain error remains (Modification 1)/Closing the front door>
The state shown in FIG. 65(j) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed by a clerk at the game parlor or the like.

In the same state, since the opening/closing sensor detects the closing of the front door 102, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 output an open notification (blinking red), and the speakers 272 and 277 output an open notification sound ("Door While the main board display 190 ends the door open error notification (segment e lights up in red), the number of stored coins display 125 and the number of dispensed coins display 127 light up. While continuing to display the normal screen on the liquid crystal display device 157, the upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, and performance button 192 are lit in a performance mode to notify that the normal game can be started.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. , speakers 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.) and one of a plurality of setting values can be set. a setting means, and the notifying means includes at least a first notification (for example, a hopper error notification by the payout number display 127, a main notification) related to a certain error (for example, a hopper error). Hopper error notification by segment f of board display 190, hopper error notification by liquid crystal display 157) is a means that can start hopper error notification by segment f of board display 190, and hopper error notification by liquid crystal display device 157), and when the power is turned on after the power is cut off while the above-mentioned certain error is occurring. In some cases, the error may not be resolved (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), and the power is cut off when no error occurs, and a certain operation using the setting key (for example, from OFF to If the power is turned on while the power is turned on (turning on operation), the setting value becomes changeable (for example, setting change mode), and the power is turned off in a state where no error occurs; If the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on, the setting value will be in a state where it can be checked (for example, setting confirmation mode), and in the first case, after the power is turned on. and when the certain operation is performed during at least a part of the period before the first notification starts, the set value becomes changeable, and in the first case, the power supply If the certain operation is performed after the first notification is started (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), for example, the error shown in FIG. 64(d) The gaming machine is characterized in that the setting value cannot be checked if a setting key is operated after the notification is started.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change the set value even after the power is turned on, so it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk and the like. In addition, if a certain operation is performed using the setting key after the power is turned on and the first notification has started, the setting value will not be able to be confirmed, so you will not be able to confirm the setting. Notification of certain errors is given priority, allowing you to deal with errors quickly, and taking the time to check settings after dealing with errors. It is possible to prevent a situation where the value is forgotten.

Further, even if an error state occurs in the second case (a state in which an error occurs and the error is not resolved), and the set value becomes checkable when the error state is resolved, good.

With such a configuration, the set values cannot be confirmed unless the error is resolved, so the error can be reliably resolved, and the set values can be reliably confirmed before starting the game. can.

Further, in the first case, if the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on and before the first notification starts, the set value becomes changeable. , the error state may occur after the setting change operation is completed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent errors from being forgotten due to the work of changing settings, and it is possible to reliably eliminate errors before starting the game.

Further, in the first case, if the power is turned on while the certain operation is performed, the set value can be changed (without transitioning to a state where the set value can be checked). This may result in an error state after the setting change operation is completed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent errors from being forgotten due to the work of changing settings, and it is possible to reliably eliminate errors before starting the game.

<Changing settings when a certain error remains (Modification 2)>
Next, using FIGS. 66 and 67, a description will be given of a setting change (modification 2) when a certain error remains.

FIGS. 66(a) to 67(k) are diagrams chronologically showing setting changes (modified example 2) when a certain error remains.

<Changing settings when a certain error remains (Modification 2)/Before turning on the power (error remaining)>
The state shown in FIG. 66(a) is a state in which a hopper error (a certain error) has occurred (remains) before the power is turned on.

In this state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, notifications are provided by display means (liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, etc.), notifications by light emitting means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.), No notification is provided by the sound output means (speakers 277, 278).

<Changing settings while a certain error remains (Modification 2)/Turning on the power>
The state shown in FIG. 66(b) is a state in which an employee of the game parlor or the like opens the front door 102 and turns on the power.

In the same state, power is supplied to the slot machine 100 and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 has been opened. 102 is in the open state (open notification), and by lighting segment e of the main board display 190 in red, a door open error notification indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state is issued. conduct.

In addition, in the same state, since the power has been turned on to the slot machine 100, a power-on display (first display; At the same time, since preparations such as initial settings have been completed, the storage number display 125 is lit.

<Setting change when a certain error remains (Modification 2)/Setting key operation>
The state shown in FIG. 66(c) is a state in which the setting key is turned on from off before the notification of a hopper error (a certain error), and the state shown in FIG. 66(d) is a state in which the setting key is turned on from OFF. The power to the slot machine 100 is cut off before the value change is completed.

In the slot machine 100 of this example, if the power is cut off while a certain error (hopper error in this example) has occurred, and the certain error has not been resolved when the power is turned on (first case), after the power has been turned on, the first display (display that starts displaying in connection with the power being turned on. In this example, the power-on display indicating that the power has been turned on) ) to the second display (display displayed as part of the first notification; in this example, an error display indicating that a hopper error has occurred), a certain operation using the setting key ( In this example, the setting value is configured to shift to a changeable state when an operation of turning the setting key from off to on is performed.

In the state shown in FIG. 66(c), after the power is turned on and before the power-on display (first display) switches to the error display (second display), a certain operation using the setting key ( The process of transitioning to setting change mode has started since the user performed an operation (turning the settings key from off to on). In this example, as shown in FIG. 66(d), the power to the slot machine 100 is cut off (power cut off) before the setting value change is completed, so the setting value change is completed. I haven't.

According to this example, if the power is cut off while a certain error is occurring and the error is not resolved when the power is turned on (first case), after the power is turned on, and is set before switching from the first display (the display that starts displaying in connection with the power being turned on) to the second display (the display that is displayed as part of the first notification). When a certain key operation is performed, the set value changes to a state where it can be changed, so the set value can be changed even after the power is turned on, which increases the convenience of employees at game parlors, etc. can.

Note that the "first display" according to the present invention may be "a display that starts displaying in connection with turning on the power," for example, (in connection with turning on the power) It may be a display that suggests that initial settings are being performed (for example, a display that includes a character string such as "initial settings in progress" or "starting up").

Further, the "second display" according to the present invention may be any "display displayed as part of the first notification", for example, a display in which the error cannot be identified and which prompts the resolution of the error. (e.g., a display containing the string "Please call a store clerk"), a display that allows the error to be identified and indicates the type of error (e.g., a display containing the string "Medal Error"), etc. It may be.

Further, the "second display" according to the present invention is preferably a "display that includes a display that can identify the type of error", such as "medal error", "door is open", etc. The display may include the name of the error to identify the type of error, or may include an error code such as "E4" to identify the type of error.

Further, in the slot machine 100 of this example, if the power is cut off while a certain error (hopper error in this example) is occurring, and the certain error is not resolved when the power is turned on (the In case 1), after the power is turned on, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277 in this example) produces a certain sound (in this example, an open notification sound) The configuration is such that even if a certain operation is performed using a setting key before starting output of the setting value, the setting value can be changed.

In the state shown in FIG. 66(c), after the power is turned on and before the speakers 272, 277 (sound output means) start outputting the open notification sound (a certain sound), a certain operation using the setting key is performed. (Turning the setting key from off to on) has started the process of transitioning to setting change mode. In this example, as shown in FIG. 66(d), the power to the slot machine 100 is cut off (power cut off) before the setting value change is completed, so the setting value change is completed. I haven't.

According to this example, if the power is cut off while a certain error has occurred, and the error is not resolved when the power is turned on (first case), after the power is turned on, Even if a certain operation is performed using the setting key after the power is turned on and before the sound output means starts outputting a certain sound, the setting value can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to change the set value even after the power is turned on, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the store staff at the game parlor.

Note that the "certain sound" according to the present invention is not limited to the release notification sound, but may also include an error sound indicating an error state (for example, a sound such as "Hopper error") or a sound indicating that the power is turned on. a power-on sound (e.g., a sound such as "The power has been turned on"), a setting change notification sound (e.g., a sound such as "Settings are being changed") indicating that settings are being changed, Setting confirmation sound that indicates that settings are being checked (e.g., "Settings are being checked"), and warning sound that indicates that initial settings are being made or preparations are being made (e.g., "Initial settings are in progress") , "We are preparing", etc.).

Further, the "certain sound" according to the present invention is preferably "the first sound output from the sound output means after the power is turned on", and is preferably a sound effect such as "ping" or "ping". It may be audio based on audio data, or it may be a song or the like.

<Changing settings while a certain error remains (Modification 2)/Turning the power on again → changing settings>
The state shown in FIG. 66(e) is a state in which power is supplied to the slot machine 100 in the power-off state shown in FIG. 66(d).

In the state shown in FIG. 66(e), power is supplied to the slot machine 100 and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 has been opened, so the upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, and production button 192 flash in red. By doing so, a notification indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state is provided (open notification), and by lighting segment e of the main board display 190 in red, it is indicated that the front door 102 is in the open state. Door open error notification will be issued.

In addition, in the same state, since the power has been turned on to the slot machine 100, a power-on display (first display; At the same time, since preparations such as initial settings have been completed, the storage number display 125 is lit.

<Changing settings while a certain error remains (Modification 2)/Moving to setting change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 66(f) is a state in which the setting change mode has been entered.

In the slot machine 100 of this example, if the power is cut off while a certain error has occurred, and the certain error has not been resolved when the power is turned on (first case), the set value is changed. If the power is cut off before the change is completed and the power is turned on again, the set value can be changed.

In the state shown in Fig. 66(f), the power is cut off while a certain error (hopper error) has occurred, and if the certain error has not been resolved when the power is turned on, the set value is changed. Since the power was cut off before the change was completed and the power was turned on again, the setting change mode is entered and the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 shows that the setting value can be changed. A medium display (in this example, a display including the character string "Changing settings") is displayed.

In addition, since this state is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the setting change mode, a setting change notification sound indicating that the setting value can be changed (in this example, "Settings are being changed. ”), the speakers 272 and 277 output an open notification sound (in this example, the sound “The door is open”) indicating that the door body is in the open state. Note that instead of (or in addition to) the release notification sound, a setting change notification sound may be output.

According to this example, if the power is cut off while a certain error is occurring, and the error is not resolved when the power is turned on (first case), the setting value cannot be changed. If the power is turned off without being completed and the power is turned on again, the setting value will be in a state where it can be changed, so changing the setting value can be given priority over notifying a certain error, and the setting value can be changed. It is possible to prevent forgetting to make changes.

<Setting change when a certain error remains (Modification 2)/Setting value change operation>
The state shown in FIG. 67(g) is a state in which setting values are being changed using the setting switch.

In the same state, while displaying the set value on the payout number display 127, each time a press operation by the operating means (setting switch) is detected, 1 is added to the currently set set values 1 to 6. In this example, the setting value is changed to setting 6.

<Setting change while a certain error remains (Modification 2)/Setting change completed>
The state shown in FIG. 67(h) is a state after the setting value is determined and the setting change is completed, but before a certain operation by the setting key is released (before the setting key is removed).

In the same state, since the push operation by the operating means (in this example, the start lever 135) was accepted, the setting value was determined to setting 6, and the setting change mode ended, so the setting by the storage number display 125 At the same time, the setting change completion display (in this example, a yellow color Display a screen with the text "Settings changed completed" placed in the center of the background image.

<Changing settings while a certain error remains (Modification 2)/Cancelling a certain operation of a setting key>
The state shown in FIG. 67(i) is a state in which a certain operation using the setting key is canceled (the setting key is removed after the setting key is turned from on to off) and the setting change mode has ended.

In the slot machine 100 of this example, if the power is cut off while a certain error (hopper error in this example) has occurred, and the certain error has not been resolved when the power is turned on (first ), after the power is turned on, the first notification (in this example, the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127, the hopper error notification by the main board display 190, and the hopper error notification by the liquid crystal display device 157) If a certain operation is performed using the setting key (in this example, turning the setting key from on to off) during at least a part of the period before the display (display) starts, the setting value becomes changeable. The configuration is configured to transition to an error state related to a certain error in connection with the completion of the change of the setting value.

In the state shown in FIG. 67(i), the setting change mode (a state in which setting values can be changed) has been completed while a hopper error (a certain error) remains, so the state shifts to an error state and the payout Hopper error notification by the number of sheets display 127 and hopper error notification by segment f of the main board display 190 are started, and an error display (main In the example, the character string "Hopper error. Please call an attendant" is displayed.

According to this example, the error state is entered after the setting value change is completed, so you will not forget to deal with the error due to the work of changing the setting, and the error will be reliably resolved before starting the game. can do.

<Changing settings when a certain error remains (Modification 2)/Resolving connection abnormality>
The state shown in FIG. 67(j) is a state in which the connection abnormality due to the hopper error has been resolved (the first condition has been satisfied).

In the same state, since the connection abnormality due to the hopper error has been resolved (the first condition is met), the hopper error notification is continued by the payout number display 127, and the hopper error is notified by the segment f of the main board display 190. End error notification.

<Changing settings when a certain error remains (Modification 2)/Reset button operation>
The state shown in FIG. 67(k) is when the reset button is operated to resolve a hopper error (a certain error) (the second condition is met by the first operation), and the hopper error occurs before the power is turned on. (certain error) has been resolved.

In the same state, the reset button is operated to eliminate the hopper error (the second condition is met), and the hopper error (certain error) is resolved, so the hopper error notification by the number of dispensed sheets display 127 is activated. finish.

In addition, in the same state, since the opening/closing sensor detected the closing of the front door 102, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 issued an opening notification (flashing red), and the speakers 272 and 277 issued an opening notification sound ( The main board display 190 outputs a voice saying "The door is open") and the door open error notification (segment e lights up in red). In addition to continuing the lighting and display of the normal screen on the liquid crystal display device 157, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the performance button 192 are lit in a performance mode to notify that the normal game can be started.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. , speakers 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), sound output means (for example, speakers 272, 277), and a plurality of a setting means capable of setting one of the setting values, the notifying means is configured to provide at least a first notification (for example, a hopper error) related to a certain error (for example, a hopper error). For example, it is a means that can start a hopper error notification by the payout number display 127, a hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190, and the power supply is turned off after the power is cut off while the above-mentioned certain error is occurring. There is a case (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") where a certain error has not been resolved when the power is turned on, and the power is cut off without an error occurring, and a certain operation using the setting key ( For example, if the power is turned on while the operation (from OFF to ON) has been performed, the setting value will be in a state where it can be changed (for example, setting change mode), and the state will be in a state where no error has occurred. If the certain operation is performed after the power is turned off and the power is turned on, the setting value will be in a state where it can be checked (for example, setting confirmation mode), and in the first case, the power is turned on. If the certain operation is performed during at least a part of the period after the input is made and before the first notification is started, the setting value becomes changeable, and in the first case , after the power is turned on, the sound output means produces a certain sound (for example, an opening notification sound indicating that the door is in an open state (for example, a sound saying "The door is open") , an error sound that indicates an error condition (for example, a sound such as "Hopper error"), or a power-on sound that indicates that the power is turned on (for example, a sound such as "The power has been turned on") , settings change notification sound (e.g., "Settings are being changed") indicating that settings are being changed, and settings confirmation sound (e.g., "Settings are being changed"). (e.g., "Initial settings in progress", "Preparing", etc.) or a warning sound indicating that initial settings are being made or preparations are being made (e.g., "Initial settings in progress", "Preparing", etc.). The setting value can be changed even when an operation is performed (for example, when the setting key is turned on from off as shown in FIG. 66(c)). It's a game machine.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change the set value even after the power is turned on, so it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk and the like. In addition, if the power is cut off while a certain error is occurring and the error is not resolved when the power is turned on (first case), if the power is turned off after the power is turned on, Even if a certain operation is performed using the setting key after the sound output means has been turned on and before the sound output means starts outputting a certain sound, the setting value will be changed to a state where the setting value can be changed. It is possible to change the set value even later, which increases convenience for game parlor staff and the like.

Further, in the first case, if the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on and after the first notification is started, the set value can be changed. The setting value may not be in a state in which the setting value can be confirmed, but an error state may occur, and when the error state is resolved, the setting value may be in a state in which the setting value can be confirmed.

With such a configuration, the set values cannot be confirmed unless the error is resolved, so the error can be reliably resolved, and the set values can be reliably confirmed before starting the game. can.

Further, in the first case, if the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on and before the first notification starts, the set value becomes changeable. , the error state may occur after the setting change operation is completed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent errors from being forgotten due to the work of changing settings, and it is possible to reliably eliminate errors before starting the game.

Further, in the first case, if the power is turned on while the certain operation is performed, the setting value becomes changeable, and an error state occurs after the setting change operation is completed. It may be something.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent errors from being forgotten due to the work of changing settings, and it is possible to reliably eliminate errors before starting the game.

Further, the certain sound may be the first sound output from the sound output means after the power is turned on.

With such a configuration, by performing a certain operation before a certain sound is output for the first time, the setting value can be changed to a state where it can be changed, so it is possible to change the timing when a certain operation should be performed. This can be known in advance, making it more convenient for game parlor staff and the like.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, a payout number display 127, a stored number display 125, a speaker 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), and display means capable of displaying at least the first display and the second display (for example , a liquid crystal display device 157), and a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values, the notification means being configured to detect at least a certain error (for example, a hopper error). ) is a means that can start the first notification (for example, hopper error notification by the payout number display 127, hopper error notification by segment f of the main board display 190) related to the above-mentioned certain error. When the power is turned on after the power is turned off in a state where the power is turned off, the error may not be resolved (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"). However, if the power is turned on while a certain operation (for example, turning on from off) is performed using a setting key, the setting value becomes changeable (for example, setting change mode). If the power is cut off with no error occurring and the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on, the setting value will be in a state where it can be confirmed (for example, setting confirmation mode), and the In the first case, the set value can be changed if the certain operation is performed during at least a part of the period after the power is turned on and before the first notification starts. The first display is a display that starts to be displayed in connection with the power being turned on (for example, the power-on display showing that the power has been turned on, as shown in FIG. 66(b)). and the second display is a display displayed as part of the first notification (for example, an error display showing that a hopper error has occurred as shown in FIG. 67(i)), In the first case, if the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on and before switching from the first display to the second display (for example, as shown in FIG. 66(c) The gaming machine is characterized in that the setting value becomes changeable when the setting key is turned on from off (as shown in FIG. 1).

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change the set value even after the power is turned on, so it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk and the like. In addition, if the power is cut off while a certain error is occurring and the certain error is not resolved when the power is turned on (first case), after the power is turned on, Before switching from the first display (the display that starts displaying in connection with the power being turned on) to the second display (the display that appears as part of the first notification), a certain setting key is pressed. When an operation is performed, the set values are changed to a state where they can be changed, so the set values can be changed even after the power is turned on, thereby increasing the convenience of the store staff at the game parlor.

Further, in the first case, if the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on and after the first notification is started, the set value can be changed. The setting value may not be in a state in which the setting value can be confirmed, but an error state may occur, and when the error state is resolved, the setting value may be in a state in which the setting value can be confirmed.

With such a configuration, the set values cannot be confirmed unless the error is resolved, so the error can be reliably resolved, and the set values can be reliably confirmed before starting the game. can.

Further, in the first case, if the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on and before the first notification starts, the set value becomes changeable. , the error state may occur after the setting change operation is completed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent errors from being forgotten due to the work of changing settings, and it is possible to reliably eliminate errors before starting the game.

Further, in the first case, if the power is turned on while the certain operation is performed, the setting value becomes changeable, and an error state occurs after the setting change operation is completed. It may be something.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent errors from being forgotten due to the work of changing settings, and it is possible to reliably eliminate errors before starting the game.

Further, the second display may include a display that allows the type of the certain error to be specified.

With such a configuration, errors can be dealt with quickly and convenience can be improved.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, a payout number display 127, a stored number display 125, a speaker 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), and a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values. , the notification means includes at least a first notification (for example, a hopper error notification by the payout number display 127, a main board display 190) related to a certain error (for example, a hopper error). hopper error notification) using segment f of the hopper, and when the power is turned on after the power is cut off while the certain error has occurred, the certain error has not been resolved ( (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the power is cut off when no error occurs, and the power supply is turned off when a certain operation is performed using the setting key (for example, turning it on from off). is turned on, the setting value becomes changeable (for example, setting change mode), the power is turned off in a state where no error occurs, and the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on. In the first case, after the power is turned on and before the first notification is started. If the certain operation is performed during at least a part of the period, the setting value becomes changeable, and an error state related to the certain error occurs in connection with the completion of changing the setting value. This game machine is characterized by:

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change the set value even after the power is turned on, so it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk and the like. In addition, since the error state is entered after the setting value change is completed, you will not forget to deal with the error due to the work of changing the setting, and you can definitely eliminate the error before starting the game. .

Furthermore, the completion of changing the set value may mean that the set value is changed and the certain operation is completed.

With such a configuration, the error can be reliably resolved after a certain operation using the setting key is completed.

Further, in the first case, if the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on and after the first notification is started, the set value can be changed. The setting value may not be in a state in which the setting value can be confirmed, but the setting value may be in the error state, and when the error state is resolved, the setting value may be in a state in which the setting value can be confirmed.

With such a configuration, the set values cannot be confirmed unless the error is resolved, so the error can be reliably resolved, and the set values can be reliably confirmed before starting the game. can.

Further, in the first case, if the power is turned on while the certain operation is performed, the setting value becomes changeable, and after the setting change operation is completed, the error state returns. It may be something like that.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent errors from being forgotten due to the work of changing settings, and it is possible to reliably eliminate errors before starting the game.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, a payout number display 127, a stored number display 125, a speaker 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), and a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values. , the notification means includes at least a first notification (for example, a hopper error notification by the payout number display 127, a main board display 190) related to a certain error (for example, a hopper error). hopper error notification) using segment f of the hopper, and when the power is turned on after the power is cut off while the certain error has occurred, the certain error has not been resolved ( (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the power is cut off when no error occurs, and the power supply is turned off when a certain operation is performed using the setting key (for example, turning it on from off). is turned on, the setting value becomes changeable (for example, setting change mode), the power is turned off in a state where no error occurs, and the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on. In the first case, after the power is turned on and before the first notification is started. (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), the setting value becomes changeable, and the setting shifts to the second case. A game machine characterized in that when the power is cut off without completing the change of the set value in a state where the value can be changed, and the power is turned on again, the set value becomes the state where the set value can be changed. It is.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change the set value even after the power is turned on, so it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk and the like. In addition, if the power is cut off while a certain error is occurring, and the error is not resolved when the power is turned on (first case), the setting value change may not be completed. If the power is turned off and the power is turned on again, the set value can be changed, so changing the set value can be prioritized over notifying an error, and you can avoid forgetting to change the setting. etc. can be prevented.

Further, in the first case, if the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on and after the first notification is started, the set value can be changed. The setting value may not be in a state in which the setting value can be confirmed, but an error state may occur, and when the error state is resolved, the setting value may be in a state in which the setting value can be confirmed.

With such a configuration, the set values cannot be confirmed unless the error is resolved, so the error can be reliably resolved, and the set values can be reliably confirmed before starting the game. can.

Further, in the first case, if the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on and before the first notification starts, the set value becomes changeable. , the error state may occur after the setting change operation is completed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent errors from being forgotten due to the work of changing settings, and it is possible to reliably eliminate errors before starting the game.

Further, in the first case, if the power is turned on while the certain operation is performed, the setting value becomes changeable, and an error state occurs after the setting change operation is completed. It may be something.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent errors from being forgotten due to the work of changing settings, and it is possible to reliably eliminate errors before starting the game.

<Changing settings when a certain error remains (Modification 3)>
Next, using FIGS. 68 and 69, a description will be given of a setting change (modified example 3) when a certain error remains.

FIGS. 68(a) to 69(j) are diagrams chronologically showing setting changes (modified example 3) when a certain error remains. This example is an example in which the error can be resolved during a setting change while a certain error remains, and the certain error may be resolved without error notification being performed.

<Changing settings when a certain error remains (Modification 3)/Before turning on the power (error remaining)>
The state shown in FIG. 68(a) is a state in which a hopper error (a certain error) has occurred (remains) before the power is turned on.

In this state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, notifications are provided by display means (liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, etc.), notifications by light emitting means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.), No notification is provided by the sound output means (speakers 277, 278).

<Changing settings while a certain error remains (Modification 3)/Turning on the power>
The state shown in FIG. 68(b) is a state in which an employee of the game parlor or the like opens the front door 102 and operates the power switch disposed inside the main body 101 to turn on the power.

In the same state, power is supplied to the slot machine 100 and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 has been opened. 102 is in the open state (open notification), and by lighting segment e of the main board display 190 in red, a door open error notification indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state is issued. conduct.

In addition, in the same state, since the power has been turned on to the slot machine 100, a power-on display (first display; At the same time, since the restoration process such as initial setting has been completed, the storage number display 125 is turned on.

<Setting change when a certain error remains (Modification 3)/Setting key operation>
The state shown in FIG. 68(c) is a state in which the setting key is turned from off to on before the hopper error (a certain error) is notified.

In the slot machine 100 of this example, the power is cut off while a certain error (hopper error in this example) has occurred, and when the power is turned on, the certain error has not been resolved (first case). ), after the power is turned on, the first notification indicating that a certain error has occurred (in this example, the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127, the hopper error notification by the main board display 190) If a certain operation (in this example, turning the setting key from OFF to ON) is performed at least part of the period before the notification (notification, hopper error display on the liquid crystal display device 157) is started, the setting value is changed. It is configured to transition to a changeable state (setting change mode).

In the state shown in FIG. 68(c), the setting key is turned on from off before the hopper error notification is started, so the setting change mode is entered.

According to this example, it is possible to change the set value even after the power is turned on, so it is possible to improve the convenience of the store staff at the game parlor and the like.

<Changing settings while a certain error remains (Modification 3)/Moving to setting change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 68(d) is a state in which the setting change mode has been entered.

In this example, in the state shown in FIG. 68(c), since the setting key is turned on from off, the setting change mode is entered, and the setting value is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. A setting changing display (in this example, a display including the character string "Settings changing") indicating that the settings are in a changeable state is displayed.

<Setting change when a certain error remains (Modification 3)/Setting value change operation>
The state shown in FIG. 68(e) is a state in which setting values are being changed using the setting switch.

In the same state, while displaying the set value on the payout number display 127, each time a press operation by the operating means (setting switch) is detected, 1 is added to the currently set set values 1 to 6. In this example, the setting value is changed from setting 1 to setting 3.

<Changing settings when a certain error remains (Modification 3)/Resolving connection abnormality and error>
The state shown in FIG. 68(f) is the state in which the connection abnormality caused by the hopper error has been resolved (the first condition is met) during the setting change, and the state shown in FIG. 69(g) is the state in which the hopper error ( The setting switch (which also serves as a reset button) is operated in order to resolve the hopper error (certain error) (the second condition is met by the first operation), and the hopper error (certain error) that occurred before the power was turned on is resolved. The situation is as follows.

In the slot machine 100 of this example, if the power is cut off while a certain error (hopper error in this example) has occurred, and the certain error has not been resolved when the power is turned on (first When the operating means (in this example, the setting switch) is operated to resolve an error in a state where the setting values that have been transferred to (in the case of 1) can be changed (in this example, setting change mode), The configuration is such that the setting value changes as the error is resolved.

In the state shown in FIG. 69(g), since the setting switch is being operated in the setting change mode, the hopper error (a certain error) is resolved and the setting value changes from setting 3 to setting 4. ing.

According to this example, since it is possible to eliminate a certain error and change the setting value by operating the same operation means, it is possible to avoid forgetting to deal with the error due to the work of changing the setting, and it is possible to improve the performance of the game parlor. Convenience for store staff, etc. can be improved.

<Setting change when a certain error remains (Variation 3)/Setting change completed>
The state shown in FIG. 69(h) is that after the setting value is fixed and the setting change is completed, a certain operation with the setting key is canceled (the setting key is turned off after the setting key is turned from on to off). (unplugged), and the settings change mode has ended.

In the same state, since the push operation by the operating means (in this example, the start lever 135) was accepted, the setting value was determined to setting 4, and the setting change mode ended, so the stored sheet number display 125 was set. At the same time as the value display ends, a demonstration screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 instead of the setting change in progress display.

In addition, in this example, since the hopper error (certain error) has been resolved in the state shown in FIG. 69(g), even if the setting change mode ends, the error state does not change and the error notification is performed. The game returns to a state where normal games can be played.

According to this example, when a certain error is resolved in the settings change mode, the normal game is possible without an error notification, so the normal game is started immediately after the settings change mode ends. be able to.

<Setting change when a certain error remains (Variation 3)/Closing the front door → Normal game>
The state shown in FIG. 69(i) is a state in which the front door 102 has been closed by a clerk at the gaming parlor after the hopper error has been resolved, and FIG. 69(j) is a state in which normal gaming has started.

In the state shown in FIG. 69(i), since the opening/closing sensor detects the closing of the front door 102, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 are used to notify the opening (blinking red), and the main board display 190 While the door opening error notification (segment e lights up in red) is terminated, the storage number display 125 and the payout number display 127 continue to light up and the normal screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and the upper lamp 142 , the side lamp 144 and the presentation button 192 are turned on in a presentation mode, and a demonstration screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

In the state shown in FIG. 69(j), since medals have been inserted, a normal screen is displayed in place of the demo screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and a normal game is started.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. , speakers 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.) and one of a plurality of setting values can be set. a setting means, and the notifying means includes at least a first notification (for example, a hopper error notification by the payout number display 127, a main notification) related to a certain error (for example, a hopper error). This means can start a hopper error notification (via segment f of the board display 190), and when the power is turned on after the power is cut off while the certain error is occurring, the certain error is resolved. (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the power is cut off without an error occurring, and a certain operation using the setting key (for example, turning on from off) is performed. If the power is turned on in the state, the setting value becomes changeable (for example, setting change mode), the power is turned off in a state where no error occurs, and the power is turned on after the power is turned on. When an operation is performed, the setting value becomes available for confirmation (for example, setting confirmation mode), and in the first case, the first notification is made after the power is turned on. If the certain operation is performed during at least a part of the period before the start (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), the setting value becomes changeable, and in the second case A game characterized in that the certain error can be resolved in a state where the setting value can be changed (for example, in the state shown in FIG. 69(g), the hopper error can be resolved in the setting change mode). It is a stand.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change the set value even after the power is turned on, so it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk and the like. Furthermore, since certain errors can be resolved in a state in which setting values can be changed, certain errors can be resolved during the setting change work, and convenience for game parlor employees and the like can be improved.

Furthermore, if the certain error is resolved in the state in which the setting values can be changed in the second case, the state becomes available for normal gaming without the first notification being performed. It's okay.

With such a configuration, the normal game can be started immediately after the setting change mode ends.

Further, the operating means (for example, a setting switch) is provided, and the operating means is a means for changing the set value when the set value is operated in a state where the set value can be changed; It is a means to be operated when resolving an error, and when the said operating means is operated when resolving the certain error in a state in which the setting value transferred to the second case can be changed, the corresponding or The setting value may be changed as the error is resolved.

With this configuration, it is possible to resolve a certain error and change the setting value using the same operation means, so you will not forget to deal with the error due to the work of changing the setting, and the game will be improved. Convenience for store staff, etc. can be improved.

Further, in the first case, if the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on and after the first notification is started, the set value can be changed. The setting value may not be in a state in which the setting value can be confirmed, but an error state may occur, and when the error state is resolved, the setting value may be in a state in which the setting value can be confirmed.

With such a configuration, the set values cannot be confirmed unless the error is resolved, so the error can be reliably resolved, and the set values can be reliably confirmed before starting the game. can.

Further, in the first case, if the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on and before the first notification starts, the set value becomes changeable. , the error state may occur after the setting change operation is completed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent errors from being forgotten due to the work of changing settings, and it is possible to reliably eliminate errors before starting the game.

Further, in the first case, if the power is turned on while the certain operation is performed, the setting value becomes changeable, and an error state occurs after the setting change operation is completed. It may be something.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent errors from being forgotten due to the work of changing settings, and it is possible to reliably eliminate errors before starting the game.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, a payout number display 127, a stored number display 125, a speaker 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), and a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values. , the notification means includes at least a first notification (for example, a hopper error notification by the payout number display 127, a main board display 190) related to a certain error (for example, a hopper error). hopper error notification) using segment f of the hopper, and when the power is turned on after the power is cut off while the certain error has occurred, the certain error has not been resolved ( (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the power is cut off when no error occurs, and the power supply is turned off when a certain operation is performed using the setting key (for example, turning it on from off). is turned on, the setting value becomes changeable (for example, setting change mode), the power is turned off in a state where no error occurs, and the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on. In the first case, after the power is turned on and before the first notification is started. (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), the setting value becomes changeable, and the first notification by the notification means is In the case where the certain error is resolved without any notification being performed (hereinafter referred to as the "third case"), for example, as shown in FIG. 69(g), the hopper error is resolved without any hopper error notification being performed. This is a gaming machine characterized by the fact that there is a case).

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change the set value even after the power is turned on, so it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk and the like. Further, since a certain error may be resolved without the first notification being performed, it becomes unnecessary to deal with the certain error, and the burden on the staff of the game parlor etc. can be reduced.

Further, the third case is a case where the certain error is resolved in a state where the setting value can be changed in the first case.
With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate certain errors in the work of changing the settings, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the staff at the game parlor.

Further, the operating means (for example, a setting switch) is provided, and the operating means is a means for changing the set value when the set value is operated in a state where the set value can be changed; It is a means to be operated when resolving an error, and when the said operating means is operated when resolving the certain error in the state where the setting value can be changed in the second case, the certain error is removed. The set value may change as the problem is resolved.

With this configuration, it is possible to resolve a certain error and change the setting value using the same operation means, so you will not forget to deal with the error due to the work of changing the setting, and the game will be improved. Convenience for store staff, etc. can be improved.

Further, the first notification may be a display displayed on a liquid crystal display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157).

With such a configuration, a certain error may be resolved without the first notification being made by the liquid crystal display means. It does not cause unnecessary anxiety or burden to the person.

<Changing settings when a certain error remains (Modification 4)>
Next, using FIGS. 70 and 71, a description will be given of a setting change (modification 4) when a certain error remains.

FIGS. 70(a) to 71(k) are diagrams chronologically showing setting changes (modified example 4) when a certain error remains. This example is an example in which it is impossible to eliminate the error while changing settings while a certain error remains.

Note that since FIGS. 70(a) to 70(f) are the same as the states explained using FIGS. 68(a) to 68(f), their explanation will be omitted, and FIG. The drawings will be explained.

<Changing settings when a certain error remains (Modification 4)/Resolving connection abnormality and error>
The state shown in FIG. 71(g) is a state in which the setting switch is operated to change the setting value.

In the slot machine 100 of this example, if the power is cut off while a certain error (hopper error in this example) has occurred, and the certain error has not been resolved when the power is turned on (first When the operating means (in this example, the setting switch) is operated to resolve an error in a state where the setting values that have been transferred to (in the case of 1) can be changed (in this example, setting change mode), The configuration is such that the set value changes without the error being resolved.

In the state shown in Figure 71(g), since the setting switch is being operated in the setting change mode, the hopper error (certain error) is not resolved, but the setting value changes from setting 3 to setting 4. There is.

According to this example, since the operations for changing the setting value and resolving the error can be executed separately, it is possible to reliably perform the operation of changing the setting value and dealing with the error, and The reliability of the work of store clerks, etc. can be improved.

<Setting change when a certain error remains (Modification 4)/Setting change completed>
The state shown in FIG. 71(h) is a state in which a certain operation using the setting key is canceled (the setting key is removed after the setting key is turned from on to off) and the setting change mode has ended.

In the slot machine 100 of this example, if the power is cut off while a certain error (hopper error in this example) has occurred, and the certain error has not been resolved when the power is turned on (first ), if the power is turned on while a certain operation is performed using the setting key (in this example, turning the setting key from on to off), the setting value can be changed (in this example, when the power is turned on) The system is configured to shift to the setting change mode) and shift to an error state after the setting change operation is completed.

In the state shown in FIG. 71(h), the setting change mode (a state in which setting values can be changed) has been completed while a hopper error (a certain error) remains, so the state shifts to an error state and the payout Hopper error notification by the number of sheets display 127 and hopper error notification by segment f of the main board display 190 are started, and an error display (main In the example, the character string "Hopper error. Please call an attendant" is displayed.

According to this example, the error state is entered after the setting value change is completed, so you will not forget to deal with the error due to the work of changing the setting, and the error will be reliably resolved before starting the game. can do.

<Changing settings when a certain error remains (Modification 4)/Resolving the error>
In the state shown in FIG. 71(i), the setting switch (which also serves as a reset button) is operated while not in the setting change mode (the second condition is met), and the hopper error (a certain error) is resolved. Then, the hopper error notification by the payout number display 127 is ended.

<Setting change when a certain error remains (Variation 4)/Closing the front door → Normal game>
The state shown in FIG. 71(j) is a state in which the clerk of the gaming parlor has closed the front door 102 after the hopper error has been resolved, and FIG. 71(k) is the state in which the normal game has started.

In the state shown in FIG. 71(j), since the opening/closing sensor detects the closing of the front door 102, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are activated to notify the opening (blinking red), and the main board display 190 is activated. While the door opening error notification (segment e lights up in red) is terminated, the storage number display 125 and the payout number display 127 continue to light up and the normal screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and the upper lamp 142 , the side lamp 144 and the presentation button 192 are turned on in a presentation mode, and a demonstration screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

In the state shown in FIG. 71(k), since medals have been inserted, a normal screen is displayed in place of the demo screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and a normal game is started.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. , speakers 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.) and one of a plurality of setting values can be set. a setting means, and the notifying means includes at least a first notification (for example, a hopper error notification by the payout number display 127, a main notification) related to a certain error (for example, a hopper error). This means can start a hopper error notification (via segment f of the board display 190), and when the power is turned on after the power is cut off while the certain error is occurring, the certain error is resolved. (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the power is cut off without an error occurring, and a certain operation using the setting key (for example, turning on from off) is performed. If the power is turned on in the state, the setting value becomes changeable (for example, setting change mode), the power is turned off in a state where no error occurs, and the power is turned on after the power is turned on. When an operation is performed, the setting value becomes available for confirmation (for example, setting confirmation mode), and in the first case, the first notification is made after the power is turned on. If the certain operation is performed during at least a part of the period before the start (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), the setting value becomes changeable, and in the second case The gaming machine is characterized in that the certain error cannot be resolved in a state in which the transferred setting values can be changed.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change the set value even after the power is turned on, so it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk and the like. In addition, since certain errors cannot be resolved while the setting values can be changed, it is possible to perform the operations of changing the setting values and resolving the error separately. Each of the above measures can be reliably carried out, and the reliability of the work of the game parlor staff can be improved.

The operation means (for example, a setting switch) is provided, and the operation means is a means for changing the set value when the set value is operated in a state where the set value can be changed, and the operation means is a means for changing the set value when the set value is changed. It is a means to be operated when resolving an error, and when the said operating means is operated when resolving the certain error in the state where the setting value can be changed in the second case, the certain error is removed. The set value may change without being resolved.

With this configuration, the operations for changing setting values and resolving errors can be executed separately, so changing the setting values and dealing with errors can be performed reliably. It is possible to improve the reliability of the work of game store clerks and the like.

Further, in the first case, if the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on and after the first notification is started, the set value can be changed. The setting value may not be in a state in which the setting value can be confirmed, but an error state may occur, and when the error state is resolved, the setting value may be in a state in which the setting value can be confirmed.

With such a configuration, the set values cannot be confirmed unless the error is resolved, so the error can be reliably resolved, and the set values can be reliably confirmed before starting the game. can.

Further, in the first case, if the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on and before the first notification starts, the set value becomes changeable. , the error state may occur after the setting change operation is completed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent errors from being forgotten due to the work of changing settings, and it is possible to reliably eliminate errors before starting the game.

Further, in the first case, if the power is turned on while the certain operation is performed, the setting value becomes changeable, and an error state occurs after the setting change operation is completed. It may be something.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent errors from being forgotten due to the work of changing settings, and it is possible to reliably eliminate errors before starting the game.

<Changing settings when a certain error remains (Modification 5)>
Next, a description will be given of a setting change (modified example 5) when a certain error remains.

FIGS. 72(a) to 73(j) are diagrams chronologically showing setting changes (modified example 5) when a certain error remains. This example is an example in which a certain error is resolved without any error notification before proceeding to a setting change while a certain error remains, and the game is returned to a state in which a game can be played after the setting change is completed. .

<Changing settings when a certain error remains (Modification 5)/Before turning on the power (error remaining)>
The state shown in FIG. 72(a) is a state in which a hopper error (a certain error) has occurred (remains) before the power is turned on.

In this state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, notifications are provided by display means (liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, etc.), notifications by light emitting means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.), No notification is provided by the sound output means (speakers 277, 278).

<Changing settings while a certain error remains (Modification 5)/Turning on the power>
The state shown in FIG. 72(b) is a state in which the clerk of the game parlor or the like opens the front door 102 and turns on the power.

In the same state, power is supplied to the slot machine 100 and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 has been opened. 102 is in the open state (open notification), and by lighting segment e of the main board display 190 in red, a door open error notification indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state is issued. conduct.

In addition, in the same state, since the power has been turned on to the slot machine 100, a power-on display (first display; Displays the string "" has been submitted".

<Setting change when a certain error remains (Modification 5)/Setting key operation>
The state shown in FIG. 72(c) is a state in which the setting key is turned from off to on before the hopper error (a certain error) is notified.

In the same state, a certain operation was performed using the setting key (in this example, turning the setting key from on to off), but the state was not changed to the setting change mode (a state in which setting values can be changed). For this reason, the power-on display continues in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. Further, in this state, a hopper error (certain error) remains, but no hopper error notification is performed.

<Changing settings when a certain error remains (Modification 5)/Resolving connection abnormality and error>
The state shown in FIG. 72(d) is the state in which the connection abnormality due to the hopper error has been resolved (the first condition is satisfied) during the setting change, and the state shown in FIG. 72(e) is the state in which the hopper error ( The reset button is operated to resolve the hopper error (certain error) (the second condition is satisfied by the first operation), and the hopper error (certain error) that occurred before the power was turned on has been resolved.

The state shown in FIG. 72(d) is a state in which a hopper error (a certain error) remains, but the hopper error notification is not performed and the state shifts to setting change mode (a state in which setting values can be changed). Since this is the state before switching on, the power-on display continues in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

In addition, in this state, the front door 102 is open, so an open notification sound (in this example, a sound saying "The door is open") indicating that the door body is open is emitted. Output from speakers 272 and 277.

Since the state shown in FIG. 72(e) is a state in which the hopper error (a certain error) has been resolved, the hopper error notification is not performed, but the state is shifted to the setting change mode (a state in which the setting value can be changed). Since this is the previous state, the power-on display continues in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

<Changing settings while a certain error remains (Modification 5)/Moving to setting change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 72(f) is a state in which the setting change mode has been entered.

In this example, in the state shown in FIG. 72(c), since the setting key is turned on from off, the setting change mode is entered and the setting value is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. A setting changing display (in this example, a display including the character string "Settings changing") indicating that the settings are in a changeable state is displayed.

<Setting change when a certain error remains (Modification 5)/Setting value change operation>
The state shown in FIG. 73(g) is a state in which setting values are being changed using the setting switch.

In the same state, while displaying the set value on the payout number display 127, each time a press operation by the operating means (setting switch) is detected, 1 is added to the currently set set values 1 to 6. In this example, the setting value is changed to setting 6.

<Setting change when a certain error remains (Modification 5)/Setting change completed>
The state shown in FIG. 73(h) is that after the setting value is fixed and the setting change is completed, a certain operation using the setting key is canceled (the setting key is turned off after the setting key is turned from on to off). (unplugged), and the settings change mode has ended.

In the same state, since the push operation by the operating means (in this example, the start lever 135) was accepted, the setting value was determined to setting 6, and the setting change mode ended, so the setting by the storage number display 125 At the same time as the value display ends, a demonstration screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 instead of the setting change in progress display.

In addition, since this state is a state in which the front door 102 is open, the opening notification sound that has been repeatedly outputted (in this example, "The door is open") is triggered by the completion of the setting change. output (restart) from the beginning. Note that, upon completion of the setting change, the setting change notification (for example, a voice saying "Settings are being changed") that was output during the setting change may be switched to an open notification sound.

In the slot machine 100 of this example, after the power is turned on, the first notification (in this example, a hopper error notification by the payout number display 127, a hopper error notification by the main board display 190, and a hopper error notification by the liquid crystal display 157) If a certain operation using the setting key (in this example, turning the setting key from on to off) is performed at least part of the period before the hopper error display (hopper error display) is started (in the second case) , if a certain error (hopper error in this example) is resolved (in the third case) before transitioning to a state where the setting value can be changed (in this example, setting change mode), then transition is made. After completing the change of the setting value in the state where the setting value can be changed, the system may shift to a state where the game can be played.

In this example, as explained using FIG. 72(e), the hopper error (certain error) has been resolved before entering the setting change mode, so the error will not occur even after the setting change mode ends. As described with reference to FIGS. 73(i) and 73(j), without transitioning to the state and without error notification being performed, the state shifts to a state in which normal games can be played.

According to this example, if a certain error is resolved before the setting value moves to a changeable state, then after completing the change of the setting value in the changeable state, In this case, the game may be changed to a state where games can be played, so the normal game can be started immediately after the setting change mode ends.

<Setting change when a certain error remains (Variation 5)/Closing the front door → Normal game>
The state shown in FIG. 73(i) is a state in which the front door 102 has been closed by a clerk at the gaming parlor after the hopper error has been resolved, and FIG. 73(j) is a state in which normal gaming has started.

In the state shown in FIG. 73(i), since the opening/closing sensor detects the closing of the front door 102, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the production button 192 are used to notify the opening (blinking red), and the main board display 190 While the door opening error notification (segment e lights up in red) is terminated, the storage number display 125 and the payout number display 127 continue to light up and the normal screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and the upper lamp 142 , the side lamp 144 and the presentation button 192 are turned on in a presentation mode, and a demonstration screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

In the state shown in FIG. 73(j), since medals have been inserted, a normal screen is displayed in place of the demo screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and a normal game is started.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. , speakers 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.) and one of a plurality of setting values can be set. a setting means, and the notifying means includes at least a first notification (for example, a hopper error notification by the payout number display 127, a main notification) related to a certain error (for example, a hopper error). This means can start a hopper error notification (via segment f of the board display 190), and when the power is turned on after the power is cut off while the certain error is occurring, the certain error is resolved. (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the power is cut off without an error occurring, and a certain operation using the setting key (for example, turning on from off) is performed. If the power is turned on in the state, the setting value becomes changeable (for example, setting change mode), the power is turned off in a state where no error occurs, and the power is turned on after the power is turned on. When an operation is performed, the setting value becomes available for confirmation (for example, setting confirmation mode), and in the first case, the first notification is made after the power is turned on. If the certain operation is performed during at least a part of the period before the start, the setting value is changed to a changeable state, and in the second case, the setting value is changed to a changeable state. In the case where the certain error is resolved before changing the settings (hereinafter referred to as the "third case"; for example, when the hopper error is resolved before shifting to the setting change mode as shown in FIG. 72(e)), , the game machine is characterized in that after the change of the setting value is completed in a state where the setting value can be changed, the game machine may change to a state where a game can be played.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change the set value even after the power is turned on, so it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk and the like. In addition, if a certain error is resolved before the setting value changes to a state where the setting value can be changed, after the setting value has been changed in the state where the setting value can be changed, the game will be stopped. Therefore, the normal game can be started immediately after the setting change mode ends.

Further, in the third case, the notification means may start a second notification in connection with the completion of the change of the setting value (when the change of the setting value is completed), The second notification includes a notification that the door body is open (for example, an opening notification sound (for example, a sound saying "The door is open"), an upper lamp 142, a side lamp 144, and a production button 192. It may be an open notification (for example, flashing red) or a door open error notification by the main board display 190 (for example, lighting of segment e in red).

With such a configuration, it is possible to know that a certain error has been resolved, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the store staff at the game parlor.

Furthermore, in the third case, there may be a case where the state shifts to a state in which a game can be played without the first notification being performed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to know that a certain error has been resolved, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the store staff at the game parlor.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, a payout number display 127, a stored number display 125, a speaker 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), and a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values. , the notification means includes at least a first notification (for example, a hopper error notification by the payout number display 127, a main board display 190) related to a certain error (for example, a hopper error). hopper error notification) using segment f of the hopper, and when the power is turned on after the power is cut off while the certain error has occurred, the certain error has not been resolved ( (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the power is cut off when no error occurs, and the power supply is turned off when a certain operation is performed using the setting key (for example, turning it on from off). is turned on, the setting value becomes changeable (for example, setting change mode), the power is turned off in a state where no error occurs, and the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on. In the first case, after the power is turned on and before the first notification is started. (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), the setting value becomes changeable, and the first notification by the notification means is A case where the certain error is resolved without any notification being performed (hereinafter referred to as the "third case"; for example, a case where the hopper error is resolved without any hopper error notification being performed as shown in FIG. 72(e)) and in the third case, after completing the change of the setting value in the state where the setting value can be changed, there is a case where the game machine shifts to a state where the game is possible. .

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change the set value even after the power is turned on, so it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk and the like. In addition, since a certain error may be resolved without the first notification being made, it becomes unnecessary to deal with a certain error, which can reduce the burden on the staff of the game parlor, etc. If the error is resolved, the setting value may be changed to a state where the game can be played after completing the change of the setting value in the state where the setting value can be changed. After the game ends, you can immediately start playing the normal game.

Further, the third case may be a case where the certain error is resolved in a state where the set value can be changed in the first case.

With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate certain errors in the work of changing the settings, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the staff at the game parlor.

The operation means (for example, a setting switch) is provided, and the operation means is a means for changing the set value when the set value is operated in a state where the set value can be changed, and the operation means is a means for changing the set value when the set value is changed. means to be operated when resolving an error, and when the operating means is operated in the case of resolving the certain error in the state where the setting value can be changed in the second case, the certain error is removed. The set value may change as the problem is resolved.

With this configuration, it is possible to resolve a certain error and change the setting value using the same operation means, so you will not forget to deal with the error due to the work of changing the setting, and the game will be improved. Convenience for store staff, etc. can be improved.

Further, the first notification may be a display displayed on a liquid crystal display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157).

With such a configuration, a certain error may be resolved without the first notification being made by the liquid crystal display means. It does not cause unnecessary anxiety or burden to the person.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, a payout number display 127, a stored number display 125, a speaker 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), and a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values. , the notification means includes at least a first notification (for example, a hopper error notification by the payout number display 127, a main board display 190) related to a certain error (for example, a hopper error). hopper error notification) using segment f of the hopper, and when the power is turned on after the power is cut off while the certain error has occurred, the certain error has not been resolved ( (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the power is cut off when no error occurs, and the power supply is turned off when a certain operation is performed using the setting key (for example, turning it on from off). is turned on, the setting value becomes changeable (for example, setting change mode), the power is turned off in a state where no error occurs, and the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on. In the first case, after the power is turned on and before the first notification is started. When the certain operation is performed during at least a part of the period, the setting value is changed to a state where the setting value can be changed, and in the second case, the setting value is changed in the state where the setting value is changeable. is completed, an error state related to the certain error occurs, and in the second case, the certain error is resolved before the setting value can be changed (hereinafter referred to as the "third case"). For example, when the hopper error is resolved before transitioning to the setting change mode as shown in FIG. In the gaming machine, the certain error may not be resolved in the state where the setting value can be changed in the second case. good.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change the set value even after the power is turned on, so it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk and the like. In addition, if a certain error is resolved before the setting value is changed to a changeable state, the game may be stopped after completing the change of the setting value in the changeable state. Since the game may shift to a possible state, the normal game can be started immediately after the setting change mode ends. In addition, since certain errors cannot be resolved while the setting values can be changed, it is possible to perform the operations of changing the setting values and resolving the error separately. Each of the above measures can be reliably carried out, and the reliability of the work of the game parlor staff can be improved.

Further, in the third case, the notification means may start a second notification in connection with the completion of the change of the set value, and the second notification may be performed when the door body is opened. It may also be a notification of the status.

With such a configuration, it is possible to know that a certain error has been resolved and that the door body is in an open state, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the store staff and the like at the game parlor.

Furthermore, in the third case, the game may become possible without the first notification being performed.

With such a configuration, there is no need to deal with certain errors, and the burden on the store staff at the game parlor can be reduced.

Further, in the second case, if the certain error is not resolved before the setting value becomes changeable, the error state occurs after the setting value change is completed, and the error state occurs. One notification may be started.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably notify that a certain error remains, and it is possible to take measures against the certain error.

<Changing settings when a certain error remains (Variation 6)>
Next, using FIGS. 74 and 75, a description will be given of a setting change (modification 6) when a certain error remains.

FIGS. 74(a) to 75(k) are diagrams chronologically showing setting changes (modified example 6) when a certain error remains. This example is an example in which the second error notification may be executed during a setting change while a certain error remains.

<Changing settings when a certain error remains (Variation 6)/Before turning on the power (error remaining)>
The state shown in FIG. 74(a) is a state in which a hopper error (a certain error) has occurred (remains) before the power is turned on.

In this state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, notifications are provided by display means (liquid crystal display device 157, payout number display 127, etc.), notifications by light emitting means (upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, etc.), No notification is provided by the sound output means (speakers 277, 278).

<Changing settings while a certain error remains (Variation 6)/Turning on the power>
The state shown in FIG. 74(b) is a state in which the clerk of the game parlor or the like opens the front door 102 and turns on the power.

In the same state, power is supplied to the slot machine 100 and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 has been opened. 102 is in the open state (open notification), and by lighting segment e of the main board display 190 in red, a door open error notification indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state is issued. conduct.

In addition, in the same state, since the power has been turned on to the slot machine 100, a power-on display (first display; At the same time, the stored number display 125 is turned on because the initial setting and other restoration processing has been completed.

<Setting change when a certain error remains (Variation 6)/Setting key operation>
The state shown in FIG. 74(c) is a state in which the setting key is turned from off to on before the hopper error (a certain error) is notified.

In the slot machine 100 of this example, the power is cut off while a certain error (hopper error in this example) has occurred, and when the power is turned on, the certain error has not been resolved (first case). ), at least part of the time after the power is turned on and before the first notification indicating that a certain error has occurred (in this example, the hopper error notification by the liquid crystal display device 157) is started. If a certain operation is performed during this period (in this example, turning the setting key from off to on), the setting value is configured to shift to a state where it can be changed (in this example, setting change mode). ing.

In the state shown in FIG. 74(c), the setting key is turned on from off before the liquid crystal display device 157 starts reporting the hopper error, so the setting change mode is entered.

According to this example, it is possible to change the set value even after the power is turned on, so it is possible to improve the convenience of the store staff at the game parlor and the like.

Further, in the slot machine 100 of this example, a first notification (in this example, a hopper error notification by the liquid crystal display device 157) indicating that a certain error (in this example, a hopper error) has occurred is started. If a certain operation (in this example, the operation of turning the setting key from OFF to ON) is performed during at least a part of the period before the setting value is changed (in the second case), the setting value is changed to a changeable state (in this example). (setting change mode), a second notification indicating that a certain error has occurred (in this example, a hopper error notification by the storage number display 125 and a hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190) The system is configured in such a way that notifications) may be executed.

In the state shown in FIG. 74(c), by lighting segment f of the main board display 190 (second notification means) in red, a hopper error notification (second notification) indicates that a hopper error has occurred. Hopper error notification (notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred by displaying an error code (in this example, "E4") using the storage number display 125 (second notification means). (second notification).

According to this example, the settings changed when a certain operation is performed at least for a part of the period before the first notification indicating that a certain error has occurred (second case) Since the second notification may be executed when the value can be changed, it is possible to know that an error has occurred even when the setting value can be changed, and the staff at the game parlor etc. can increase the convenience of

In addition, in this example, as the first notification, an example was shown in which the hopper error notification is performed by the liquid crystal display device 157, but the "first notification" according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and may be used for other notifications. The notification may be made by other means.

Further, in this example, as the second notification, the hopper error notification is performed by the storage number display 125 and the hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190. The "notification" is not limited to this example, and may be notification by other notification means. Further, the number of "second notifications" is not limited to two, and may be only one of them, and in addition to these notifications, a second notification using other notification means may be made. It's okay.

<Changing settings while a certain error remains (Variation 6)/Moving to setting change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 74(d) is a state in which the setting change mode has been entered.

In this example, in the state shown in FIG. 74(c), since the setting key is turned on from off, the setting change mode is entered and the setting value is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. A setting changing display (in this example, a display including the character string "Settings changing") indicating that the settings are in a changeable state is displayed.

In addition, in the same state, since the hopper error has not been resolved, the hopper error notification (second notification) is issued by the segment f of the main board display 190 (second notification means), and the stored sheet number display 125 (second notification) is issued. Continue the hopper error notification (second notification) by the second notification means).

<Setting change when a certain error remains (Modification 6)/Setting value change operation>
The state shown in FIG. 74(e) is a state in which setting values are being changed using the setting switch.

In the same state, while displaying the set value on the payout number display 127, each time a press operation by the operating means (setting switch) is detected, 1 is added to the currently set set values 1 to 6. In this example, the setting value is changed to setting 6.

In addition, in the same state, since the hopper error has not been resolved, the hopper error notification (second notification) is issued by the segment f of the main board display 190 (second notification means), and the stored sheet number display 125 (second notification) is issued. Continue the hopper error notification (second notification) by the second notification means).

<Setting change while a certain error remains (Variation 6)/Setting change completed>
The state shown in FIG. 74(f) is a state after the setting value is determined and the setting change is completed, but before a certain operation by the setting key is released (before the setting key is removed).

In the same state, since the push operation by the operating means (in this example, the start lever 135) was accepted, the setting value was determined to setting 6, and the setting change mode ended, so the setting by the storage number display 125 At the same time, the setting change completion display (in this example, a yellow color Display a screen with the text "Settings changed completed" placed in the center of the background image.

In addition, in the same state, since the hopper error has not been resolved, the hopper error notification (second notification) is issued by the segment f of the main board display 190 (second notification means), and the stored sheet number display 125 (second notification) is issued. Continue the hopper error notification (second notification) by the second notification means).

<Changing settings while a certain error remains (Variation 6)/Cancelling a certain operation of a setting key>
The state shown in FIG. 75(g) is a state in which a certain operation using the setting key is canceled (the setting key is removed after the setting key is turned from on to off) and the setting change mode has ended.

In the slot machine 100 of this example, if the power is cut off while a certain error (hopper error in this example) has occurred, and the certain error has not been resolved when the power is turned on (first ), a certain operation using the setting key (in this example, the setting When an operation (turning a key from on to off) is performed, the setting value is changed to a state where it can be changed, and the setting value is changed to an error state related to a certain error related to the completion of the change of the setting value. It is composed of

In the state shown in FIG. 75(g), the setting change mode (a state in which setting values can be changed) has been completed while a hopper error (a certain error) remains, so the state shifts to an error state. In this error state, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 (first notification means) displays an error message (first notification) indicating that a hopper error has occurred. In addition to displaying the character string "Please call us"), a hopper error notification (second notification) is sent by segment f of the main board display 190 (second notification means), and a hopper error notification (second notification) is displayed on the storage number display 125 (second notification means). Continue the hopper error notification (second notification) by the notification means).

According to this example, the error state is entered after the setting value change is completed, so you will not forget to deal with the error due to the work of changing the setting, and the error will be reliably resolved before starting the game. can do.

<Changing settings when a certain error remains (Modification 6)/Resolving connection abnormality>
The state shown in FIG. 75(h) is a state in which the connection abnormality due to the hopper error has been resolved (the first condition has been satisfied).

In the same state, the connection abnormality due to the hopper error has been resolved (the first condition is met), but since the hopper error has not been resolved, the hopper error notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 (first notification means). (first notification), hopper error notification (second notification) by segment f of main board display 190 (second notification means), and hopper error notification by storage number display 125 (second notification means) Continue notification (second notification).

<Setting change when a certain error remains (Variation 6)/Reset button operation>
The state shown in FIG. 75(i) is when the reset button is operated to resolve a hopper error (a certain error) (the second condition is met by the first operation), and the hopper error occurs before the power is turned on. (certain error) has been resolved.

In the same state, the reset button is operated to eliminate the hopper error (the second condition is met), and the hopper error (a certain error) is eliminated, so the liquid crystal display device 157 (the first notification means ), the hopper error notification (first notification), the segment f of the main board display 190 (second notification means), the hopper error notification (second notification), and the storage number display 125 (second notification). The hopper error notification (second notification) by means) is ended.

<Setting change when a certain error remains (Variation 6)/Closing the front door → Normal game>
The state shown in FIG. 75(j) is a state in which the clerk of the gaming parlor has closed the front door 102 after the hopper error has been resolved, and FIG. 75(k) is the state in which normal gaming has started.

In the state shown in FIG. 75(j), since the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, and the effect button 192 are activated to notify the opening (blinking red), and the main board display 190 is activated. While the door opening error notification (segment e lights up in red) is terminated, the storage number display 125 and the payout number display 127 continue to light up and the normal screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and the upper lamp 142 , the side lamp 144 and the presentation button 192 are turned on in a presentation mode, and a demonstration screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

In the state shown in FIG. 75(k), since medals have been inserted, a normal screen is displayed in place of the demo screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and a normal game is started.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. , speakers 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.) and one of a plurality of setting values can be set. a setting means, wherein the notification means starts a first notification (for example, hopper error notification by the liquid crystal display device 157) related to at least a certain error (for example, hopper error). This is a possible means, and the notification means provides at least a second notification related to the certain error (for example, a hopper error notification by the storage number display 125, a hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190). In the case where the error is not resolved when the power is turned on after the power is cut off while the error occurs (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"). ), and if the power is turned off with no error occurring and the power is turned on after a certain operation using the setting key (for example, turning it on from off), the above If the setting value becomes changeable (for example, setting change mode), the power is cut off without an error occurring, and the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on, the setting value is changed. (e.g., setting confirmation mode), and in the first case, at least a part of the period after the power is turned on and before the first notification is started. When an operation is performed, the set value becomes changeable, and in the second case, the second notification may be executed in a state where the set value can be changed. This is a unique game machine.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change the set value even after the power is turned on, so it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk and the like. In addition, if a certain operation is performed at least for a part of the period before the first notification indicating that a certain error has occurred (second case), it is possible to change the set value that has been transferred. Since the second notification may be executed in a situation where the setting value can be changed, it is possible to know that an error has occurred, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the staff at the game parlor. can be increased.

Further, in the second case, only the second notification of the first notification and the second notification may be executed in a state where the setting value is changeable.

With this configuration, when the setting value is changed, it is possible to know through the second notification that an error has occurred, and at the same time, it is possible to prevent excessive error notification from interfering with the work of changing settings. This can improve the convenience of store staff at game parlors and the like.

Further, in the second case, when the setting value is changeable, an error state related to the certain error occurs after the setting value change is completed, and in the error state, the first notification and the second The notification may be executed.

With this kind of configuration, the error state will be entered after the setting value change is completed, so you will not forget to deal with the error due to setting change work, and you will be able to make sure that the error is fixed before starting the game. can be resolved.

Furthermore, in the second case, in a state where the setting value can be changed, if the certain error is resolved, the game can be played without the first notification being performed. .

With such a configuration, there is no need to deal with certain errors, and the burden on the store staff at the game parlor can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the second case, the certain error may be unresolvable while the setting value is changeable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give priority to the work of changing the settings rather than dealing with a certain error, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency of the staff at the game parlor and the like.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, a payout number display 127, a stored number display 125, a speaker 272, 277, upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, reel backlight 148, production button 192, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, etc.), and a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values. , wherein the notification means is a means capable of starting a first notification (for example, hopper error notification by the liquid crystal display device 157) related to at least a certain error (for example, hopper error). The notification means is a means capable of starting at least a second notification related to the certain error (for example, hopper error notification by the storage number display 125, hopper error notification by the segment f of the main board display 190). There is a case where the error is not resolved when the power is turned on after the power is cut off while the error is occurring (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"). , if the power is turned off with no error occurring and the power is turned on after a certain operation using the setting key (for example, turning it on from off), the setting value will be changed. If the power is turned off without an error occurring and the certain operation is performed after the power is turned on, the set value can be checked. state (for example, a setting confirmation mode), and in the first case, the certain operation is performed at least for a part of the period after the power is turned on and before the first notification is started. In the second case, the setting value may be changed to a state in which the setting value can be changed, and in the second case, the second notification may be executed. The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification and the second notification are different notifications.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change the set value even after the power is turned on, so it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk and the like. In addition, if a certain operation is performed at least for a part of the period before the first notification indicating that a certain error has occurred (second case), it is possible to change the set value that has been transferred. Since the second notification may be executed in a situation where the setting value can be changed, it is possible to know that an error has occurred, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the staff at the game parlor. can be increased.

Further, in a state where the setting value can be changed, only the second notification of the first notification and the second notification is executed, and in a state other than the state where the setting value can be changed, the Both the first notification and the second notification may be performed.

With this configuration, when the setting value is changed, it is possible to know through the second notification that an error has occurred, and at the same time, it is possible to prevent excessive error notification from interfering with the work of changing settings. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of store clerks at game parlors and the like, and it is possible to more reliably notify that an error has occurred in a state other than a state in which setting values can be changed.

Further, in the second case, when the setting value is changeable, an error state related to the certain error occurs after the setting value change is completed, and in the error state, the first notification and the second The notification may be executed.

With this kind of configuration, the error state will be entered after the setting value change is completed, so you will not forget to deal with the error due to setting change work, and you will be able to make sure that the error is fixed before starting the game. can be resolved.

Furthermore, in the second case, when the setting value is changeable, if the certain error is resolved, the first notification is not performed and the game is possible. good.

With such a configuration, there is no need to deal with certain errors, and the burden on the store staff at the game parlor can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the second case, the certain error may be unresolvable while the setting value is changeable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give priority to the work of changing the settings rather than dealing with a certain error, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency of the staff at the game parlor and the like.

Further, the game machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is a game machine in which balls enclosed within the game machine are reused. Further, the main control section, the first sub-control section, and the second sub-control section may be configured in one chip, or the main control section and the first sub-control section may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Moreover, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Further, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Furthermore, by applying the content described in one of the plurality of configurations described in the embodiment to another configuration, the range of games may be further expanded.

The game machine according to the present invention can be applied to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. can.

100 Slot machine 110-112 Reel 113 Symbol display window 130-132 Bet button 135 Start lever 137-139 Stop button 157 Liquid crystal display device

Claims (3)

A movable body,
A door body that can be opened and closed,
a detection means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door body;
A game machine comprising:
The movable body starts at least a first operation when the power is turned on with the door body open (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"),
The movable body starts at least a second operation when the door body changes from the first state to the closed state,
Turning the power on and off is executable in the first state,
A state in which the detection state of the detection means detects the closing of the door body even in the first state by performing a certain operation regarding the detection means (hereinafter referred to as "second state"). It is configured to be
When the power is turned on in the second state, the movable body starts the second operation without starting the first operation,
The direction in which the movable body starts operating in the first operation is different from the direction in which the movable body starts operating in the second operation.
A game machine characterized by: In the game machine according to claim 1,
The first operation differs depending on the position of the movable body when the power is turned on,
The first operation is an operation including an operation of moving the movable body to a first position.
A game machine characterized by: In the game machine according to claim 2,
In the first state, there is a case where the movable body is located at the first position (hereinafter referred to as "first case"),
In the first case, when the power is turned on, the movable body starts the operation of returning from the first position to the first position via the third position as the first operation. ,
A game machine characterized by: